Cosmic Reality

BOOK ONEThe John Kennedy - Jesus Christ

Connection

BOOK TWODown the Rabbit Hole

by N.L. Hopkins

Copyright © 2013 N.L. HopkinsAll rights reserved.

PREFACE

This book Cosmic Reality is a compilation of two otherbooks. The first has been available online for free since2003. Well except for the time it was down, after someonehacked the major Internet Server and made it disappear.The second book builds upon the first.

As I am self-publishing, this rather unorthodox presentationof knowledge is something I can do. There is no corporateentity controlling my creative process. And as you will cometo see, it does not matter if anyone reads this book. What iscritical is that I went through the process of creating.

For reasons that are still unknown to me, my life path led meto uncover secrets. Those secrets include historical,scientific and metaphysical subjects. The result of theknowledge allowed me to understand subjects ranging fromsecret societies to the Assassination of President Kennedy;from how energy is behind all life; how Jesus Christaccomplished the Resurrection and how the Shroud of Turinproves it. That was compiled in Book One The JohnKennedy - Jesus Christ Connection.

I was also led to an understanding of the Rules of CosmicReality. I have played by those rules for decades and willattest to their powers. Those rules are discussed in BookOne and can you lead you to become empowered.

Book Two is called Down the Rabbit Hole. It takes you onmy journey into the bizarre reality we find ourselves. In it wewill look at 9/11, the FED, chemtrails, HAARP, doomsdaytheories and much more.

There are so many who have made this journey possible. Ihave followed in the steps of other researchers who riskedeverything to promote truth. I have found my courage fromwhistleblowers and those who were killed working to bringnew sources of energy and technological advancements thathelp everyone, but endangered the powers in control, whichI call the Black Nobles. And I owe those who believed in myability to write a book that is beneficial for others. They gaveme the motivation. Thank you all.

Nancy L. Hopkins September 6, 2013

BOOK ONE

The John Kennedy - Jesus Christ

Connectionby N. L. Hopkins

Copyright Internet Publication 2003

Published in Miami, Florida by Online Publications.com.

Original Copyright Cosmic Reality 1993

Original Copyright under The John Kennedy - Jesus ChristConnection 1988

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Rules 1 thru 4

Chapter 2 The Kennedy Connection

Chapter 3 Just Because You Are Paranoid

Chapter 4 Your Daddy Was a Weirdo

Chapter 5 The Vatican Connection

Chapter 6 The Resurrection of Jesus Christ Connection

Chapter 7 The Time Connection

Bibliography

1 - Cosmic Reality Rules 1 thru 4

One day my sister made the comment, "That's just anotherexample of Cosmic Reality." Laurie did not have to explainthe phrase "Cosmic Reality". What I found ironic is that mylife had been dedicated to the search for some ultimatewisdom, some way of explaining life and our reason forparticipating. I had looked at it all: from the economic/political structure of the world to the probability of Earthbeing visited by extraterrestrial, from ancient history toquantum physics, from Hitler's Nazis to nuclear power, fromMegalithic man to crystals and healing with energy. I spent alifetime studying Life while Laurie lived Life. And in the endshe not only understood Cosmic Reality, she even had aname for it.

This presentation is intended to bring the reader to a workingknowledge of Cosmic Reality. Such knowledge will providethe individual access to personal power. By being"empowered" you will finally understand total freedom.Those who have been ruling the world for millenniumsaccessed Cosmic Reality, took the power, and have ruledReality as they and we have perceived it upon Earth. Theseself-proclaimed rulers of Reality can be thought of as theBlack Nobles and they are your enemy.

The Black Nobles are your enemy because they havewillingly conspired to keep mankind ignorant. It is ignorancethat is the ultimate enemy. The Black Nobles are simply itsagents. The irony is the Black Nobles believe they are actingin our best interest. They do not view themselves as evilincarnate. They are corporate executives, financial wizard,world leaders, scientists of all varieties, religious entities,and others. They have names you would recognize and

1

some you will never hear. My introduction into the reality ofthe Black Nobles came forty years ago when they shatteredthe foundation of my childhood mind - when theyassassinated John Kennedy.

In murdering Kennedy someone assassinated the ideals ofan American generation which continued to judge theAmerican dream in terms of American reality. It was mygeneration that questioned the Vietnam War right intooblivion; that began to use drugs to alter consciousness; thatsearched other cultures in quest of a messiah, yogi, teacher;that popularized concepts of social justice. As a product ofmy generation I had an ingrained suspicion America was notwhat it seemed. In great part, that paranoia was a directconsequence of Kennedy's death and the lies generatedconcerning who had murdered him and why assassinationhad been required.

An unanticipated consequence of the Assassination was theimpact it had on a generation of minds conditioned by theschools, family, and churches to believe in certain acceptedconcepts. In one tragic moment all that learning begancrumbling like a house of cards. In witnessing the stoppingof the world for those three days in November 1963, to havefelt the confusion and fear, to have seen the suddenchanges of the entire look of the nation, my generationmoved away from a belief in the stability of life and weremore apt to believe the only thing permanent in the Universewas change.

This subtle paranoia that I carried with mesince November 1963 allowed me toquestion everything and anything -nothing was sacred. When the high schoolEnglish teacher proposed a debate and aclassmate proposed the subject be FlyingSaucers, I volunteered to take the positionthat UFO's actually existed. At the time ofmy volunteering, I had never evenconsidered the possibility that spacecraft

from another planet could be watching Earth. Afterresearching available data, I had no doubt that someone upthere was watching.

President Kennedy

2

When an acquaintances told about living in a hauntedhouse, I began studying ghosts which led to the whole fieldof "Occult Sciences". "Occult" simple means "hidden". Todaythe same subjects are categorized as "New Age","Metaphysics", "Psychic Research", and "Quantum Physics".

Twenty-five years ago the scientific community was not evenacknowledging the possible truths behind any of the occultsciences. Yet had any of those scientific minds studied theevidence, they, like myself, would have to acknowledge thewealth of data supporting many claims made concerning theexistence of spirit, the power of the mind over the body,telepathy, reincarnation, etceteras. Today many areas ofscience are studying energy as it affects human health.There also exists a science called "Psyonics" which dealswith energy manipulation to allow "Time Travel", as well asdevelopment of unbelievable weapons.

I have discovered many secrets since the day Kennedy died.I even joined the U.S. Army and managed to get to thehighest echelons of the United States IntelligenceCommunity. I have known whom my enemy is for a longtime. Most of this very book was finished in 1988. Yet while Icould identify the enemy, I had no weapon with which todefeat them. Even knowing that ignorance was the BlackNobles ultimate weapon and knowledge the requiredcounter-weapon was not enough. I still did not know whatthat all encompassing weapon of knowledge entailed. It tookfive years before I understood Cosmic Reality and the powerit offered to defeat the enemy.

The following discussion of Cosmic Reality will provide youthe knowledge needed to control your own destiny and thatof the world. You will learn the truth about history andscience. You will change.

Change will set you apart from your friends and family andothers who are not aware of Cosmic Reality. You may feelalone and overwhelmed as you discover the truth about allyou have been taught to believe. But remember you arenever alone.

A physicist once revealed a secret to me. He said,"Sometimes something is not suppose to happen and itdoes. To explain the situation we go to the X factor."

3

"What is the X factor?" I asked.

"Well in the final analysis it is God. When we can find noother explanation we end up turning to God."

For many of us, Science has been the God of the TwentiethCentury. In the end, it was science that proved not only theexistence of God, but the existence of the human soul. Thisis not science fiction or religious quackery. I have spent alifetime uncovering secrets concerning President Kennedy’sAssassination, Nazi Germany, psychic powers, extrater-restrial influence, secret societies, even the Crucifixion ofJesus Christ. But the most simultaneously horrifying andinspiring secrets are those of science.

By the end of this book you should have ample scientific andhistoric proof that you are a manifestation of your soul. Thatyour soul is a manifestation of something divine. That youhave a moral obligation to access the knowledge and powerof your soul and its divine counterpart. And most of all thatyou are not alone....

Cosmic Reality Rule #1

My brother Mark was teaching his six years old daughterAmanda the sport of fishing. Mark managed to bait the hookand cast it out into the lake. Much to his disappointment, thebait went one way and the hook another. Much to his relief,Amanda did not see the bait detach from the hook. Markthought, "Well we never catch anything, anyway, and shewill never know the difference." Mark said nothing toenlighten his daughter to the reality of a baitless hook.

A short time later, excited shouts from Amanda caused Markto chuckle. Amanda was claiming to have caught a fish. Allthe way down to the shore Mark chuckled, knowing Amandamust have caught herself a bouquet of seaweed. But uponjoining his proud daughter, Mark was startled to find a fishdangling at the end of Amanda's line.

In Mark's reality fish do not bite empty hooks. But inAmanda's reality the fish was going to bite the bait shebelieved was on her hook. Apparently the fish bought intoAmanda's reality and not Mark's.

One could argue the fish saw something shining and took a

4

chance. I contend this is an example of the First Rule ofCosmic Reality: Reality is what we think it is.

Oh, sure you have heard this before, maybein connection with "Positive Thinking". Butdid you know that Einstein's 1905 theoriesled to a scientific basis for "Reality is whatwe think it is."?

Isaac Newton n the late 1600's formulateda world view where God dictated creationwould be based upon certain rules, which

Newton identified. While experiment and observationsupported this Newtonian Physics, certain phenomena couldnot be explained by this list of God’s.

In 1905 Einstein was attempting to explain certain of theseseemingly unexplainable phenomena; it is unlikely heintended to bring down Newtonian Physics and God himselfin the process. Einstein provided a way of proving theexistence of the atom, which was at that time suspected butnot yet experimentally identified.

Einstein explained the perplexing photoelectric phenomenaby hypothesizing the existence of the photon as being aparticle manifesting as a wave of light. Then he claimedgravity was a result of the geometry of space - an illusion oflight being bent as it passes near a large mass. And finallythe equation of E=3M2 which simply stated that there is nomatter, matter is the consequence of energy in relationshipto itself. And as human experimental probing adds energyinto any situation, anytime a scientist interacts with hisenvironment that environment has been changed. There wasnothing stable or permanent, Reality was the result of arandom interaction of energy and the best God could dowas give quantum physics a method to determine theprobability something would happen. God was a dice playerand odds maker.

Einstein rejected this rendering of his initial theories andbelieved that God did not play dice. He believed there was ayet unidentified power at the very foundation of reality whichwould easily explain the existence of electric, magnetic,gravitational, and nuclear energy fields. During the ensuingyears just such a unifying field has been identified by

Albert Einstein

5

quantum scientists of the 1980's.

But Einstein did not wait 45 years for the proof that Godexisted. In 1943 he and others took a shortcut. During a U.S.Navy experiment, a ship and its crew were accidentallyshifted into another time zone. Among other things, theexperiment proved human beings are comprised of electro-magnetic fields that can exist apart from the physical body.They had established the existence of the human soul.

The "Philadelphia Experiment", as it has come to be known,also demonstrated the existence of multiple time lines. Anygiven future is only a possible future. The future dependsupon what happens in any given present. What will happentomorrow depends upon what happens today. Today'sreality will influence tomorrow's reality - what we think iswhat we will get. Reality is what we think it is - Rule #1 ofCosmic Reality.

Cosmic Reality: Rule #2

Back to Mark and his fishing lesson: Amanda thought shewould catch a fish and so did the fish. Amanda and the fishshared the same reality, which was much different fromMark's. Two against one and Mark's reality did not exist. Thisbrings us to the Second Rule of Cosmic Reality: it isnecessary to have a prevailing opinion of what reality shouldbe to have any order to life. In other words, the majorityrules. Amanda and the fish outvoted Mark and their realityprevailed over his.

Cosmic Reality: Rule #3

The Third Rule of Cosmic Reality is that those who are inpositions of power will keep everyone else fromknowing the first two rules of Cosmic Reality, which onlymakes sense. If you control a given reality, you certainly donot want that reality messed with, do you?.

Cosmic Reality is the reality of those who have beencontrolling the reality of everyone else. Certain men havekept secrets from us, to keep us ignorant of the powers eachand everyone has at our command. By keeping the secretsof Personal Power from the masses, these self acclaimedrulers have maintained their economic, political, cultural, andsocial control over the world. They have also inflicted upon

6

the planet a present and a projected future that arefrightening in the very least.

There is However the promise that if enough people come torealize Cosmic Reality, the future will be spectacular.Understanding Cosmic Reality has allowed those in power toretain their power. It has also resulted in scientific venturesinto time travel, mind control, alchemy, manifestation, andmuch more. By Jesus Christ's acceptance of Cosmic Reality,the feat of resurrection was possible. Secret organizationsthroughout the world teach Cosmic Reality to chosenindividuals. To reach the pinnacles of world power you mustbelong to one or more of these secret societies.

Our view of whom and what we are as individuals andnations have depended upon what we have been told is oureconomic, cultural, social, political, and technologicalhistories. By maintaining a fictional history of this planet, thesecret societies have prevented us from evolving into anunderstanding of Cosmic Reality and to benefit from thatknowledge.

One's approach to the present and future depends uponone's perception of a given reality which ultimately hingesupon the past. Past, present, and future all hang together.Change your perspective on any one and the others mustshift.

This book will take the reader down a path that will changeperceptions of reality. It is a path encompassing 2,000 years,leading to secrets jealously guarded by history's mostpowerful men and organizations. Through search and luck Ihave uncovered some of the secret history of this planet.

By revealing the true background to our reality, reality willshift. As more and more people begin to understand CosmicReality, individuals will begin exercising their own personalindividual powers. It really is simply a matter of getting theword out. Sometimes control over reality is as simple astelling your daughter the bait fell off the hook. Sometimeschanging reality takes technological assistance, as in thecase of the fall of the Communist Reality.

By dominating the means of spreading information, theCommunist leadership enhanced control over the masses.

7

Not only were television and printed media run by thegovernments, devices that could print or copy were strictlymanaged and regulated. Typewriters, copy machines,computers, etceteras were all in the hands of the leaders.However for whatever reasons, when FAX technologyallowed printed material to be sent over telephone lines andcopied on the other end, the leaders did not react to thedanger. FAX equipment became the primary manner ofspreading word of the new belief. This new belief was onethat saw the end of one Communist nation after another untilit was all over within three short months. The 90% of theCommunist World had realized they were being dominatedby only 10% of the population supporting Communist theory.

While FAX technology allowed rebellion leaders to organizein an unprecedented manner, I contend something else wasat work. This "something else" has come to be known as"The Hundredth Monkey Syndrome".

The Hundredth Monkey Syndrome

Two separate scientific groups from two different countries,on islands separated by hundreds of miles simultaneouslystudied the same species of monkey. Neither group knew ofthe other's efforts until after publication of their individualstudies. On one island a female monkey began mimickingthe humans who washed their potatoes before eating. Soonthe immediate family of this one monkey also began washingpotatoes. The scientists watched the slow spread of this newknowledge until the day the hundredth monkey learned thebenefits of washing a potato. Suddenly every member of theisland's monkey population began washing potatoes.

Hundreds of miles away on another islAnd the second set ofscientist were astounded as all the monkeys on their islandbegan washing potatoes. Somehow over hundreds of milesof ocean, the message was sent and heard by the samebreed of monkey: washed potatoes are much more pleasantto eat than unwashed.

Reality had shifted for these monkeys. Perhaps they did noteven remember ever having eaten an unwashed potato. Thestory is true and it has sent many a human mind in search ofthe connecting link: what medium allowed for the transmis-sion of the knowledge surrounding washed potatoes?

8

It was of course the Second Rule of Cosmic Reality inaction. For it is not just the numbers of people thinking acertain thing that creates that thought into reality. It is thepower of the thought; And one extraordinary thinker canoutweigh millions of humans who give little thought toanything. Or a terrific idea like washed potatoes can havesuch impact that the thought becomes overpowering. Or theidea that Communism was just not working and it was withinthe power of the people to make a change. Powerfulconcepts can change reality. However the change dependsupon getting the word out.

Cosmic Reality: Rule #4

Powerful people keep the masses ignorant in order tocontrol reality. Histories are rewritten and scientific facts arekept as secrets to prevent individuals from understandingtheir own personal powers and threatening accepted reality.If each person understood the power of their own thoughts,reality would take on a whole new meaning.

Rule Four of Cosmic Reality is: Success lies in the beingnot in the doing. To change reality all any of us have to dois to change our own individual way of thinking. While youmay not have to go marching, or protesting, or outwardlyinvolving yourself in reality changing, altering your way ofthinking is not the easiest thing to accomplish.

One approach is to think of reality as a drawing. If youchange the background, the foreground is effected. Byunderstanding the true historical past, your perception of thepresent will be altered. In viewing the present in a new light,you will see your own role differently. You will have changedthe way you think.

But this book will provide more than just historical truth foryou to use. The rules of Cosmic Reality you will bepresented are based upon scientific fact. While it is notnecessary that you fully understand the science, by havingaccess to the secrets of science your belief in CosmicReality will be strengthened.

It is hoped the information presented in this book will aid thereader in gaining a more accurate perspective on history andscience. To make the process of relearning less painful,

9

much of the information is autobiographical. By explaininghow I came to uncover such hidden secrets and how thisnew information impacted upon my life, your discovery ofhidden history and science may be less upsetting than if theNightly News suddenly jarred you with stories concerningtime travel, space visitors, psychic weapons, secret societiesruling the world, or even the truth about who ordered theassassination of John F. Kennedy....

10

2 - The Kennedy Connection

When the town's elementary schoolburned down, double sessions at theother schools resulted in shorterschool days in November 1963. I washome, changed and already at myneighbor's a few houses down thestreet. It was just after 2:15 PMEastern Standard and the radio wason in the kitchen, which I had walked

through after entering by the back door. I was through thedining room and in the living room when I felt I was walkingthrough some kind of barrier. I stopped puzzled, askingaloud, "What's happening?"

My attention was drawn to the voice from the radio. "It isconfirmed, President Kennedy is dead of gunshot wounds.He was shot down while riding in a motorcade in Dallas,Texas. We repeat, President John F. Kennedy has died of agunshot wound...."

"What are they saying?" My mind was stumbling to makesense of whatever was happening. I felt lightheaded, as ifmy reality had somehow shifted. Nothing seemed right. AndKennedy was dead. The man who had been from my state,the man whom I campaigned for; the man who representedevery dream I had been taught to honor; the veryembodiment of everything I had been taught to admire anddesire - the war hero, the religious man, the good father andhusbAnd the wealthy and charismatic President of theUnited States was dead. Someone had shot him. Someonehad shot and killed the President.

My friend came down the stairs and asked, "What's wrong?"

11

"They killed Kennedy. He's dead," was all I said beforeretracing my steps through the dinning room, past the radioin the kitchen, out the back door, across the vacant lotbehind the houses, and back home.

Mom was in the kitchen when I walked in and she said, "Ithought you went to see Lois?"

Again I relayed the news, "President Kennedy is dead.Someone shot him." I did not stay to watch the shockovertake my Mom. She followed me to the television. Thatday reality changed in one dramatic moment after another,as one after another the people of the nation and the worldconfronted the Assassination. Each of us had our realitiesshattered so dramatically that all of us remember where wewere and what we were doing the day John Kennedy died.

Some of us wanted to get it all behind us and chose toaccept the conclusion that Lee Oswald single handily killedKennedy. Oswald happened to be some sort of egocentriclooser who just happened to be working in a buildingproviding the best vantage point for assassinating Kennedyin the Dallas, Texas motorcade. Some of us chose thisofficial view of history.

Others of us believed this view was too simplistic and left alltoo much to chance. There was more to the story. Evenothers were sure that the rest of story was being activelycovered up. A few became obsessed with uncovering the fulltruth behind the Assassination.

For me the Assassination was something less than anobsession and something more than a hobby. I immediatelybegan compiling data concerning the murder. By the time Iwas a Sophomore at the University of Massachusetts, myfile on the Kennedy killing and ensuing cover-up was an inchand a half thick. Much of the data was comprised of nota-tions as to what subject was covered in which newspaper,magazine, or book.

During that sophomore year, a critic of Oswald alone theorycame to speak at the University. The setting was informaland casual in a small dormitory lounge. The man, whom Iwill call James White, believed the official version ofKennedy's death was wrong.

12

The Warren Commission, which had been given the task ofinvestigating the Assassination, concluded Lee HarveyOswald fired three shots from a single shot Carcano rifle atthe Presidential motorcade.

One bullet passed through the President'scoat and shirt 5 3/4 inches below thecollar and exited through the throat justbelow the Adam's Apple. The apparentmajor difference in the clothing holes andbullet trajectory through the throat wasexplained as the clothing ridding up as thePresident waved to the crowd.

This single bullet went onto enter Texas GovernorConnally under his rightarmpit. The bullet exitedConnally's chest, belowhis right nipple andreentered his body,shattering his wrist andexiting again. The bullet'sfinal wound was in the

Governor's right thigh. A second bullet missed. The thirdentered the President's brain. There were no conspirators.Oswald planned and executed the killing alone.

Critic James White was discussing the numerous problemswith the Warren Commission verdict when I asked what hethought about the third wound on Kennedy's body. White didnot know what I was talking about. I produced my file andquickly located a notation concerning a newspaper accountrelating statements of two FBI agents present at Kennedy'sofficial autopsy.

FBI Agents Sibert and O'Neill stated that in addition to theneck and head wounds, a third apparent bullet wound waslocated in Kennedy's upper back. The FBI agents alsoclaimed the autopsy surgeon Dr. James Humes thought thewound was an entrance wound and could not figure wherethe bullet had gone. Humes probed the wound, which was

13

not very deep, thus more of a puncture.

White was confused for a major reason: nowhere in theWarren Commission Report were the FBI agents mentionedas attending the autopsy and their official report had notbeen available to the Warren Commission. White's firstexposure to this FBI connection was my notation concerningthe newspaper account. He copied down the information.

Within days I realized my Kennedy file was missing. In mynaivete I thought it had been misplaced. Ten years later Idiscovered James White had died in a bar room brawl twoweeks after our encounter. I believe the protectors of theAssassination's secrets had killed White and stolen my file -assuming a college sophomore would give up the searchrather quickly.

These unknown protectors had stopped White and myselffrom pursuing the truth. They did not stop David S. Liftonyears later when he uncovered the key to the Assassinationpuzzle and the third undiscussed wound. As soon as I sawthe book Best Evidence on the bookstore shelf I had to haveit. I am glad I did not wait to purchase this extraordinarybook. The copy I have is the only one I have ever seenanywhere. This seven-hundred-page, heavily documentedbook will be summarize to just the basics. My apologies to

14

Mr. Lifton for the intense simplification of his work.

Best Evidence by David Lifton

Someone had a motive for killing the President of the UnitedStates compelling enough to plan assassination. Obviouslythe planners realized the resulting murder investigationwould be as comprehensive as ever conducted. Howeverthe likelihood of a clue turning up would be diminished if theauthorities were able to apprehend an assassin as soon aspossible. The longer the investigation went on, the moredanger it presented for the Assassination's planners. Itwould be advantageous to have someone around to take theblame - someone like Lee Oswald.

If you wished to have someone specific blamed for thekilling, you would want him captured as soon as possible. Itappears the Assassination planners provided authorities withdata immediately implicating Oswald: The bullets hit thePresident at 12:30 P.M. and by 12:38 police radiotransmissions to the dispatcher pinpointed the sixth floorsniper nest at the Texas Book Depository.

This information came from police radio calls by officers atthe scene claiming the information was from an unidentifiedwitness. Within fifteen minutes of the Assassination, thedispatcher was giving the height, age, and weight of LeeOswald provided by another Dallas Sheriff on the scene,who also received his information from an unidentifiedsource. Yet when the dispatcher rebroadcast the informationthe words "slender build" had been added to Oswald'sphysical description.

The question asked by David Lifton was - how did thedispatcher know the suspect had a "slender build"? Liftonalso noted that while each policeman was ordered by thedispatcher to get all relevant information regardinginformants' identities, none of the officers did. In each casevaluable witnesses never came forward remainingunidentified.

At the time of Kennedy's trip to Dallas, Oswald was workingat the Texas School Book Depository where a sniper's nestwas found. Discovered there was a rifle supposedly tracedback to a mail-order request signed by Oswald who had

15

been using an alias. Oswald's palm print was detected onthe rifle, along with fibers from his shirt. The two recoveredbullet fragments and an intact bullet were ballisticallydetermined to have been fired from the Carcano rifle. Theonly other piece of evidence required to provide an ironcladcase against Lee Oswald was President Kennedy's body. Toconvict Oswald, Kennedy would have to be shot by a bulletentering from the rear. This problem of showing a rear shotcreated a problem from the beginning.

The above graphic shows the motorcade route. ThePresidential limousine made a drastic 90 degree turn ontoHouston Street and proceeded directly toward the TexasBook Depository. As the motorcade approached Elm Streetand an even more drastic turn, the cars slowed down to acrawl. The best shot would have been at that point onHouston Street (0), just before the turn down Elm Street. Bythe time the first rear shot was available (1), the limousinewas on Elm Street and moving away. The fatal shot (3) wasthe third bullet fired. Both of the following photos were takenfrom the Sixth Floor Window where the Sniper's Nest wasfound.

16

If Oswald was the sole shooter, stationed in the sniper’s neston the sixth floor, the only best shot would be a frontal shottoward Houston Street. A shot down Elm Street wouldpresent a much greater chance of failure. But what ifOswald was not the shooter and was being set up to takethe fall as the assassin? Oswald was at the Texas BookDepository. He was seen by multiple witnesses as being inthe building, at the time of the shooting. The real assassinswould want to make the evidence look like the shots hadcome from the Texas Book Depository.

For whatever reasons,the best shot at Kennedyby the actual assassin (orassassins) was on ElmStreet. David Lifton andscores of researchershave demonstrated theevidence is compellingthat the President waskilled by shots comingfrom the front of the

limousine, not from the rear and the Texas Book Depository.

When a bullet enters a human body, the entrance woundcorresponds to the dimension of the bullet. In exiting thebody, However the bullet blows open a wound many timeslarger than the entrance. Thus the size of a given wound canindicate entrance and exit paths. Supposing someone

17

wished to frame Oswald, Kennedy's body had to show a rearentrance wound and an exit hole in the frontal portion of thebody.

To set Oswald up it was imperative no bullets or wounds bediscovered from any direction other than the sixth floorsniper nest where Oswald's Carcano rifle was planted. Thereal assassins had to fire from positions in front of Kennedywhile using exploding ammunition referred to as "dumdum"bullets. This type ammunition creates a small entrancewound while mushrooming out and disintegrating beforetraversing the body. There is seldom an exit wound.

In David Lifton's scenario, one or more assassins fired fromin front of the Presidential limousine aiming at Kennedy,while someone else (Oswald - maybe) fired from the rear ofthe motorcade at Governor Connally using the Carcano rifle.Bullets previously fired from the rifle were planted at thescene with one in good enough condition to leave no doubtin the minds of ballistic experts as to what weapon fired it..

As bizarre as it seems, to create the required illusion, theAssassination planners had to gain control over Kennedy'sbody to surgically alter the physical evidence! Entranceholes in the front of the body would be enlarged to mimic exitwounds. The remains of the spent bullets still inside thebody would be extracted through these enlarged openings.Small holes opposite the surgically altered wounds would beadded to correspond to entrance wounds. To a surgeonignorant in forensic medicine, an illusion of a bullet'strajectory trough the body would then exist. The man whoconducted the Kennedy autopsy - James Humes - was notqualified in Forensic Pathology and had never conducted anautopsy on a gun shot case, nor had any of the otherautopsy pathologists present.

Yet no matter how well conceived, the plansof men all to often fall prey to the unexpected.Abraham Zapruder's film was one suchevent: no one planning the murder couldhave foretold that Zapruder would capture theentire assassination on film. Theoretically,with no perceived reason to limit the number

of bullets fired, shooting Connally from the rear would have

Zapruder’s camera

18

strengthened the case against Oswald. With the Zapruderfilm's chronicle of the exact timing between Kennedy beingshot through the neck to the fatal head shot, the wounding ofConnally confused the situation.

The Zapruder film's introduction of time limiting the numberof bullets was only one unplanned element. Two moredifficult problems dealt with the actual impact points on thePresident's body - namely the throat and head.

John Kennedy was alive although not breathing whenbrought to Parkland Medical Center, minutes away fromDealey Plaza and the Texas Book Depository. In attemptingto resuscitate the President, the attending physiciansneeded to do a procedure called a tracheotomy, whichclears a passageway to the lungs by making a small hole inthe throat area. As the President's tie and shirt wereremoved, the doctors found a small bullet hole in his throat -perfectly positioned as an incision point for the tracheotomy.Five Dallas attending physicians believed the bullet whichhad pierced the throat was lodged somewhere in the lungs,because Kennedy's respiratory system continued to beerratic even after the successful tracheotomy.

While the throat wound was not fatal,the head shot was lethal. PresidentKennedy died before the Dallasdoctors could ascertain for certain thepath the throat wounding bullet hadtaken. The path of the bullet hittingKennedy in the head did not appearto be a mystery to the Dallas doctors,

during their nationally televised news conference later thatafternoon. I clearly remember Dr. Malcolm Perry pointing tohis own right temple demon-strating the point to entrance.

This most important event was carried on the three majornetworks, yet Lifton could not locate any piece of filmconcerning that press conference. So although still photosexist with Perry pointing to his right temple, the film recordhas apparently disappeared from the libraries of the threenetworks.

The Dallas doctors believed a bullet entering the front right

Dr. Malcom Perry, Dallas TX

19

temple traveled through Kennedy'sbrain and obviously exited at thepoint where the skull had been blownopen in the lower right rear area. Thesoft brain tissue had failed to stop themushrooming dumdum bullet whichblew open a telltale exit wound in theright rear skull. The bullet enteringthe neck was believed to havetraveled downward to effect therespiratory system.

It would appear the conspiracy to frame Oswald as the solekiller had failed. The tracheotomy incision made by theDallas Doctors could be surgically enlarged to look like anexit wound. But to reverse the picture presented by thePresident's broken skull would, if possible, require a massiveamount of surgery. Certainly such surgery would beapparent to any autopsy physician.

In fact, the official autopsy doctor James Humes testified tothe Warren Commission that Kennedy's brain had beensurgically autopsied before the official autopsy began!However Humes had related this information in suchtechnical data that no one understood what he was reallysaying. Humes graphically and technically related what hehad seen before beginning the autopsy. Unfortunately, therewere no neurosurgeons on the Warren Commission, nor wasthere one among the critics of the commission's verdict. Itwas not until an interested David Lifton requested aneurosurgeon friend to provide a layman's explanation ofwhat Humes had said that the truth became known.

The Dallas doctors described Kennedy's head wound as in

20

the lower right rear of the skull, egg shaped, about 2 inchesby 2 3/4 inches in size. What Humes found at Bethesdawhere the autopsy was conducted was a massive headwound, 5 1/8 inches across extending from the lower rightrear upward for six inches. Between Dallas and Bethesda,the wound described by numerous doctors in both locationshad been expanded by twice its size.

Moreover, at Bethesda the wound was completely devoid ofscalp and some 70% of the right brain was missing -observations the Dallas doctors had somehow failed toperceive. Furthermore, when Humes removed the blood-saturated head wrapping - wrapping that had not beenapplied to the President's head in Dallas - skull fragmentshad fallen onto the Bethesda autopsy table.

And what of the throat wound? Insteadof a cleanly cut incision extending thesmall bullet hole for an inch and a half,Humes found a widely gaping woundwith irregular edges about three incheslong. Regardless of the apparentlysloppy technique, Humes realized atracheotomy had been conducted andHumes did not immediately interpretthe tracheotomy as an exit hole.Humes did not know about the bulletwound until the following morning,when he spoke by telephone to Dr.Perry in Dallas.

Humes changed the official results ofthe autopsy to include the conclusionthe tracheotomy had been made at apoint where a bullet had exited thethroat. The official version was notreleased until November 24, two daysafter the autopsy. In this way, Humeswas able to explain away the strange,apparently shallow puncture woundfound in Kennedy's back during theautopsy reported by the two FBIagents. In the official autopsy results,

Throat wound seen inBethesda

21

Humes raised the wound so it would correspond to anentrance wound for a bullet supposedly exiting in the frontthroat area, later used as the point of the tracheotomy.

Yet the Dallas doctors believed the neck wound was anentrance point for a bullet that became lodged in the upperrespiratory system. Humes contributes additional confirmingdata concerning the Dallas observation by noting the rightlung was bruised near the top. Humes ordered photographstaken of this area - shots which were not included in theofficial set of autopsy photographs.

But when and where couldall this have taken place?The body was wrapped in asheet and placed in abronze casket, put aboardAir Force One and flown toWashington. It was taken offAir Force One and taken toBethesda for the autopsy.The only possible way forthe body to have been

surgically altered, in the allotted time frame, would be for thebronze casket to have been empty.

Lifton located witnesses in Bethesda who saw thePresident's remains in a body bag as he lay in a plain, grayshipping casket. Somewhere in route the body had beenremoved from the bronze coffin, brought to a facility capableof taking x-rays and surgically altered. In a crazy episodereminiscent of a Keystone Cops routine, the President'sbody was returned to the bronze coffin and brought into theautopsy room in time to be officially autopsied by Humes.

Lifton's evidence was impressive and well presented in hisBEST EVIDENCE. But I would have still had a hard timeswallowing this far-fetched scenario had it not been for onelittle piece of my history. I remember being fifteen years oldand watching televised views of Bethesda during the timethe President's body was arriving, where they showed thesecond coffin being taken off an ambulance and brought intothe rear of the building where the autopsy was to take place.I remember the commentators wondering what it all meant.

Bronze casket being boarded on Air ForceOne, Dallas TX

22

Was it just luck that had the television tuned into the networkwith a camera in position to see the second coffin? Granted,David Lifton was able to answer innumerable questionsvoiced by myself and others. And he certainly provides avast treasure of documented evidence to support his claims.But it was my memory of the second casket that forced meto accept Lifton's strange theory, as the most probablemanner in which the President was executed and how thatexecution was made to look like the work of one crazyperson named Oswald.

Lee Harvey Oswald

Who was Lee Harvey Oswald? That question led me to lookin David Lifton's bibliography of Best Evidence for moreinformation on this supposed crazed killer. The mostinteresting listing was a book entitled Legend: the SecretWorld of Lee Harvey Oswald written by Edward Jay Epstein.The book was out of print and my bookstore clerk said itwould take months to locate an available copy. I decided theexpense and time were not worth getting a book I was notpositive would be of value.

Perhaps I would have gone to a library in hopes of findingthe Epstein book, but more likely I would have just forgotten

23

the whole thing. As it was, I left the bookstore and continuedon to my next stop, a large discount store. As I was makingmy way through the store, I came upon a section of discountbooks. On a whim, I searched and found a $1.98 copy ofEpstein's critical data on Oswald!

In October 1956, Oswald entered theMarine Corps where he finishedseventh in his basic training class. InAugust 1957, he set out for Atsugi AirForce base, 35 miles southeast ofTokyo, Japan. Atsugi was also thelocation for the Joint TechnicalAdvisory Group containing one of theCIA's main operational bases in Asia,as well as the homebase of the ultra-secret spy plane, the U-2.

In November 1958, Oswald re-deployed to the United States wherehe was honorably discharged fromthe Marines. In September 1959,Oswald defected to the Soviet Union.In response to the defection Oswald's discharge wasdowngraded to dishonorable in September 1960. Secretary

of the Navy at the time was JohnConnally, later with Kennedy in theDallas motorcade as the Governor ofTexas.

Oswald stayed in the Soviet Union fortwo-and-a-half years until June 1962,when he returned to the UnitedStates with his Soviet wife Marinaand his daughter. A year-and-a-halflater Oswald was killed in Dallaswhile in police custody for the killingof President Kennedy and woundingof Texas Governor Connally.

There are facts which could lead oneto believe Oswald was an assassinworking for the KGB. He had, after alldefected to the Soviet Union. In

24

addition, in October 1963 a month before the assassination,Oswald went to Mexico and the Soviet Embassy where hetalked with a member of the KGB. In fact, the evidence ofSoviet complacency in the Assassination was compellingenough that, on June 24, 1964 Richard Helms, manager ofcovert CIA activities, met with Chief Justice Warren to informhim of the possible KGB connection. It is probable that theWarren Commission may have believed in the KGB link.

It is important that we do not underestimate the amount ofplanning that went into the Assassination. In covertoperations, a good plan is to create two or more deceptions.The backup deceptions are there in case the primary coverstory is blown. In the Assassination, the primary cover storyis that Oswald was a crazy, disaffected individual workingalone to kill the President of the United States. If someonedug deeply enough and broke through the lie concerningOswald's sanity, a second protective lie had to exist. In theKennedy killing, the planners needed Oswald specifically asthe patsy to effectively create the second Assassinationcover story - namely that Oswald was working for theSoviets.

By making the Warren Commission members believeOswald was a KGB agent any piece of data that did not fitthe Oswald-crazy-man scenario could be overlooked byindividuals believing they were working in the best interest ofthe nation. In those dark days following the Assassinationwith the fear associated with the Cuban Missile Crisis a yearbefore not forgotten, some of those covering up importantdata concerning Kennedy's death may have firmly believedthey were protecting the American people from beinginformed of a Soviet involvement in the Assassination. Inprotecting Americans from the truth, some may havebelieved they were protecting the world from nuclear crisis.

Another set of evidence has been interpreted in two ways.The evidence is derived from Oswald's activities upon hisreturn to the United States, beginning in April 1963 when hewent to New Orleans. During that time, Oswald has beenlinked to the Mafia, as well as both Pro-Cuban and Anti-Cuban activities. This leads to the possibility that the Mafiaplanned and executed the Assassination due to their

25

perceived need to stop John and Attorney General RobertKennedy from further pursuits against organized crime. Orone could argue Fidel Castro was out to get the Presidentbecause of a CIA plot to assassinate the Cuban leader. Anumber of books have been written supporting both theseinterpretations. However all such theories are based uponthe assumption that the disaffected Oswald, while he did notact alone, was part of the assassination team.

For a number of years I was a Personnel Security Officer forthe United States Military. That position provided knowledgeconcerning the requirements for obtaining and keeping asecurity clearance, which gave me a unique perspective onLee Oswald. In fact, I came to believe Oswald was workingas an American spy when he defected to the Soviet Union. IfOswald was still working for the American IntelligenceCommunity when he returned to the U.S., his activities inNew Orleans takes on an entirely different interpretation.Perhaps he was spying on the Cuban and Mafiaorganizations, rather than a mentally disturbed participant.

Oswald's unit in Japan was theMarine Air Control Squadron One,codenamed "Coffee Mill", whichassisted in tracking America's super-secret spy plane the U-2. As amember of this unit, Oswald must

have held at least a Secret Clearance, probably even a TopSecret Clearance.

While assigned to Coffee Mill, Oswald did certain thingswhich should have been grounds for immediate revocationof his clearance And therefore, his access to secret U-2information.

* October 27, 1957: Oswald grazed his own upper arm witha derringer's .22 caliber bullet and was charged with havingan unregistered weapon. Confinement was suspended.* June 1958: Oswald was convicted in a summary court-martial for using "provoking words" and was sentenced to 28days in the stockade.* October 1958: Oswald went for medical treatment after anapparent nervous breakdown which should have resulted inrevoking of his clearance but did not.

U-2 spy plane

26

This failure of authorities to take any security precautionsconcerning the erratic, irresponsible, and certainly nottrustworthy Oswald is baffling. This apparent breakdown innormal security practice was particularly glaring in light ofthe September 1958 complete compromise of the U-2 IFFradar system. This situation would have been considered amajor security breach involving Oswald's unit and shouldhave brought all unit members under intense scrutiny

Such an investigation would have uncovered Oswald'sregular attendance at the local bar where the hostesseswere believed to be possible communist agents. Thesoldier's monthly $85 could not have supported the $60-$100 cost of a date, never mind frequent visits.

In light of the rest of Oswald's background, I began thinkingit is likely he was acting as an American informant, in somecapacity. With this working theory of Oswald being anAmerican agent, I began looking for other evidence thatcould paint Oswald as a spy, or when he went to the SovietUnion as a double-double agent. After all, Oswald's favoritetelevision program was the story of an FBI double-doubleagent, "I Lived Three Lives".

In October 1959 a month after arriving in the Soviet Union,Oswald met with the Senior Consular Officer in MoscowRichard E. Snyder. Oswald wanted to renounce his U.S.citizenship. Snyder testified that Oswald made remarksconcerning valuable information he intended relating toSoviet authorities.

On May 1, 1960 Francis Gary Powers had his U-2 shot downby a missile that probably homed in on the spy-plane's radar.Oswald had access to information which could have assistedthe Soviets in downing Powers. The U-2 incident andOswald's stated intention to Snyder to provide the Sovietsinformation, naturally leads one to believe Oswald couldhave been guilty of releasing secret information on the U-2project. Such action would have put him in a position ofbeing indicted under U.S. espionage acts. Even if innocent,Oswald would have come under suspicion by competentAmerican authorities.

On the face of it, Oswald should have feared theconsequences of returning to America where he should have

27

been brought up on espionage charges whether guilty orinnocent. Yet Oswald did return to America and was nevereven questioned about the U-2 incident and his possiblecompromise of classified data.

This all seemed confusing until one piece of data wasbrought to light: as of May 1959 the CIA had been informedby the most valuable undercover American spy in the USSRthat the U-2 program had already been compromised. Anyinformation Oswald could have provided the Soviets wasalready dated by the time of his defection six months later.Thus, before his defection, Oswald was an ideal candidatefor playing double-double agent: he could endear himself tothe Soviets by releasing classified information the U.S. knewhad been compromised while posing no real security hazard.

Consul Snyder in Moscowhad continued contactswith Oswald. One episodein particular made Snyderbelieve there was somesort of unofficial-officialcommunication betweenOswald outside of StateDepartment channels.

Marquerite Oswald, Lee’smother obtained an ap-

pointment with two State Department officials in Washingtonconcerning her missing son, which resulted in a query letterbeing sent to Moscow by diplomatic pouch on February 1,1961. While Snyder had still not responded to the query, onFebruary 13 a letter from Oswald arrived postmarkedFebruary 5.

The only explanation Snyder could offer regarding howOswald knew about Marguerite Oswald's concerns was toassume he was in communication with someone outsideofficial State Department channels. If Oswald was still a loyalAmerican in spite of his Soviet defection, that channel wouldbe someone working for the U.S. Intelligence Services.

Marguerite herself later suggested on the night of November22, 1963 during an FBI interrogation of her, that her son wasa government agent. Based upon the U-2 incident, the

28

logical probability that Oswald would be brought up onespionage charges did not dissuade the defector fromrequesting a return to the United States. He also made therequest that his Soviet family accompany him.

On May 31, 1962 as Oswald prepared to leave the SovietUnion, FBI headquarters ordered Oswald be interrogatedupon his return. The FBI already had an open file on Oswaldsince his defection. An initial questioning of Oswald'sassociates had been conducted five months after hisdefection, a month before the U-2 was shot down.

There exists an FBI memorandum that was supposedly sentto the State Department indicating that an impostor couldassume Oswald's identity - although it is unclear why thismessage was sent. The lookout card that was supposed tohave been placed in Oswald's State Department file inresponse to the memorandum was never found. Anotherreported FBI action taken regarding Oswald was onNovember 10, 1959 when a "flash" notice was placed onOswald's FBI fingerprint card to preclude an impostor.

Upon his U.S. return, Oswald was interrogated by FBI AgentJohn W. Fain who suggested the ex-defector bereinterviewed and took it upon himself to requestion Oswaldon August 16, 1962. Four days later the Oswald case wasclosed, although it is not known whether a finger print checkhad confirmed Oswald's identity. Dropping the case isperhaps not extraordinarily suspicious except in consideringthe FBI's decision not to question Oswald's Soviet wife aspart of its ongoing program of interrogating Russianéémigréés; even more suspicious due to the wife's unclebeing a ranking member of the Soviet Military IntelligenceService.

Dropping the Oswald case in light of the U-2 incident, hisdefection, supposed fear of an impostor, along with the FBIfailure to question Oswald's wife borders on criminal neglectunless the FBI knew Oswald worked for another intelligenceagency.

Even the CIA acted strangely upon Oswald's return - failingto follow through on procedure for interviewing returningexpatriates. Yet while the CIA would have been interested inOswald's remarks concerning anything the Soviets had

29

done, the FBI was the agency which should have shown themost concern, that Oswald or his wife could be working as aKGB agent and that Oswald may have broken his securityoath and passed classified information to the Soviets.

The evidence indicates the CIA and FBI were either veryincompetent regarding Oswald or that they knew he was anagent for some other U.S. intelligence agency. If it wasincompetence, it stretched throughout the intelligencecommunity: after four months in Fort Worth, Texas Oswaldbecame an employee of Jaggars-Chiles-Stoval a firmworking on classified military maps. The ex-defector whocould have already broken his security oath was once againgiven access to American secrets. The Soviets consideredmap work so important that every map of the Soviet Unionwas classified and any released for public use had built-inerrors.

From the Soviet point of view, Oswald's return to the U.S.particularly with a Soviet wife would have presented a badimage. Perhaps the Soviets just wanted to be rid of theOswald problem and did not consider image. On the otherhAnd suppose Oswald convinced the Soviets that he couldreturn to the U.S. and be a friend to the Soviets in some role.

At the map firm, Oswald could have been a Soviet agentpassing on vital secrets. Or he could have been working asa double-double agent passing information with U.S. built-inerrors. In any case, Oswald was in a critical position. If hewas an agent for either country, only some mission ofgreater importance would have taken him away fromJaggars-Chiles-Stoval. Epstein could not determine whyOswald was fired from the firm in April 1963.

It was then Oswald went to New Orleans and becameinvolved with Cuban and Mafia activities. The increasinglyagitated activities of Cubans and the growing anger of theMafia against Robert Kennedy's Attorney General activitieswere a threat to the Administration, if not Kennedy himself.As New Orleans was a central hot spot, it would have beenadvantageous to get a government agent into New Orleansto spy on the Cubans and Mafia. Lee Oswald had grown upin New Orleans, his uncle had Mafia connections, and Leewas a supposed communist sympathizer. If he was an agent

30

for the U.S., Oswald had unique credentials for infiltratingthe on-goings in New Orleans.

Who was Lee Harvey Oswald? I believe the evidenceindicates he was an agent for the United States government.Just as it took a neurosurgeon to uncover what autopsysurgeon Dr. Humes had really said to the WarrenCommission, it took a Personnel Security Officer to seesomething was very suspicious concerning Oswald'scontinuing access to classified information.

But what agency? The United States Intelligence Communityis comprised of both a military and a civilian branch. Thecivilian branch is further divided into the Central IntelligenceAgency (CIA) responsible for foreign espionage andcounterespionage and the Federal Bureau of Investigation(FBI) which looks at domestic intelligence andcounterintelligence. The military branch is overseen by acontrol group at the Department of Defense level with eachservice (Army, Air Force, and Navy) operating independentintelligence operations.

Oswald, as a Marine, was in the Navy which operated theOffice of Naval Intelligence or ONI. While serving as aMarine, the most critical data Oswald had access to was onthe U-2 and that project had been under the securityjurisdiction of the Air Force and not the Navy. However theairbase where Oswald was stationed was also the locationfor CIA activities.

If Oswald was a American agent, the ONI is front contender.Epstein's book on Oswald connects various documentsrelating to Oswald to the ONI. For instance, Oswald'sOctober 1959 Moscow meeting with Consul Snyder torenounce his U.S. citizenship was reported in a StateDepartment telex with copies forwarded to the CIA, FBI, andthe ONI. Interestingly, the Commander of Naval Operationsin Washington was additionally notified in a separate cablesent by the Moscow Naval Attaché.

Another strange connection to the ONI was made afterOswald's return a month before the Assassination. Oswaldsupposedly made a trip to Mexico where he went to theCuban and Soviet embassies, in hopes of returning to theUSSR after a visit to Cuba. The CIA's Mexican agents were

31

watching the Soviet Embassy and on October 10 informedthe FBI, ONI, and the State Department about Oswald'sactivities.

While there was no request made for further investigationinto the matter, something continued to bother the CIA fieldagents: on October 23 the CIA Mexican office requested aphotograph of Oswald from the ONI. The ONI failed torespond. (After the Assassination a photograph appeared,supposedly taken outside the Soviet Embassy in Mexico bythe CIA and purported to be Oswald - although it clearly wasnot. The CIA was to later claim that photograph was nottheirs and that no pictures had been taken during that timeframe. For although photographic records were standardprocedure, for some unexplained reason the day Oswaldwas supposedly at the Soviet Embassy no pictures weretaken.)

And remember the "lookout" card that was supposed to havebeen placed in Oswald's State Department file in responseto the FBI memorandum concerning a possible Oswaldimpostor? While the lookout card and memorandum was notlocated in State Department records, the ONI Oswald filesdid have a copy of the memorandum.

The possibility the Office of Naval Intelligence had a certainLee Oswald in its employment is very interesting if oneaccepts David Lifton's belief that Kennedy's body - the bestevidence as to what had really happened in Dallas - hadbeen tampered with before the autopsy. The Assassination'splanners would have attempted to gain absolute control overthe official autopsy report. It is interesting to note that notonly were the attending doctors absolutely ignorant aboutForensic Pathology, all the doctors were Naval officers.None of those officer reported any perceived problems withthe autopsy.

Granted the doctors were there because of their positions atBethesda. In addition to Admiral George Burkley, thePresident's doctor, in attendance was the Surgeon Generalof the Navy, Commanding Officers of the Naval MedicalCenter at Bethesda, the Bethesda Naval Hospital, and theNavy Medical School.

However none of the problems with the autopsy would have

32

existed if the law had been carried out. The Dallas MedicalExaminer did not autopsy the body as was stipulated by law.As the Medical Examiner attempted to claim Kennedy'sbody, Secret Service agents at the scene had emphaticallyrefused to release the remains. To some, this action appearsa bit odd and quite unauthorized; did the Secret Serviceagents take this great responsibility upon themselvesbecause they were afraid someone would try to further harman already dead President?

This final controlling effort on the part of the Secret Serviceis suspicious in light of the whole plan. To have succeededin the complex scenario envisioned by the planners of theAssassination, they would have had to:

* possessed detailed information concerning the Dallas tripwell in advance;* depending upon the number of wounds incurred by theoccupants of the automobile, planted the correct number ofbullets linkable to the Carcano rifle;*controlled the limousine toeliminateanyadversephysicalevidence;* set up the sniper's nest tied to Oswald and facilitate itsfinding;* and gained control over Kennedy's body.

D a v i d L i f t o nidentified one groupfully having the op-portunity to ac-complish all thesevaried tasks - thevery group taskedwith protecting thePresident, the U.S.Secret Service. Itwas Secret Serviceagents who planned

the details of the Dallas trip including the motorcade route.Control of the limousine was in their hands, and it wasSecret Service agents who discovered the two bulletfragments in the car, after the autopsy had been conducted,some nine hours after the Assassination. Lifton also makesa case that the limousine's windshield may have been

33

switched to eliminate evidence of a bullet having come fromthe front glass. Even the one intact virtually perfect,infamous One Bullet, Bullet 399, was discovered in the im-mediate vicinity of a Secret Service Agent on a stretcher atParkland Memorial Hospital.

And moments before Lee Oswald was shot to death while inpolice custody by Jack Ruby, Oswald had a conversationwith Secret Service Inspector Thomas J. Kelley, who wenton to brief the Warren Commission on the x-rays taken ofthe President's body at the autopsy. If Lifton is correct in hisassessment of the evidence indicating there was a greatdeal wrong with the autopsy, interpretation of the x-rays wasa critical element. Why was a Secret Service agent used tobrief this data instead of some objective qualified expert?

When all is said and done, if you believe there was aconspiracy to kill Kennedy and frame Oswald, you have toaccept that members of the Secret Service, Navy, andDallas Sheriffs' Department were implicated and theresulting cover-up further implicates the CIA and FBI. Whatcommon element could unite such apparently divergentagencies and men in such an awesome event. What couldbring two or three dozen men to willingly participate in theassassination of a President of the United States?

This may be the crucial problem for all the "conspiracy

34

buffs". The amount of planning and control over all aspectsof the Assassination implicates too many people. How couldthese people keep the secrets for over forty years? The veryconcept of this vast conspiracy stretches the imagination.

And there was one more piece of the puzzle that was veryperplexing and bothersome....

The Nazi Connection

If we assume Oswald was not an insane killer who actedalone, we must also assume he was manipulated intoplaying the patsy. Someone had to be the manipulator. Inespionage parlay, we are looking for a "handler". We arelooking for someone who placed Oswald at the right place atthe right time, that is the Texas School Book Depository onNovember 22, 1963 at 1 PM.

Ruth Paine informed Oswald of a job opening at the TexasBook Depository and her neighbor Buell Wesley Fraziergave Oswald a ride to work on Assassination Day. Frazierlater testified Oswald carried a package with him whichcould have contained a rifle. Frazier said Oswald claimed itwas curtain rods. But this is the end and beginning ofFrazier's involvement.

Ruth Paine, on the other hAnd was involved with both Leeand Marina Oswald before and after the Assassination. Ruthwas working with the East-West Contact Service arrangingcultural exchanges between the US And USSR whenintroduced to the Oswalds in February 1963. In July, Ruthoffered to have Oswald's wife Marina live with her andpromised to give Marina $10 a week. In October, Ruth toldLee about the job at the Texas Book Depository. After Leehad been killed by Jack Ruby, Ruth provided criticalevidence linking Lee with yet another assassination attempt.

A would be assassin fired out of the night, through a windowat Major General Edwin A. Walker on April 1963. Walker hadbeen forced to resign from the Army due to his extremistright-wing activities. Although no motive for the attemptedmurder of Walker has ever come to light, Ruth Paineprovided a direct link between Oswald and the Walkerincident.

Ruth claimed to have found a note supposedly written by

35

Oswald to his wife implicating himself in the Walkershooting. Ruth turned this note over to authorities afterfinding it where Maria Oswald was supposed to have hiddenit. It is not known why Marina kept such a note (if she did)after Lee told her to destroy it along with other incriminatingevidence she had destroyed.

The proof in Lee's own handwriting that he had shot atWalker was used to further demonstrate Oswald's capabilityto murder and his unbalanced mentality. If Oswald wasbeing set up as a patsy Ruth Paine was very influential inleading him there. But how did Ruth get into the picture?

Ruth and her estranged husband Michael were introduced tothe Oswald's by Volkmar Schmidt. Schmidt had come fromGermany in 1961 to do geological research in Texas. Duringhis interview with author Epstein, Schmidt felt it wasimportant to let Epstein know that in Heidelberhg, GermanySchmidt had lived with Dr. Wilhelm Kuetemeyer, supposedlyinvolved in the plot to assassinate Adolf Hitler at the end ofWorld War II. Schmidt went on to paint Oswald as a totallyalienated individual who verbally attacked Kennedy's foreignpolicies and who compared General Edwin A. Walker toHitler. Oswald, Schmidt claimed, had added that bothKennedy and Walker should be considered murderers.

Schmidt certainly substantiated Oswald's supposeddisillusionment with America and Kennedy, links him toWalker by way of a motive, and introduced Ruth Paine intothe unfolding scenario. But how had the German come toplay his critical part?

Volkmar Schmidt was introduced toOswald by George DeMohrenschildt inearly February 1963. DeMohrenschildthad come into Oswald's life just afterthe defector returned to the U.S. in thesummer of 1962. DeMohrenschildt hadarrived in America in May 1938 fromGermany. During the war he wasconnected to three suspected Naziagents:

* through a letter from the Nazi BaronKnostantin Von Maydell;

36

* through contact with Saburo Matsukata believed to becoordinating German and Japanese intelligence activities inthe United States;* through the address book of a suspected Nazi agent whereDeMohrenschildt's name was listed.

Not only was DeMohrenschildt associated with known orsuspected Nazis, he had been investigated at one time oranother by the FBI and CIA. According to CIA files, theOffice of Naval Intelligence (ONI) had investigatedDeMohrenschildt during the 1944 time frame. The ONIdenies it ever investigated the man.

DeMohrenschildt married into the Texas oil community in1952 and worked in the oil business. Judging from some ofhis known acquaintances, DeMohrenschildt possessedinfluential contacts in both finance and the Navy. In May1963 DeMohrenschildt left the United States for Haiti. Yearslater after returning to the US, DeMohrenschildt agreed to aMarch 1977 meeting with Epstein to talk about the Kennedymurder. During the second day of interviews with Epstein,

DeMohrenschildt went home for lunch and supposedlycommitted suicide. It is to be assumed DeMohrenschildt'sfull role in the Assassination died with him.

What was bothersome about DeMohrenschildt was thepotential Nazi link. Could a Nazi oath have bound all theseemingly diverse people involved in the planning,execution, and cover-up of the Assassination? This wasinitially just a passing thought. Too bazaar to be considered.Required too much imagination.

Except for one thing: my imagination had already beenstretched beyond any science fiction novel. I had reason tosuspect modern day Nazis had developed psyonic weaponscommonly referred to as psychic weapons. Not only that, theU.S. Navy was involved in the initial experimentation that ledto these weapons and that experimentation was conductedin 1943. A year later was the time frame the Office of NavalIntelligence was supposed to have investigatedDeMohrenschildt.

37

3 - Just Because You Are ParanoidDoes Not Mean They Are Not Out To Get You

Cosmic Reality: Rule #5

If thoughts create reality than everything that happens is adirect consequence of someone's thought. "Coincidence","chance", "luck" and the such, are events created byunidentified thought patterns. If the thought behind the eventcan be identified, the event is no longer an unexplainedcoincidence.

The Fifth Rule of Cosmic Reality is "Chance is a pseudonymfor thought." It is a rule that is easier to understand the olderone gets. After the years pile up with their diverse "chance"events, a pattern can be seen. Seemingly unimportantevents from childhood can suddenly take on unanticipatedmeaning in adulthood.

I have already described seemingly chance events thatimpacted upon my research efforts in the Kennedy question,such as finding Epstein's out-of-print book on Oswald. Todemonstrate Rule Five, it is necessary that we look closelyat certain other events in my personal life. It will make thelearning easier, the learning of incredible facts, to see it as Isaw it - not in a book but through one strange experienceafter another....

Just Because You Are Paranoid, Does Not Mean TheyAre Not Out To Get You

By the time I entered the University of Massachusetts, I wasextremely well versed in occult subjects. However I was nota "psychic", in that I did not demonstrate any abnormalpowers. However a practical joke was to lead me toaccessing telepathic powers.

The ability to know what someone is thinking, or to get atelephone call from someone you are thinking about, or to

38

find you are thinking the same thing your companion issimultaneously considering are everyday examples oftelepathic thought. More extraordinary examples are thosewhere strangers seem to be thinking the same things - suchas the case of the radio where Marconi was joined by twoother men simultaneously developing equipment andconcepts for wireless communications.

While accepting the theoretic existence of telepathy, it was apractical joke which made me an advocate of thoughtcommunication. My college Freshman roommate Barbaragot me to partake in a hoax appearing to demonstratetelepathy.

Thirty-six playing cards were placed six across, six down,faces up. One conspirator pretended to be capable oftelepathy, while the other pretended to be a simple observer.The "mark" would be instructed to pick a card while the"telepath" was out of the room. Upon the return of thetelepath, the apparent observer would make an outwardlyinnocent remark which actually contained a code indicatingthe position of the mark's chosen card which would beidentified by the telepath.

We had gotten very good at passing accurate codedstatements and were having a great deal of fun. Then onemark, Judy, asked if she could try being the telepathy. I wasabsolutely stunned when Judy correctly picked fiveconsecutive correct cards. The practical joke had taken anunexpected turn.

Barbara and I confessed and began to diligently attempttelepath. To make a long story short, we discovered thattelepathy could be enhanced through practice, that somepeople are better senders, others better receivers, and thattelepathic communication became easier between somepeople than others.

The pressures of college life pushed my interests intelepathy, UFO's, and other odd subjects out of the way. Thenew interests involved Anatomy, Astronomy, Statistics,Medieval History, Soviet Society, the rise and fall of anumber of empires as I pursued a diploma first in PhysicalEducation and then in History....

39

I had spent the first two years of college as a PhysicalEducation major. It was Fall of my Junior year and I had justgone to the last class of the new schedule. I had beenfollowing a path leading to the bookstore to purchasenecessary textbooks. I found myself standing at a branchwhere the bookstore went one way and the HistoryDepartment the other. I realized, to my great surprise, I wasactually considering changing my major and in my junioryear.

While I had excelled at college history course I had taken atthe University and was not happy with the PhysicalEducation curriculum, I had never given any thought tochanging the entire outlook on my future. I had almostalways intended being a PhysEd teacher. At that branch inthe road, I looked at my watch and realized I had beenstanding there for almost an hour. The next thing I rememberwas being in the History Department requesting a change inmajors and my future.

Because the school scheduling had already taken place,many History courses were full and I was left to searchingthrough what was left. To fill my schedule, I had to take acourse on Russian History and one on Soviet Society. Theyintroduced me to Russia and I was soon obsessed withlearning everything I could about the nation and its people.By the end of my senior year, I was an acknowledged experton the Soviet Union. This background in Soviet affairs wouldlead me to the highest echelons of the American IntelligenceCommunity, where I again found an opportunity to usetelepathy.

In 1974 I went on Active Duty with the United States Army asa Direct Commissioned Second Lieutenant. I was twenty-fiveyears old and viewed myself as a civilian spying on mygovernment. Basic Training of eleven weeks was conductedin Alabama. By the end of those eleven weeks, each officerwas to have orders for their next post - another school. Atthe new schools, the newly commissioned women officerswould learn operations of specific branches, such asIntelligence, Air Defense, Medical, Military Police, etceteras.

Five women, including myself, were in the graduationparade, still without orders. Intervention by a visiting general

40

was the only thing that got our orders to us before thegraduation ceremony. While all five were designated to go toFort Huachuca, Arizona and the Army's Intelligence TrainingCenter, three of us were to go on to Fort Devons,Massachusetts to attend the Army's school on electronicwarfare and espionage. The three of us were officers of theArmy Security Agency - nicknamed the "Super Spooks"because their work was maintained as "super secrets".Supposedly to be asked to join this unit, you had to be in thetop 10% of the population (whatever that entails).

Between schools, I had a few weeks of unassigned duty. Iwent to a Major who was putting together a Soviet study andasked if I could help. I prepared the first Program ofInstruction on the Soviet and Warsaw Pact Military Forcesever presented at Ft. Huachuca. (The Army had beenpreoccupied with Viet Nam and the European CommunistWorld had been somewhat ignored.) After attending theElectronic Warfare Course at Fort Devons, I joined a smallunit, located on a small Army post, thirty miles outsideWashington, D.C.

One mission of my unit was to advise the Army as to itsvulnerabilities to Electronic Warfare and Espionageconducted against U.S. forces by foreign nations. Howeveras in the Huachuca case, preoccupation with the VietnamConflict had resulted in the neglect of the Cold War problem.In fact, all aspects of the Soviet and Warsaw capabilitieswere very poorly understood. Before being able to tell theArmy about its vulnerabilities, we had to determine what thethreat actually was. This mission had been ignored until Icame along.

Expertise gained in college and more recently at Huachucamade me the right person. The Army had sent me to theright place outside DC, and there was a mission only I couldaccomplish. Within eighteen months of becoming an ArmyLieutenant, I was considered the expert on the SovietUnion's capability to conduct Electronic Espionage. I hadeffectively joined the Establishment.

It is ironic my metamorphosis from civilian to U.S.intelligence expert was in thought as well as deed. Soon myparanoia concerning America was replaced with a total

41

preoccupation with analysis of the Soviet Union's capabilitiesto wage war and conduct electronic espionage. My fear ofthe Soviets intensified as their awesome military capabilitiescame to be understood. That fear turned to confusion whenit became apparent the vast Soviet electronic espionagenetwork was more concerned with spying on Americanindustry and financial institutions than on U.S. militaryforces!

My question became one of what the Soviets feared. Whywere they so concerned with American finance and industry.Initially, I decided such concern stemmed from the need forthe Soviets to address their own economic problems from aworld view. This interpretation came to be doubted in the fallof 1977.

A friend in the Pentagon had been sent an article from oneof the various weekly tabloids concerning an underseaweapon system. This very sketchy article claimed a super-secret U.S. Navy weapon system had been placed on theocean bottom along the U.S. West Coast. Supposedly, theproject had been accomplished without the knowledge of theU.S. Congress and was financed by American industrialists.The project was codenamed "Desktop". As a PentagonSecurity Officer, my friend began asking questions about theaccusations in the article. Soon a high level Navy officer wasdemanding a cessation from further discussion of “Desktop”.

If American industrialists were involved with deployingweapon systems without the knowledge of the U.S.government, the Soviets would certainly have justifiablereason for expending intelligence gathering efforts towardinstitutions financing such activities. If such a situation didnot exist, why was the Navy so interested in stopping anydiscussion of the “Desktop” article which implicated the U.S.Navy as working for the industrialists.

Thus far a number of events have been mentioned resulting

42

in my becoming very interested whenever the subject of U.S.Navy came up. First there was the decision to change mycollege major which resulted in my becoming well versed onthe Soviet Union. That in turn provided the backgroundallowing me to enter the ranks of a selected few with theArmy Security Agency. Because my unit had the unique taskof explaining the threat, I was given access to the strangeknowledge that the Soviets were extremely interested in U.S.industry and financial institutions. Because I had a Pentagonfriend whose mother read the tabloids and sent her aclipping on “Desktop”, my paranoia about the Soviet threathad once again turned to a paranoia concerning the UnitedStates itself. Who was running the show? And what was theNavy's role in all this?

Then, of course, I read Lifton's book, followed by Epstein'sbook which led to questions of culpability on the part of anumber of naval officers and/or the Office of NavalIntelligence in the Kennedy Assassination. It was ironic thatone of Kennedy's strong points leading to his election washis heroic escapades as a Naval Officer fighting theJapanese in World War II.

When I left the Active Army in 1978, I had spent four intenseyears considering conventional and nuclear war; electronicespionage; working within a government bureaucracy I knewwas capable of watching its citizens in a way Adolf Hitlerwould have loved. When I got back into the swing of civilianlife, I was shaken by the apparent unconcern of my friendsand family as to the "real" state of life. It was as if two worldsexisted. Civilians were concerned with rent, mates, andbabies. The world of government was concerned withmissiles, guns, oil, world finances, and psychic warfare.

If it was not for a practical joke involving telepathy I wouldnever have stumbled upon the most secret of the US secretactivities. Over the years, I had maintained a higher degreeof telepathic ability than most because I was willing topractice. For instance, when the phone rang I would attemptidentifying the caller before answering. My Army job affordedme the opportunity to really practice.

I was studying a CIA picture of a Soviet vehicle which hadshown up in East Germany that looked like an Electronic

43

Warfare System with antennas hanging off the roof. Irealized that I was getting strong, independent thoughtsproviding an in-depth understanding of the equipment. Iresearched through known Soviet equipment and found thesame vehicle which had the same mission I had somehowknown. I had to wonder if I had somehow stumbled uponsome kind of long-range telepathic link that had allowed meto intuit the purpose of the vehicle.

The same thing happened a short time later when I wasstudying a newly identified Soviet unit in East Germany.After reading the reports concerning the unit and focusing onits location in East Germany, I suddenly gained a detailedunderstanding of its mission. This time I was more inclinedto conclude I was reading someone's mind who wasinvolved with the Soviet Army.

My knowledge of telepathy allowed me to accept thisunusual extra-insight and integrate it into my intelligenceanalysis. While I always confirmed telepathic input with realworld intelligence, it was telepathy that facilitated my efforts.I also found the more I used the technique of long-rangetelepathic intrusion, the easier the telepathic thoughts cameto me.

Yet, to be honest, I sometimes found myself attributing myintuitive grasp of intelligence data as a talent rather than aresult of telepathy. However one episode convinced me theknowledge I accessed had some telepathic connection.

I had been "scanning" a newly identified Soviet vehicle beingseen more frequently with Soviet units. Its purpose was stillunknown until I suddenly knew its mission - one I did notknow was technically feasible. I called a meeting of myengineers and laid out the theory I had concerning thismission. Each one of the five experts claimed it could not bedone.

Later, in frustration, I wrote the complicated mathematicalequation at the base of the theory across the blackboard inmy office. A Major working for another Army unit stationed inthe same building, was walking by the open door andnoticed the equation on the blackboard. He introducedhimself and asked what the equation related to. I told him itwas an idea I was working on. He asked to use my phone,

44

had a brief conversation, and then asked if I would followhim. On the other side of the building American engineerswere accomplishing the supposedly impossible.

Somehow I had mentally picked up a project that was highlysecret and technologically advanced. Had my informationcome from the other side of the building or the other side ofthe world? Regardless of point of origin, the information hadtraveled by thought waves.

Along the way, there was an article in the national magazine"Time" that spoke of a psychic research unit working for theU.S. Government. I convinced a Full Colonel to look into thematter; he reported I would not be able to access this groupas it was a highly secret organization. Regardless of myhigh-level clearances, this group was impossible to reachthrough conventional means.

Instead, I attempted telepathic intrusion upon the group. Ifound it to be a highly technical operation designed toresearch the possibility that psychics could use be used totelepathically intrude upon foreign governments - called"remote viewing". More bothersome, I also discovered theyhad the added mission of researching the potential fordeveloping psychic weapons.

While believing the information I had mentally perceived wasobtained telepathically from real life, I had no way ofconfirming this data. Thus, the images were filed away withother images that were equally as disturbing.

As I was saying, the transition from Army to civilian life wasdifficult: I felt I was caught somewhere between worlds. Ineeded to talk to someone trained in psychological andpsychic concerns. I mentioned this need to an acquaintancewho said she knew just such a man. A few days later, shetook me to the office of Vincent Collins.

Within moments of our meeting, a telepathic conversationbegan. I immediately knew Collins worked for the supersecret U.S. Government group investigating psychicweaponry; he simultaneously realized I knew of the project.Confusion followed as Collins mistakenly thought I had alsobeen associated with the project. I finally understood hismisconception and stopped the verbal silence, saying aloud,

45

"No, I did not participate. I telepathically intruded."

"You are that powerful a telepath?"

"I guess."

There followed a verbal discussion of what I had done in thefield of electronic warfare and espionage - requiredknowledge for those working on the psychic question.Collins also provided an explanation of why he was againworking as a psychiatrist; he had simply burnt out and goneback to psychiatry for a needed break from the psychicproject. After an hour, I left with an appointment to seeCollins the following week. At that second meeting, Collinsshowed me a number of drawings and asked me to explainwhat they were. Each of the drawings representedcomponents of electronic devices designed to operate in"psychic frequencies".

Energy fields composed of electric, magnetic, andgravitational forces are found in various forms throughoutnature. Certain energy fields impact directly on our physicalsenses - primarily those in the visual and audible rangesallowing our eyes to see and our ears to hear.

Our eyes work by converting light into brain signalsinterpreted by the mind as images of physical reality. Ourears respond to energy fields known as sound waves. Whensound waves strike the eardrum, the eardrum vibrates.These vibrations are then converted into electronic signalsinterpreted by the mind as language, music, noise, or othersounds.

We have built electronic sensors to access other energyfields, such as radio, television, telephone, radar, telemetrysignals from aircraft identification to space communications.Yet in all these systems there is a common process ofreceiving specific energy fields and converting them intoelectronic signals to communicate something.

The human body is a complicated communications centercapable of carrying millions of messages simultaneously.These messages can dictate the beating of the heart,muscle movements, automatic workings of the organs, aswell as complicated thoughts concerning energy fields.These energy fields being used within the body can be

46

measured and are within a limited range. The "psychicweapons" technology was focused on controlling ordisrupting the human body/mind's electromagnetic fields.

By showing me the drawings, Collins was testing myknowledge of the internal workings of devices designed towork within the frequencies used by human beings. Afterpassing his test, Collins asked me to conduct some long-range telepathy; one of the drawings he showed me was thetarget. I had no idea what it was, and neither did Collins.

"Why is it important?" I asked.Collins allowed me to telepathically enter his mind to find theanswer. Someone out there had a working psychic disrupterand it was not the Americans. The device depicted in thedrawing seemed to be the "missing piece to the puzzle".Whoever had this device had access to a weapon whichcould disrupt the mental and/or physical fields of the humanbody. It would be technically possible to control humanminds or destroy human bodies by transmission of energyfields.

I left Collins with the understanding it would take me sometime to be able to get the mind set to conduct a long-rangeintrusion of the sort he required. Since leaving the Army Ihad not needed to resort to long-range telepathy and I was"rusty". It was the morning of the third day that I felt balancedenough to try.

I had been awake for only a few minutes and my body wasstill very comfortable. I thought about Collins' drawing andfocused on the remembered image until it filled my mind. Iallowed the image to move away until it merged with itsphysical counterpart. I should have maintained the link andbeen able to understand the details of the physicalmechanism. Instead, my mind was suddenly filled withimages of the Nazi swastika and I was momentarily filledwith terror. Three times I attempted an intrusion and evertime it was as if my signal was being jammed.

I waited almost a week before making another attempt andthe result was the same. It was then I called Vincent Collins.He asked me to come over right away. When I got to Collinsoffice he was finishing packing. His first words were, "Youattempted a remote viewing of the drawing? What

47

happened?"

After relating my failed attempts, Collins confirmed thatsimilar results of seeing swastikas and feeling terror hadoccurred whenever any American or allied psychics hadtried to uncover the secrets behind whoever controlled thisdevice. But Collins had much more to relate. Since myattempt, a number of psychics had either died, disappeared,or become mentally unbalanced. He himself had beencomatose for three days with no medical reason beingfound.

Collins believed my telepathic signal had tipped off whoeverwas in charge of a psychic weapon that they were beingtelepathically intruded upon. He explained that, like a fuzz-buster radar detector, it was possible to use humandetectors to sense incoming telepathic signals. Collinsfurther believed that my signal was so powerful it spookedthose people into utilizing a psychic weapon against allknown psychics working for any government. Those psychicresearchers and psychics who had survived were beingcalled back into government service, Collins among them.

"What the hell should I do?" I was not really concerned aboutprotecting myself, but I was suddenly furious at whoever hadattacked the very fiber of human individuals. There was anenemy out there who had the most powerful weapon yetconceived and I had no way of knowing how to fight it.

Again Vincent Collins allowed me to access his mindtelepathically. I was stunned. Standing in front of me was ahuman male who's mind was telepathically sending mepictures of who and what he really was at the energy level.The life force inside Vincent Collins had its source in anotherpart of the galaxy. Individuals from another world wereincarnating into human existence to assist human kind insurviving.

In a very quiet, compassionate voice Collins intoned, "Wecan not tell you what to do. We can only guide your efforts.The only clue I can give you is to read The PhiladelphiaExperiment. The only warning I can give is that they will belooking for you. The fact you were never officially connectedto our work will keep you safe, if you can refrain from puttingout a signal they can trace. And now you have got to get

48

away from here, I am obviously targeted and watched."

I had not really gotten beyond the door and as he reached toopen it, I asked, "Is there any common denominator to thosewho were attacked."

Collins replied, "There were reports of a stranger showing upand connecting with the victims just before the attacks. Theyall were blond males, youngish."

"That's it, young, blond males?"

With eyes that pierced my soul, this entity known on thephysical plane as Vincent Collins silently let me know thereexisted a cosmic reality beyond anything I had everimagined.

Some weeks later, Miami, Florida had a localized rain stormthat dumped some sixteen inches on the city in a few hours.It was the most incredible downpour I have everexperienced. The roof was virtually vibrating from theamount of rain. The phone rang somewhere around teno'clock. The voice on the other end was not familiar. "Who isthis?" I asked.

"John, you met me the other night over at Sebastian's."

My mind began relaying details of that night when my friendand I stopped at a local bar. There were only a few peoplethere and one was a blond guy who I had danced with forawhile. He was a great dancer, but I had only stayed aboutan hour.

"How did you get my number?"

"You gave it to me."

My warning system was flashing all over the place - I neverbut never gave out my telephone number. Blond male,Vincent Collins, psychic weapons, how the hell could they beon my trail. I had not gone telepathic even on a limited scale.Maybe the original telepathic signal I had sent had somehowbeen traced to Miami. They may have then done a routinecheck of files to see who was in Miami and maybe my namecame up. Maybe this was just a routine and rather desperatesearch for anyone who could have sent such a powerfultelepathic signal a couple of months before.

49

I decided to play the game. To the voice on the telephone Iresponded as cheerfully and calmly as I could, "Glad youdecided to use the number. What's up?"

"Well I've got some great hashish and don't live but a blockfrom you - thought you'd like to come over."

"In this rain?"

"It's only one street up and a few houses down. You canmake it. Come on."

"What's the address?"

Just from the house to the car was enough to get soakingwet. As I turned on the engine I was still second guessingmy decision to confront this John menace. If he wassomehow the blond male enemy my avoiding him would notwork. But to play the game and look innocent wouldprobably take them off my trail. But the rain itself wassufficient reason not to be out on the streets. I had justbarely found the street John lived on before the rain was sobad I could not see out the windshield and pulled over.

I was thinking what an idiot I was to be out in the rain when arapping on the door scared the **** out of me. Here was astrange blurred face in the window. The door was openedand here was this soaked face, blond hair John saying,"Glad you found it." Somehow I had stopped in front ofJohn's house and he was there to greet me in the pouringrain.

The small apartment on the rear of the house was obviouslynot being lived in. The telltale signs of use, such as aKleenex laying about, or knickknack, dirty dishes, the thingsone leaves around just in living - all these were missing. Itwas furnished and set to look lived in but the little thingswere missing.

John's obvious ploy was to subdue my conscious mind byoffering the hashish. He would be looking for the telltaletheta signal of telepathy.

The conscious mind operates in frequencies designatedbeta. Alpha signals originate in states of calmness whetherjust before and during sleep or in meditative states. Thetheta signal originates during the deepest levels of sleep

50

where the accompanying rapid-eye-movement has causedthis deep sleep condition to be called REM sleep. Thetasignals have also been tied to psychic activity.

John would not need to have me confess my knowledge, hewould only need to sense the theta signal to know of mytelepathic powers. In spite of the large amount of excellenthashish we smoked, I was able to maintain control andnever spiked a theta signal. In fact, to keep from slipping intoa theta wave link, I concentrated on teaching John the very,very basics of the Occult Sciences. I spent about three hoursboring this man before he had enough, deciding I was reallyvery simplistic and I returned home.

Had I actually escaped from the grasp of my enemy? Or hadI really given this guy my telephone number. Of one thing Iwas certain, I had not given out that number. Perhaps myvisits to Vincent Collins had gotten them on my trail. And formany years I just assumed that a record of my visit had putme on a list of possible telepaths and it had taken a fewweeks to get around to checking me out.

It took a dozen years before I rethought that encounter withJohn. I think the original meeting with John at the local discohad resulted from my visits with Collins. My name was on asuspected telepath list. But the second visit by John mayhave been something all together different. I had reason tobelieve that the record breaking, unexplained amount of raincomprising the downpour of that night was a direct resultfrom John's arrival from another time. I had learned thatcertain men had learned to "time-travel" and that breakingthe barriers of time was often accompanied by abnormalweather conditions. The key to this time-traveling was abook, and the only clue Vincent Collins had left me.

THE PHILADELPHIA EXPERIMENT

Vincent Collins did not have to explain what he meant by thePhiladelphia Experiment. I had just bought the book,although I had not read it. The 1979 book by William L.Moore effected me as had David Lifton's Best Evidence: Isaw it and had to have it. But it was only with Collins'prompting that I read it.

I had actually bought the book before noticing the publishers

51

blurb, "An account of a search for a secret Navy wartimeproject that may have succeeded - too well." Again I wasencountering the U.S. Navy and secret weapons. (It shouldbe noted that at this time, I still had not read Lifton's BestEvidence and the Navy connection to Kennedy was stillunknown.)

Moore's nonfiction account concerns the U.S. Navy'sexperiments in invisibility during World War II. It was alogical result of an arms race that saw one technological featmatched by another. The simple torpedo with its explosivedetonated by the impact with a ship's hull, was surpassed bya torpedo that could be detonated when magnetic sensorson the torpedoes came in contact with the hull.

Some Americans thought these weapons could be forced todetonate if they encountered a strong enough magnetic fieldbefore that produced by the hull of the ship. They theorizedthat by using the ship as they would a radio antenna, theycould radiate a magnetic field of such power that the torpedowould explode as it entered the field before impacting thehull. They were, in effect, conceiving of an energy shieldsimilar to the one that would later be a reality in the unrealworld of "Star Trek".

There is some indication the initialconception of creating a magneticfield to detonate the weapon wasexpanded based upon a fact ofscience. While no one canexplain why, whenever a mag-netic field exits there is a comp-lementary electric field. Thus onecontinually hears of the "electro-magnetic" field. Some thought itpossible that in creating apowerful magnetic field, the corre-

sponding electromagnetic field would be strong enough tointerfere with an enemy's radar.

Radar, by the way, is just another byproduct of the sametechniques used in radios and televisions. In all three cases,the first step is to create an electromagnetic wave radiatedthrough an antenna. In signals used for radio and television

52

communication, the signal is intercepted by a receiver whichis able to decipher the message as voice, music, data, orvisual pictures. In radar, However the receiver is actually co-located with the antenna: the signal goes out, bounces offsome object, and returns to the receiver where electronicmeasurements are calculated on the distance, size, or evenspeed of the object.

It was thought a strong enough electromagnetic fieldsurrounding a ship could interfere with an enemy's radarsignal to a point where the radar receiver would not be ableto understand or, perhaps, even receive a returning signal.Then someone expanded upon this theory to wonder if itwas possible to also interfere with light itself which is justanother form of electromagnetic energy. If the energy fieldsurrounding the ship were of sufficient strength, the theorywent, light signals would be distorted to the point the humaneye could not perceive them in the same way the radarreceiver could be made useless.

In wartime, there were notime nor facilities to take along cautious experimentalapproach to provingtheories. Instead, thescientists went for broke:they had to see how farthey could go in oneexperiment. The October

1943 experiment was conducted on the USS Eldridge (1,240ton, 306 feet long), destroyer escort DE 173.

The Eldridge was berthed at thePhiladelphia Shipyard the daythey attempted creating theirenergy field. They were using apowerfu l e lect romagnet icgenerator called a degausser.The air surrounding the shipgrew slightly darker until itevolved into a thin cloud ofgreen mist accompanied by the sound of a rushing - like apowerful wind encircling the vessel in a counterclockwise

53

direction. The USS Eldridge disappeared in the mist.Minutes passed before the ship again appeared, althoughthe form of the ship displacing the water beside the berthhad remained observable throughout the entire period of thevessel's invisibility.

The prevailing theory is the electromagnetic field theygenerated had been of such intensity that light waves hadactually been bent making the ship invisible to the humaneye. The prospects of such an ability must have instilled thewarriors with thoughts of incredible victories. There was,However one problem - the sailors who had been on the shipduring the experiment also disappeared. Unlike theinanimate ship, the humans did not come out unscathed.

Moore uncovered evidence that some of the sailors did notreappear with the ship. Others became mentally derangedand died. A third group were those who were observed tobecome invisible after the experiment. Supposedly, thesepeople could be brought back into physical alignment ifsomeone reached out and touched them. Yet eventuallythey are all supposed to have disappeared.

The Philadelphia Experiment demonstrated the possibleconsequence incurred by individuals coming under attack bypowerful electromagnetic fields; in addition to physical deathand mental dysfunction, they could experience disruption ofthe molecular cohesion of the physical body resulting indisappearance.

54

4 - Your Daddy Was a Weirdo

In the last chapter we discussed Cosmic Rule #5 concerningchance being a pseudonym for thought. Most of the timechance brought me a book that provided pieces of thepuzzle. Some secrets were "freebies", provided by a personwho had access to certain information. People just tell methe strangest things. And many of these people camethrough my Army involvement.

After leaving the Active Army I joined an Army Reserve unit.For one weekend a month and two weeks during thesummer, I again put on the Army uniform. One of those twoweek stints took me to a training center where I met aninspector for the United States Federal Prison systems.

This government employee and I had been conversing forsome time before he told me about an experience that wasstill bothering him. While inspecting a prison facility in theWashington DC area, a prison official showed the inspectora building on the prison site not being used for prisoners.The building was a storehouse. Inside were boxes uponboxes. When the official opened one box, the inspector wasshocked to see black military uniforms. According to theofficial, these were to be worn by members of the FederalPolice Force - a security force to be created when the U.S.President federalized all state police.

My disbelief mirrored the inspector's initial reaction. But thepossible existence of such a federal police force, he furtherexplained, could already be ordered by law. He wrote downa number and sent me off in search of a law enacted in theform of a Presidential Executive Order.

Executive Order 11921

“Executive Order 11921" signed by President Ford amended

55

a previous “Executive Order 11490" signed by PresidentNixon in October of 1969. The amendment was issued aspart of the Federal Register (Volume 41, Number 116),dated June 1976. Together the office of President of theUnited States was given:

* the powers of government censorship;* control over the production and distribution of all materialsand their production facilities including petroleum, solid fuels,gas, electric power, water, food, farm equipment, fertilizer,and minerals;* complete control over the means of transportation;* and the right to distribute health resources.

The only thing an aspiring presidential dictator had to doupon gaining the presidency was to enact “Executive Order11921" "in any national emergency type situation that mightconceivably confront the nation". What that entails is notstipulated.

Existence of a contingency plan to centralize basiceconomic, transportation, and health activities of America byan agency of the federal government was unnerving. Thedegree of nationalization planned would give the U.S.President the powers of a dictator. Images of a dictatorbrought forth thoughts of Adolf Hitler and Nazi Germanywhich took me back to Vincent Collins and his Neo-Nazisoperating psychic weapons.

Envisioning a federalized police force wearing blackuniforms brought forth images of Nazi troops struttingthrough Europe and Russia. Images of Europe in the thirtiesbrought forth realities of the forties when an estimated fourmillion members of the Nazi party appeared to haveevaporated after the war - and with them went untold billionsof dollars in pillaged treasures, stolen from throughoutEurope.

I have always wondered where all the money went andwhere the Nazis had taken refuge. The problem was toconvert pillaged funds into something respectable. Againfate entered the picture and I came in contact with thenuclear power industry through John G. Fuller's We AlmostLost Detroit.

56

Fuller's nonfiction account of the Fermi nuclear reactor thatwent critical and has remained a nuclear graveyard, put thefear of God in me. After researching the nuclear industry Iwas convinced those who were perpetuating its growth weretotally out of their minds.

The secret dangers of nuclear factories demands a book ofits own and is beyond the scope of what we are doing here.What is important is that a chance encounter with a bookprovided an explanation of what happened to the Nazitreasure. Billions of dollars could have been sunk into thenuclear industry while not affecting other economic sectorscontrolled by established power brokers. The best part wasthat nuclear industry could never really become a competitorto oil.

When your local power company goes to the price regulationpeople to ask for a rise in the cost to the consumer, thepower company is asking for its investment money back.Rate hikes are dependent upon investment money. Themore the power company invest, the more they can charge.Nuclear power plants suck up an enormous amount ofinvestment money and can never become cost effective. Tocover the expenses of one nuclear plant you could pay offpollution-free conventional power plants many times over. Infact, the only reason nuclear power plants were allowed tobe built was probably to convert dirty money and/or have anexcuse to continue bilking the consumer with outrageoushike rates.

And again whether Nazi money was at the root of nuclearevil or not, the United States government was involved in yetanother cover-up: nuclear plants have gone to meltdown andAmericans have been lied to about the results. I no longerquestioned why the Soviet Union had been so active inspying on U.S. industry and financial activities.

President Eisenhower's last address to the American peoplecarried the warning to beware of the military-industrialcomplex. I also heard that at the end of his life LyndonJohnson spoke often of a conspiracy. I wondered if this wasthe rambling of an old man or whether he also knew of afinancial and industrial conspiracy that could effectivelycontrol the U.S.

57

Another book enters the picture: Howard S. Katz's TheWarmongers. This nonfiction documents the interrelationshipof finance and industry, as well as, the manner in which theycontrol the fields of politics and academe. It was obvious;America was under the control of a select and limited groupof men. What was bothersome was the question of whattype men?

What if Kennedy understood the dangers of such a mergingof industry and finance. Reasons given for his assassinationwere that he was trying to bust the power of the unions, thathe was after the Mafia, that he had ordered a withdrawalfrom Vietnam, and just simply that he was a threat to toomany people. But what if Kennedy had uncovered aconspiracy to gain complete control over the United Statesand perhaps the world. Could he have seen the "handwritingon the wall" and anticipated a day when a law such asExecutive Order 11921 would exist to legalize a federalpolice force?

My paranoia was continuing to be substantiated by mylearning and experiences. Black uniforms marched throughmy thoughts. Vincent Collins had asked me to do alongrange telepathic intrusion on a group resulting in mymind being filled with the very symbol of Nazi Germany - theswastika. And was the Nazi connection through Oswald'shandler George DeMohrenschildt something more than aninteresting antidote from a bygone past? And what was theNavy's role from DeMohrenschildt to the autopsy?

It all boiled down to this: could the facts concerning theplanning, execution, and cover-up of the Kennedyassassination been kept secret because the main playerswere all NeoNazis tied forever by some oath of loyalty? Atabout this time Cosmic Rule #5 kicked in again and anacquaintance of mine in the Army Reserve unit handed me abook saying, "I think you might like this".

The Bohemian Grove

The full title of the book is The Bohemian Grove and OtherRetreats - a Study in Ruling-class Cohesiveness. It's authorG. William Domhoff has a 1974 copyright on this tale of aretreat located in the 2700 acres of California redwoodsowned by the Becktel Corporation. The Becktel corporation

58

has a record of having employed a number of America's highlevel government officials as well as being responsible forbuilding half the nuclear plants in the United States by the1970's. Let me repeat this fact: the Becktel Corporation wasthe world's greatest builder of nuclear power plants.

Domhoff acknowledges the power of the Council on ForeignRelations, the Committee for Economic Development, theBusiness Council, the National Municipal League, and otherorganizations for planning American policy and managingconsensus for those policies. However he claims theseorganizations are the government interface for those ofwealth belonging to interlocking social circles and havingcommon economic interests. Domhoff claimed (1974) that1% of the population owned

* 25-30% of all the privately held wealth,* 60-70% of all corporate wealth,* received 20-25% of the yearly income,* are the directors of American economic/financialinstitutions,* control academic and research foundations,* and dominate the federal government

(page 82, The Bohemian Grove and Other Retreats - a Study in Ruling-ClassCohesiveness).

None of this is new. By the time I read Domhoff's work, I hadcompiled hundreds of references substantiating Domhoff'sview of US reality. The startling aspect to Domhoff'sresearch was uncovering the paganistic ceremoniesconducted at the Bohemian Grove by the Bohemian Club.The Bohemian Club is apparently the most powerful of theidentified social clubs for the power people. Once a year theBohemian Club holds a retreat which has been held annuallysince 1880. Men wearing red flowing robes with pointedhoods, accompanied by funeral music and torch light,partake in this strange ceremony where a muslin wrappedwooden skeleton, carried in a coffin is cremated. Theskeleton represents Care - a symbolic representation of theconcerns important men bear daily. Care is burned in thisceremony marking the beginning of a two week retreat.

Basing his facts on a 1970 guest list and 1968 clubmembership list, Domhoff claimed 1500 men (no women

59

allowed) attended this ceremony. Further, he found 40 of the50 largest industrial corporations, 20 of the top 25commercial banks, 12 of the top life-insurance companies,29% of "Fortune" magazine's top 797 corporations of 1969were represented by at least one director or officer (page31). Domhoff says, "Cabinet officers, politicians, generals,and governmental advisers are the rule rather than theexception for Lakeside Talks, especially on weekends."(Page 15, The Bohemian Grove and Other Retreats - aStudy in Ruling-Class Cohesiveness).

In spite of the ominous guest list, it was the pagan aspectsto the ceremony that I found most disturbing. Did thesepeople really believe in wood nymphs and tree spirits andthe wisdom of the owl?

A Pause Before Continuing the Tale

I should probably note that my continuing interest and activeresearch into the question of Kennedy had become a way offighting. Kennedy was only one subject I was pursuing in thequest for knowledge. I had always been on this quest; sinceVincent Collins and an introduction to psychic weapons,never mind the possible Nazi connection, the quest hadbecome more desperate. In many ways, I felt not only thesurvival of my freedom was at sake. There was somethingmore fundamental that was also threatened. It hadsomething to do with the freedom of the mind, the freedomto think. Could a psychic weapon be used to control our verythoughts? If our minds are really like complicatedcommunication centers, could the right signal jam our abilityto think?

That was my motivation. Fear. And fear is a very powerfulform of personal energy. My fear was focused on an intent tolearn everything possible. From the age of thirty, my lifebecame mission oriented: I would fight the enemy as I hadbeen trained to fight, as an intelligence officer.Understanding the enemy, is the weapon the intelligenceofficer brings to the commander.

The reason I bring this up is it provides the key tounderstanding the thought behind all the seemingly chanceintroductions to information, whether by book or by mouth,that took me this far and beyond. The main question I have

60

had all my adult life was who killed Kennedy followed by ahundred "whys?". I have long envisioned a future where allthe secrets have been uncovered. The most compellingreason for my having done anything was to learn more. Inthe process I have lived alone with my books and computer,considered a hermit by those who are less than my friends.

Because my life was simplified down to the basics, I havebeen able to focus most of my effort to asking questions andbeing led to the answers. The original draft of this book wasin excess of 600 pages. You would have been bored. It onlydemonstrates my fanatical approach to learning. It indicatesthe amount of concentrated energy that has gone into mysearch. This powerful thought has manipulated my universeto provide me the answers. None of it was by chance. In myreality the answers were going to come my way. The secretswere going to be revealed in one way or another.

Let us just review for a moment by recalling certain chanceevents. At the University the decision to transfer into Historyled me into emphasizing in Soviet Studies, which was turnedinto a ticket to the highest echelons of the U.S. IntelligenceCommunity (because Viet Nam had kept the Army too busyto bother with the Soviets). My arriving early for the meetingat the Federal Building resulted in my introduction to theArmy Direct Officer Commission Program, which led to atwelve year relationship with both the Active Army and theArmy Reserves. In being chosen by the Army SecurityAgency and being assigned to the only unit responsible forthe threat posed against U.S. electronic equipment, I gaineda working knowledge of electromagnetic energy whichfurthered an understanding of enhanced telepathiccapabilities. There were all the books on Kennedy and theominous Navy links. And then there was Vincent Collins andhis massive contribution and I would not have met him if Ihad not made an offhanded remark about needing apsychiatrist who understood psychic powers.

If Cosmic Rule #5 is correct then the main thought behind allthese elements is my desire to know, powered by the firmconviction that someday I really would "know it all". I hadenvisioned a future where I would write a book which wouldlead the reader to the truth about reality. The future is now.

61

And to continue on our quest for knowledge we will look at....

Cosmic Rule #6: You Are Not Alone

This is a rule that is of course true. None of us are alone,there are billions of us on Earth. But does it mean we are notalone in the solar system and are being visited by SpaceBrothers and Sisters. Or does it mean there are other formsof bioelectromagnetic energy forms that we can not see,perhaps angels and elves and other "spirits" exist besidesthose energy forms we can see as animals, plants, humans,etceteras. Or perhaps it refers to reincarnation concepts,where our soul really comprises a family of peopleincarnating throughout history?

If we go back to Cosmic Rule #1: Reality is what we think itis, the choice of your aloneness is up to you. If you do notbelieve in elves it is unlikely you will ever meet one.Although, one supposes you could meet an alien from Marswithout believing such a creature exists; and this supposesthat under Cosmic Rule #3 that the majority of mankindbelieves in space visitors even if you do not. (Rule #3:Majority wins.)

The scope of rule #6 (not alone), as viewed by each one ofus, is a result of experience. If you believe in angels andnever see any you may still believe, but how hard? It hassomething to do with experience moving "faith" into"believing" into "knowing". Experience something and youwill know even when it runs contrary to what you have beentold to believe or to have faith in. In regard this rule, thereare two experiences that I would like to relate that haveimpacted upon how I view the universe. In both cases Iheard voices from unknown entities.

I have no idea what specific chain of events led to mybecoming suicidal in my Senior year at the University. I amsure my decision to jump off the bridge was founded uponsome rational thought process - ya, right. Anyway, thereason behind the decision has long been forgotten; but Iclearly remember standing on the edge of a bridge, in thedark night, looking into an even darker void of no-feeling,prepared to jump. I heard this voice as if it was coming fromsomeone standing behind me and to the left. It was awonderful, melodious voice, saying, "You have many

62

decisions in your life; this is not one of them."

For all practical purposes, I did jump off a bridge that night.From that point on I was sure I was not alone. I had a hearda voice and it did not really seem to matter where it hadoriginated. Whether from my soul, a space visitor, aguardian angel, or a spirit guide, it did not matter. Whatmattered was this firm conviction, knowledge, that I was notalone even when no other human being was in my space.

I never looked back and have retained a sense that I havesome ultimate destiny to fulfill. My life took on new meaningand feeling of fullness as I expanded my concept of myplace in the universe - I was never alone.

The second episode of a voice getting my attention andchanging the direction of my life, came while I was sitting infront of the computer contemplating the Bohemian Groveand all it entailed. I suddenly had an overpowering image ofa picture and the title "Your Daddy Was a Weirdo". I realizedI had seen such an article, in a magazine I had bought somemonths before...

I was at the local record store when I noticed a display of"The Best of High Times" - a compilation of articles carried inthe drug culture's "High Times" magazine. Amazed that itwas still being published, I bought a copy for nostalgicreasons. While I had skimmed the magazine, I noticed thearticle because of its strange title.

Suddenly the image of the article was accompanied by avoice that began relating details concerning Kennedy, Nazis,a Catholic Pope and the Soviet Khrushchev. It was enoughinformation that I had to jot down notes as it flowed into myhead - a voice that had no audible source, but one thatseemed to be telepathically received. For the next threeyears I compiled the data which supported everythingrelated by that discarnate voice in my head.

The search began with "The Best of High Times" and GlennWood's article "Your Daddy Was a Weirdo". Wood claimedthere existed a Freemason organization which haddominated American political life since the RevolutionaryWar, and the majority of U.S. presidents and vice-presidentshad been members of the Freemasons also known as

63

Masons.

The article sent me on a full two years search for the fullstory behind Masonry, which was no easy task. The booksrelating to Masonry are few and the most comprehensive,Waite's encyclopedia, provided a massive amount ofdisjunctive information. Yet eventually, I had enough of anunderstanding to write about Masonic secrets. The mostbaffling and troubling aspect to Masonry, beyond its power,was its dedication to the pursuit of psychic powers. It wasthis connection to the pursuit of psychic power whichconnect the Freemasons with the Nazis.

The Spear of Destiny

My friend who workedat the local librarystopped off one daywith a stack of about adozen books, leavingthe pile standing on mydesk. The books hadbeen donated but thelibrary did not haveroom for them. Shethought the subject

matter might interest me because they dealt, for the mostpart, with occult subjects. In moving the books, one from themiddle jumped out and landed about three feet away. Ipicked it up wondering why it had seemed so energetic.

Trevor Ravenscroft's The Spear of Destiny explains howHitler was led to the Freemasons and other secret societiesdue to his fascination with a historical Christian artifact calledthe Spear of Destiny. In actuality it was the spearhead itselfto which the legend was attached. The spearhead wasattached to the Jewish ceremonial spear carried by a RomanCenturion by the name of Gaius Longinus, in his official dutyas overseer of the Crucifixion of Jesus Christ. It wasLonginus who thrust the spear into the suffering Jesus toend the pain. The legend began.

The Spear of Destiny was transported to France where itbecame the symbol of the Merovingian kings; from theMerovingians the spear came into possession of

64

Charlemagne and forty-four other emperors of the HolyRoman Empire. The spear was eventually placed in theHofburg Treasure House in Vienna, Austria where AdolfHitler came under its power. In searching for the secretbehind the Spear's legendary powers over Destiny, Hitlercame into contact with certain individuals associated with avariety of secret, occult, mystical groups. Adolf Hitler'sunderstanding of secret history gave birth to the Nazi Party.

Adolf Hitler was searching for data concerning theSpear of Destiny when he met Ernst Pretche, ownerof a pawn shop. Pretche was connected with the

secret lodge founded by Guido Von List. List's lodge wasbased upon a blood-brotherhood substituting the swastikafor the Christian cross and may have evolved from the Orderof the New Templars, which also employed the swastika.Through Von List, Hitler, in 1920, met Dietrick Eckert whohad been looking for the man he believed existed, who couldlead the Aryan race to glory and world conquest. Eckert wasa central figure in the Thule Gesellschaft - a powerful andwidespread society of occultists.

The growth of occult societies had sprung from the last twodecades of the eighteen hundreds. One of the most powerfulwas the Golden Dawn founded in 1887 as an offshoot of theEnglish Rosicrucian Society. The Golden Dawn practicedceremonial magic and claimed to be able to lead initiates tosecret knowledge and powers. Similar societies were foundin Germany, the Thule Society being one, and each hadtheir own legends.

The legend of the island of Thule is as ancient as theGerman people. Thule was the magical center of acivilization which had left its secrets behind. The ThuleSociety believed beings from another place/time/dimensioncould make available vast powers and knowledge whichwould enable Supermen to mutate out of the human speciesas the world was conquered. The Thule Society believedthey had the ability to tap the very energy which hadbelonged to the Great Ones of Thule.

In July 1923 seven members founded the National SocialistParty; they and the original forty members all belonged tothe Thule Society. Thus, the very core of the Nazi Party was

65

comprised of individuals believing they were in communionwith invisible powers. Dioptric Eckardt, Alfred Rosenberg,and Karl Haushofer were the powerful minds behind AdolfHitler.

Through the endeavors of Captain Ernst Rohm, a smallgroup of soldiers founded the German Workers Party, whichhad avowed to counter the anti-military and anti-nationalistsentiments of the working class Germans. Rohm's party withits core of military personalities obtained the financialsupport of rich industrialists. These capitalists wished tocontrol a private army to counter the communist movementstrengthened in the difficult days following World War I. TheGerman Workers Party evolved into the National Socialist(Nazi) Party under Hitler's leadership.

The vast majority of Nazi followers did not know there was acentral group of occultists, industrialists, bankers, andsoldiers running the party. The real alluring aspect of Nazismis that it nurtured within its members a feeling of elitism - anelitism that gave a right to rule the world. In fact, Nazisconsider themselves heroes and justified in crushing anyonepreventing them from fulfilling their destiny. To Hitler thatdestiny entailed leading the German nation to worldconquest through the power of the Spear of Destiny.

Hitler knew the Merovingian symbol had been the ancientTribal Spear denoting spiritual leadership; that forCharlemagne the Spear not only symbolized the Blood ofJesus Christ but also gave Charlemagne the divine right toact as a servant for a New Covenant; and that the Spear hadbeen the inspiration for founding of both the French KnightsTemplar and the German Teutonic Knights - medievalorganizations much respected by the Nazis.

According to tradition, the Spear gave its owner control overdestiny only if there existed a legitimate right to ownership.Thus Hitler had to become leader of Germany beforeclaiming the Spear. Hitler entered Austria four days after thenation had voted to become one with Germany, on March15, 1938. In secrecy Hitler returned to the Hofburg TreasureHouse to once again gaze upon the quest of a lifetime, thespearhead which was all that remained of the Spear.

The spearhead was brought to the spiritual center of

66

Nazism, Nuremberg, Germany. The spearhead became thecentral piece in the collection of articles comprising thesymbols of the Third Reich located in Saint Katherine'sChurch. The treasures included the Imperial Regalia of theHapsburg Empire, additionally "donated" by Austria. Thecollection remained on display at the church in Nurembergthroughout the glorious, victorious days of Hitler's reign.

During the first English air raid on Nuremberg the churchroof was destroyed. Hitler had the collection moved to abank vault, where it was more secure from bombs. Thatmove coincided with the beginning of the end for the Nazis.With military setbacks in Russian and Africa, the collectionwas again ordered moved. This time the hiding place waskept secret.

The setbacks continued and Churchill, aware of Hitler'sobsession with the Spear of Destiny, ordered the spearheadcaptured. The only clue to the new hiding place of the Nazitreasure came from an intelligence report issued by the 35thInfantry Division, United States Third Army. During adebriefing of two English airmen who had escaped from aGerman prison camp outside Nuremberg, there was mentionof "hidden treasure being found in an underground tunnel."Apparently, as the rumor had it, the tunnel entrance hadbeen uncovered during bombing of the city. Supposedlythere was a massive vault inside the tunnel, containing Nazitreasure.

By the Battle of Nuremberg in April 1944, the men searchingfor the Spear of Destiny had verified the rumor concerningthe tunnel and bunker holding Nazi loot. They alsodetermined that Nuremberg Oberburgermeister (Mayor),Willi Liebel, had been the man in charge of finding a newhiding place for the Spear. But only Liebel's body wasdiscovered, apparently a result of suicide. Even if he hadlived to tell of the tunnel's location, the Spear may not havebeen there. Liebel's secretary and the local SS GarrisonCommander both claimed the collection had been movedagain. This time, it was supposedly placed in watertightcontainers and dropped to the bottom of Lake Zell, nearSalzburg, Austria.

It is not clear from the Army records whether the American

67

soldiers prowling through the streets of Nuremberg were onofficial Army business or something other; However it wasrecorded that on April 30, 1945 at 2 PM the soldiers noticeda strange breach in the escarpment along Overen SchmiedGasse, below the towering Medieval Nuremberg Fortress,headquarters for the U.S. Seventh Army. When the soldiersdiscovered they were at the opening of a tunnel stretchingfar into the distance, they went in. At the end of the tunnelthey found two immense steel doors having a combinationlock. The United States had become the new claimant to theSpear of Destiny.

It was at 3:30 PM on that same Monday, it was 200 milesaway in a Berlin bunker buried beneath the devastatedstreets of a once mighty city, it was the suicide of Adolf Hitlerby a self-inflicted gunshot wound through the mouth. Onewonders if he knew he had lost the Spear. Now why wouldanyone wonder that? Well Adolf Hitler was one of the mostcredible "channels" of his generation.

For those who may be unfamiliar with the term "channel", itrefers to a person who enters into various degrees of tranceto allow another being a vehicle for communication. Thechannel essentially receives a telepathic signal which isallowed to take over and speak through the channel. Moreand more people have taken up channeling in the 1980'sand 1990's; there are even books written to teach you howto become a channel. But in the early 1900's there were onlya few channels and Hitler was by far the most successful.

Adolf Hitler was born in a Austro-Bavarian frontier townwhich was already the birthplace of a number of mediums -some well known. People with personal knowledge of AdolfHitler called him a medium with supernatural powers. Onesaw a demonic force, where the personality of Hitler fadedand the body became a temporary vehicle for these otherworld forces. Another saw Hitler as turning into an archangelwith visions of leading mankind to glory. Still another sawHitler take on a trance quality, where the speaker wasinhabited by something that seemed to have a fluid quality.A mediumistic trance with an ecstatic expression, was howanother explained Hitler when in the role of channel.

While we can only surmise what forces were actually using

68

Adolf Hitler, it is quite clear the man had foreseen much ofwhat transpired. His Mein Kampf foretold all he intended todo and much of what he accomplished. He even claimedGermany would finally be saved, and even that could beconstrued as being true if one believes, in the end, Germanywas saved from the Nazi evil.

It is obvious that to Adolf Hitler and the Thule Society theconcept of "not being alone" entailed being in contact withpowers or entities from a different time, dimension, and/orworld. Also very clear is that the ultimate Nazi goal is to gainpowers beyond those of normal men and to use secretknowledge to evolve into supermen.

This search for Ancient Knowledge and Hidden Powers arecentral themes for a number of cultures and secret societiesincluding Freemasonry....

The Forefathers' Club

Adolf Hitler grew up in Catholic Austriawhere Freemasonry was forbidden, althoughlodges existed in great secret. Hitler viewedthe eagle, as do Masons, as a symbol of theloftiest powers and faculties attainable.Favorite authors read by Hitler includedthose of Freemasons Fichte, Goeth, andLessing.

Hitler concluded that Freemasonry had lost its heart; Yetwhile attacking Masons, Hitler did not attack the basicdoctrine underlying Freemasonry - the idea there was somegreat secret being protected by a select group of individuals.According to Hitler, Freemasonry had largely become avehicle for its members' mutual benefits and not anorganization dedicated to the search for spiritualdevelopment.

Researching Freemasonry proved difficult, as there are onlya limited number of documents on the subject and becauseevery Mason takes an oath never to disclose the innerworkings of the organization, under penalty of death. WalterLeslie Wilmshurst's (1867-1939) The Meaning of Masonrystates in the first sentence, that his words are solely formembers of the order. Wilmshurst claims the need for

69

secrecy lies partially to protect Masons from those whowould misunderstand and persecute them and profane thedoctrine. Yet the real reason for the secrecy seems tied tothe fear that individuals who have not experienced thecorrect internal development could use certain powers forevil purpose. It is the promise of undefined, althoughapparently psychic powers, which underline the real finalgoal of a Mason's development.

The evolution of Freemasonry appears innocent enough.During the Middle Ages the prevailing concept was that theroyal families and nobility had a divine right to rule anddemand the best from life at the cost to everyone else.Economic realities resulted in the traders, bankers, andinfant industrialists evolving into a class powerful enough tocompete against the nobility. The expanding middle classconsolidated power by organizing craft unions. One of themost powerful of the unions was created by stone masonswhose union was organized in lodges.

By 1717 Freemasonry as an active organization of practicingcraftsmen had fallen into destitution. In that year, atLondon's Apple Tree Tavern, certain men organized theMother Grand Lodge to oversee a revitalized Masonicorganization. The innocent craft unions were soon Masoniclodges of "Speculative Freemasonry" which have spreadthroughout the world in various forms and branches.

The Masonic concern for psychic powers and secrecy wereshocking enough; then I began to comprehend the incrediblepower wielded by Masonry on history - particularly inAmerica. Since at least 1733, Masonry has been a majorAmerican political force. Virtually every leader of theAmerican Revolution was a Mason. Even the Boston TeaParty was conducted by members of Boston's Saint John'sLodge during a break in a Masonic meeting. The Declarationof Independence, the Constitution and the Great Seal (foundon the back of every one dollar bill) were Masonicallyinspired. Even the cornerstone of the United States CapitalBuilding was laid during a full Masonic ceremony. At leasttwenty U.S. presidents and sixteen vice-presidents areknown to have been Masons (1970).

American Masonic membership exceeds four million, and a

70

Grand Lodge has been established in every state. There aretwo Supreme Councils - a Northern and SouthernJurisdiction - presiding over The Scottish Rite Masonry,which is the most popular form of American Masonry. TheScottish Rite originated in 1801 in Charleston, SouthCarolina, USA, and had phenomenal success in spreadingfrom America into Argentina, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Chile,Colombia, Cuba, Egypt, England and Wales, Greece,Guatemala, HollAnd IrelAnd Italy, Mexico, Paraguay, Peru,Portugal, ScotlAnd Serbia, Spain, St. Domingo, SwitzerlAndUruguay, and Venezuela.

Masonry appears to sanction revolutionary response topolitics: not only did Masons spearhead the AmericanRevolution, the architects of the French Revolution werealso Masons. In addition, Mason Simon Bolivar ledrevolutionary forces in Ecuador, Colombia, and Venezuela.In Argentina, Uruguay, Paraguay, and Peru, Mason Jose DeSan Martin fought Spanish forces in battles of independencein the nineteenth century. Mason Jose Mari was a Cubanrevolutionary leader. And there were Masons Jose Rigal inthe Philippines, Chile's Bernardo O'Higgins, and Mexico'sBenito Juarez.

My initial studies made me see Freemasonry as an ominousphenomena, yet I also had to address the fact the mostprecious documents and institutions in America were thehandiwork of Masons. I was confronting the baffling notionthat the architects of America appeared to be heavilyinvolved in the mumble jumble of psychic sciences andAncient Mysteries.

Masons - individually and as a group - are striving tomaintain certain undefined "mysteries". An individual joiningthe Freemason ranks is taken through ceremonies andteaching designed to instill the knowledge of ancientmysteries.

Masonic writer Wilmshurst claims Freemasonry was createdto instruct a secret science by a group remaining "obscureand anonymous". This secret science provides individualswith principles through which an understanding of the selfcan be gained, along with understanding the truerelationship with life. Wilmshurst accepts that along with the

71

physical body, each individual has an ethereal counterpart,termed the "astral body". Within this astral body exists ahigher consciousness which is usually undeveloped and onlyactive during periods of "stress or deep emotion".

Wilmshurst points out that the three chief qualificationsrequired for an individual to obtain a higher degree ofconsciousness are that of Faith, Hope, and unboundedLove. Upon gaining an increased level of consciousawareness, the Mason realizes an enhanced understanding.With this new level of comprehension, the Mason obtains anenhanced mental strength, observable as a higher level ofcharacter, speech, and overall conduct. An individual isbrought to the higher level of consciousness by a systematicseries of initiations.

Most individuals have limited perspectives because theyaccept knowledge derived through the "fallible senses".Wilmshurst indicates this limitation in perspective keeps theindividual from tapping the powers of the soul. The goal ofMasonry is to assist individuals in penetrating illusion ofphysical phenomena and awaken powers obtainable only athigher levels of consciousness.

Masonry uses symbols, myths, and allegories which are"transposed into spiritual vales" by the individual himself.This use of symbolism has a tradition in the "AncientMysteries" as well as most religions. On the one hAndsymbolism is a method of teaching; on the other, it is a wayto mask actual doctrine. According to Wilmshurst, theknowledge obtainable is "foolishness to the world" runningcontrary to all considered orthodox. To protect themselvesfrom ridicule, the founders of Freemasonry chose to usesymbolic, traditional, historical myths to protect the doctrine,contributing to the overall secret aura surrounding Masonry.

The individual entering the ranks of Masons is a candidatewho must successfully pass through three "degrees" beforebeing considered a Master Mason. These three separateceremonies are called the "Craft Degrees" and are commonto all Masonic groups.

The First Craft Degree of the Entered Apprentice focuses onthe qualifications of the man himself. The candidate mustdemonstrate discipline over his "grosser nature, its

72

appetites, and affections" which seems to indicate a need forcontrolling such earthly emotions as greed, arrogance,jealousy, lust, and other physically rooted tendencies. Itrequires developing the self-discipline to refrain from lookingoutward at the material world while purifying oneself fromcarnal passions.

Wilmshurst contends that exposure to the lodge membersand corresponding psychic atmosphere enhances higherconsciousness' power over the physical mind, and acandidate is thus assisted in overcoming base desire. Beforecontinuing to the next degree, the candidate must satisfycertain tests to demonstrate his victory over base desires.(Cosmic Reality's Rule 1 - We are what we think.)

The Second Craft Degree of Fellow-Craft continues to stressthat the candidate must look inward. Wilmshurst states that"deep psychological self-analysis" is required and theindividual is supposed to be at a level where he will begintapping into the "psychic faculties of the soul" to experience"unusual phenomena". (Cosmic Reality's Rule 2 - We arecapable of our dreams.) Two key words of this degree are"contemplation and enlightenment". In the end, thecandidate must realize that God is within each individual andnot some outside force. This conclusion is drawn by thecandidate's study of man's "psychical nature" eventuallyleading to a realization of one's own divinity and that "theKingdom of Heaven is within" each individual. Thus the goalof the Second Degree is to teach "the secrets of nature andthe principles of intellectual truth" which the candidate canonly comprehend upon successful completion of the FirstDegree where he unfettered his mind from "mundaneinterests".

The Third Degree of Master Mason is integrally entwinedwith the story of Solomon's Temple - perhaps the bestknown myth surrounding Freemasonry. Yet the literal storyreally represents two spiritual truths: one involving anindividual's relationship with his soul; the other a history ofthe human race's development.

The legend involves the building of a temple in Jerusalemduring Solomon's reign. The chief architect was Hiram Abiff,assassinated before the temple was completed, taking with

73

him the secret of how to complete the temple. Symbolicallythe temple was being mystically built using the "souls ofmen", but because of a conspiracy the construction hasbeen delayed "indefinitely".

Thus one has the Fall of Man: conspiring craftsmen hadassassinated Hiram Abiff in trying to obtain forbiddenknowledge in the same way Adam and Eve broke God'scommandment to refrain from taking the fruit from the Treeof Knowledge. In both the cases, the Tree of Knowledge andHiram Abiff are sources of enlightened wisdom, anduniversal knowledge has been denied mankind. We do notknow how to find the Tree of Knowledge and we cannotfinish the mystical temple. Instead of enlightenment,mankind continues struggling in the limited environment ofthe five senses and intellectual gyrations of logic, science,and rationality.

The blindness refers to humanity as a whole and thecandidate specifically: after realizing the limitations ofphysical consciousness, the candidate must reject the senserelated physical conception of reality before completing hisspiritual rebirth. This total rejection is considered a figurativedeath from one's physical or lower self. The spiritual death issymbolically represented by the skull and cross bones - longa Freemason symbol of the Master Mason.

Based upon what could be gleaned from available Masonicdocuments, I concluded the Mason is in search of secretknowledge And ultimately, power. Unfortunately, this factorreminded me of the Nazis. Hitler realized the inherent desireof a human being to consider oneself as important in thescheme of things. He also understood this human tendencycould be exploited by bringing people into a brotherhoodhaving access to secret knowledge - for "knowledge ispower".

As in Freemasonry, the Nazi Party promised membershipmade individuals part of a special breed having a divinepurpose. While Freemasonry stresses the individual mustevolve in order to obtain individual power, the Nazis madethe party the critical element with the individual gainingimportance, by simply being a dutiful member of the party.The fate of the Nazi Party was divinely inspired and , thus,

74

the individual's acceptance into the party set them above allothers.

The seeming difference between the Masonic and Naziemphasis on the individual may, unfortunately, be onlyphilosophical. According to Wilmshurst, part of theMasonry's use of secrecy is to prevent the individual accessto psychic powers; for it is possible that certain individualscould obtain "natural and supernatural states", at which vastpowers exist, while being untuned to the Divine Andtherefore capable of "diverting the power to unholy, demonic,astral and dangerous uses". With this stated fear,Wilmshurst has hit upon the inherent dangers of theFreemason organization: each lodge is only as pure as itsmembers.

Wilmshurst also stipulates that most candidates are kept inthe dark and he acknowledges the existence of "interiorcircles". He further claims Freemasonry was created by and"obscure and anonymous" group as an "elementaryexpression" of the secret science.

While I did not know if Hitler had access to a secret science,Ravenscroft's SPEAR OF DESTINY had discussed anothersimilarity between Masons and Nazis. Ravenscroft hadunveiled the identity of a Nazi inner group under Eckart; itwas also certain that, like Masonry, the vast majority of Partyadherents had no knowledge of this inner circle nor thephilosophy at its roots. The question was now one ofidentifying the philosophy and identity of the unidentifiedgroup at Masonry's core.

The only clues available, concerning the identity of thisgroup, was that they were concerned with protecting asecret science rooted in ancient knowledge having certainbasic truths, that Wilmshurst claims, are central to all greatworld religions, and that there has really been only one worldreligion. That religion would seem entwined with Christianity.

While there are a variety of Masonic Orders, all have thecommon ingredient of beginning with the three CraftDegrees discussed earlier. According to Wilmshurst, thethree Craft Degrees correspond to the three ceremonialdegrees incorporated within the doctrine of the earliestChristian groups, as well as representing the three years of

75

Christ's ministry which ended in his death and resurrection.Masonic tradition also incorporates the concept of spiritualdeath and rebirth within the third of the Craft Degrees. Thus,it is obvious something of Christianity has been incorporatedwithin Masonic doctrine. However after 1717 Christianchurches were relegated to a position in par with thesynagogue, that is, simply a source of opinions. Thus itappeared that while Masonry accepted Christianity, theVatican and other churches were not considered custodiansof the Ancient Mysteries.

During the two years I studied Freemasonry from anacademic standpoint, I also began to ask others what theyknew about Masonry. In most cases, there was a relative orfriend who had been a Mason; in all cases nothing ofimportance was known about the organization. One friend'sfather had been a Mason and exhibited fear concerning theorganization, yet even he would tell nothing about Masonry.It seemed Masonry was everywhere while remaining anunknown entity. It was obvious the secret death oath takenby Masons was taken seriously. No one - even those whohad left the order - ever related Masonic secrets. It was alsoevident Masonry was worldwide and members could befound in all areas of society and economy.

I began to seriously wonder if there was a Masonicconnection to the Kennedy Assassination. After all, thecomplex assassination scenario depicted by Lifton's BESTEVIDENCE implicates numerous, apparently diverseindividuals in the planning, execution, and cover-up of theKennedy killing. In light of Freemasonry's apparent powerover its members, it would not be surprising to find Masonryis the common denominator in individuals directly implicatedin Kennedy's Assassination. It is possible those who plannedthe Assassination exploited the Masonic oath of allegiance,and the only real crime committed by many meninstrumental in the various aspects of the murder andensuing cover-ups was to unquestioningly follow thedirections of senior Masons.

Because of the apparent benevolent doctrine and positiveinfluence of Masonry, in light of the Nazi connection toOswald through DeMohrenschildt, in light of the evolution of

76

Nazism, in light of the millions of missing Nazis, it wasassumed that - while the one possible link between thevarious participants in the Kennedy killing and ensuingcover-ups had to be Masonry - a Nazi shadow group hadinfiltrated the ranks of Masons and exploited the Masonicoath and loyalty to the Brotherhood.

Meanwhile, during the weekend meetings of the ArmyReserve unit, I would sit down with a friend to discuss mynewest discoveries concerning Masonry. This friend was aan Army Major and a Vice-president in a major airlinecompany. I had found his comfort with discussions ofpsychic powers and secret societies to be surprising. Andwhile he never added anything to what I would say, he wasvery interested and supportive. Two years into our academicrelationship, I looked down to see he was wearing a Masonicring.

In total shock I said, "You are a Mason?"

"Yes. I thought you knew that."

No, I had not known that. But things became very clear: hehad not added anything to the discussions because he wasunder a death oath not to relate Masonic secrets. Not onlywas he a Mason, he was a thirty-second degree MasterMason and you cannot get much higher in traditionalMasonic ranks.

Soon after this revelation I asked him, "Is it possible that aNazi group could have infiltrated the Masonic ranks in orderto acquire new members as well as provide them with aworldwide infrastructure - an organization with anorganization?"

The Major was silent for many minutes, finally he looked upand very intently said quietly, "Yes."

It is not difficult to see a Nazi accommodate himself withinMasonry. In fact, Hitler concluded that much of the symbolicnature of Freemasonry and its concept of a "brotherhood"could be used as the basis for creating a powerfulorganization. The Nazi concept of a blood brotherhood couldhave bound them to each other for life - regardless ofGermany's demise, and it is possible a Nazi Brotherhoodsurvived the war in the form of those Nazis who had

77

escaped Germany with billions of dollars in pillaged treasure.The worldwide Freemason organization could haveaccommodated those missing Nazis, offering a means ofcommunicating with one another, while providing arepository of potential new members of Nazi society.

The existence of the Freemason organization adds anotheraspect to Cosmic Rule #6: You are not alone. Freemasonrypermeates the very fiber of America, as does the moreclosed clubs represented by the Bohemian Grove. Secretsocieties have secret agendas and secret memberships.They are like subsocieties existing within the larger, ignorantsociety of the masses. Thus, accepted society is not aloneand no one can ever be sure that a member of a secretsociety is not lurking about. "Just because you are paranoid,does not mean they are not out to get you."

Before continuing, let us define three words. “Democracy”means all for one. “Communism” means one for all.“Fascism” is all for the state. This may help in understandingthe implications of the following discussions. Fascism waswhat Hitler’s Nazi Party represented. But it was less theState and more the Party for which all lived and died.

78

5 - THE VATICAN CONNECTION

My birth in 1948 marked me as part of the post World War IIBaby Boom generation. My adolescence in the fifties hadevolved into teenage life of the sixties, when all hell startedbreaking loose. It began in June of 1963. Pope John XXIIIdied. Within five months, President Kennedy was assas-sinated. I was fifteen. Those five months have dominated mylife.

The Assassination's impact upon indi-viduals, as well as nations, can be readilyrationalized. But the effect the Pope'sdeath has had upon my life was harder toexplain. John XXIII was really the onlyPope I had known, but I do not rememberever thinking much about him, other thanin the context as his being the leader of my

church. It was likely it was the fact death itself was a rathernew concept for me (Mom and Dad hid the deaths of petsand no relative or friend had ever died). And no one couldreally explain this death thing. But everyone seemed sad,and everywhere you looked people were talking about theevent.

Whatever, for some reason, the death of Pope John XXIIImade a massive impact on my fifteen-year-old mind: I cutout and kept the local newspaper's accounting of the threedays between the Pope's death and his burial. Somewheredown the line, Mom found this research and placed it withother childhood treasures she was keeping from me,unbeknown to me. Then, fifteen years later, while the familywas together for a wedding, Mom took out the variouschildhood treasures and gave each adult child his or herpersonal collection.

I found those pages of newspaper folded up and stuck in the

79

back of a teenager's photo album. When I realized theircontent, I clearly felt the hand of destiny leading me to someultimate conclusion. For the previous year I had beenresearching the life of John XXIII, and still I had innumerablequestions that were not answered. This fifteen year oldnewspaper treasure made a connection linking the Popewith the President and tied both to the Soviet Premier NikitaKhrushchev.

This papal research did not simply evolve out of myinvestigation into John Kennedy's death. Remember thevoice I heard in my head that caused me to read GlennWood's article on Freemasonry? And remember I saidcertain information was also transmitted? Well part of thatadditional data was to look for a connection betweenKennedy and Pope John XXIII. Somehow the Pope'sinvolvement with Kennedy was crucial to the puzzle that thevoice-in-my-head had presented.

Angelo Roncalli - Pope John XXIII

On October 9, 1958, Eugenio Pacelli,better known as Pope Pius XII, died.Nineteen days later his successorwas named: Angelo GiuseppeRoncalli ascended the throne of SaintPeter as John XXIII. The new Popewas seventy-five years old anddestined to rule for five years. Theannouncement of Roncalli's selectionwas made the evening of October 28,1958. The next morning, Roncalli

addressed the world in a twelve-minute radio message. Inunderstanding Angelo Roncalli, this twelve minutes becomescritical. The radio message was a forecast of those subjectswhich were to become the new Pope's greatest concern: thethreat of war and the economic well being of humanity.

Pope John XXIII reminded "the rulers of all nations in whosehands are placed the fate, the prosperity and hopes of theindividual peoples" that the people had not asked for "thosemonstrous means of war discovered in our time, which cancause fraternal massacre and universal slaughter".According to the Pope, instead of nuclear weapons, the

80

people had asked for "peace in virtue which the humanfamily can live freely, flourish and prosper - tranquility andconcord from which alone can rise a true prosperity."

Roncalli was born into an environment that must havenurtured his understanding of what the poor face. TheRoncalli family had lived for hundreds of years, struggling assharecroppers in the shadow of the Alps of northern Italy.Angelo was born in the stone house which had been theRoncalli homestead for generations. As the oldest son oftwelve children, Angelo escaped the life style of his father byentering a seminary at the age of eleven. The seminary waslocated in Bergamo where he became a priest in 1904.

In Bergamo, Roncalli became involved with Catholic clergyconvinced the Church had to beconcerned wi th the phys ica lenvironment of the people as well astheir spiritual well-being. There was aclear demand by those centered inBergamo that the Catholic Church hadto develop a social conscience andfight for the rights of peasants andlaborers. The various actions initiatedby the clergy during this timeframecame under the umbrella term"Catholic Action".

Thus the future Pope, with his peasant roots, matured in anenvironment where Catholic clergy felt a responsibility fortheir congregation's economic well-being. Throughout hislife, Roncalli remained an ardent supporter of CatholicAction. In 1961 the Pope claimed, "Probably the mostdifficult problem of the modern world concerns therelationship between political communities that areeconomically advanced and those in the process ofdevelopment." To Roncalli, technical and financial aid had tobe given by advanced nations "in sincere politicaldisinterestedness" to developing nations still in the throes ofhunger and misery.

In addition to admonishing advanced nations to care for lessdeveloped nations, Roncalli pointed out that only employershad the means to "prevent the recurrence of massive

Roncalli in 1905

81

unemployment", and he urged them to restrict profits whileassuring adequate wages. Apparently, the Pope felt anyindividual - whether politician, employer, or priest - had aresponsibility to alleviate the problems of the people.

Except for serving in World War I as achaplain with the Italian Army's medicalcorps, Roncalli stayed in Bergamo until1921 when he went to work on the Vaticanmissionary program. Four years later,Roncalli became a bishop and wasassigned to the Vatican's diplomatic corps.His first diplomatic post left him in Bulgariauntil 1934 when he became ApostolicDelegate for Turkey and Greece. He

remained headquartered in Turkey throughout World War II,which saw him actively assisting the fleeing Jews and othersescaping Fascist Europe. In 1945, Roncalli took the post asNuncio to France where he had to confront a war-torn nationwhere Vichy Catholics had supported the Nazis. Heremained in France until 1953 when Pius XII appointed hima cardinal and named him Patriarch of Venice. Roncalli'snext post was that of Pope.

In France, Roncalli had faced economic and social realitiesof postwar Europe. And again, Catholic clergy strove to alignthemselves with workers needs against Vatican policy. TheFrench workers tended to associate the Catholic Churchwith social order, the rich, and the middle-class employers.Thus Catholic clergy found themselves working in a nationwhere 80% of the population were Catholics but only one infour regularly attended mass. To offset this trend, the priestsbegan working and living among the workers. This growingunity among Catholic clergy and workers resulted in theVatican's 1949 decree that anyone collaborating withCommunists would be excommunicated.

This anti-Communist fervor exhibited by the postwar Vaticandid not match Roncalli's style. During his tenure in France,Roncalli was outwardly friendly toward the SovietAmbassador to France. As Pope, he met with Khrushchev'sdaughter Rada and her husband Aleksei Adzhubei in theVatican. Adzhubei was not only Khrushchev's son-in-law, but

82

he was also a member of the Supreme Soviet and editor ofhis nation's second most popular publication "Izvestia".

This meeting between the Catholic Pope and a high-rankingSoviet official in early 1963 sent world speculating that Johnwould act to bring Khrushchev and Kennedy together. Yetevidence indicates that secretly such a union had alreadytranspired. Even in November 1961, Khrushchev thoughtenough of the Pope to send his personal good wishes toRoncalli on his eightieth birthday. Pope John promptly sent athankful note which ended, "I will pray for the people ofRussia."

Perhaps it was those prayers thathelped the world survive the CubanMissile Crisis less than a year later.More likely, it was the activeparticipation of the Pope, the U.S.President, and the Soviet leader whotipped the scales although theprayers could not have hurt. With

Norman Cousins (then editor of "Saturday Review") actingas liaison, Kennedy and Khrushchev agreed that a Papalappeal for peace would help alleviate the hostileenvironment threatening to escalate into nuclear war.

Through the night of October 25, 1962 in the mist of theCuban Missile Crisis, Pope John XXIII wrote an address heand two other world leaders hoped would help prevent war.That message can be summed up in his emotional plea,"Hear the anguished cry which rises to heaven from everycorner of the earth, from innocent children to old men, from

Castro with Khrushchev

83

the people in the cities and villages: Peace! Peace!" And theworld's mass media - including that of the Soviets - took upthe cry. The response was a marked easing of tension thatallowed Khrushchev to announced his willingness towithdraw the missiles from Cuba two days later and allowedKennedy to praise the Soviet leader for his act ofstatesmanship.

Norman Cousins continued acting as intermediary betweenthree world leaders. He spoke to Khrushchev of Kennedy'sardent desire for a nuclear test ban and the Pope's intent inestablishing tentative contacts with the Soviets and hisconcerns for the religious liberty of the Soviet people.Khrushchev sent a personal message to the Pope throughCousins; the Soviet leader wished the Pope good healthduring the Christmas season using unmistakable religiousallusions. Cousins also carried to Khrushchev the papalmedallion from the Pope, that the Soviet Premier kept on hisdesk at all times.

While Norman Cousins wasidentified as one interme-diary between the threeworld leaders, there wereothers at many levels. Therewere technicians installing acommunicat ion systembetween Moscow andWashington that came to becalled the "Hot Line".Contacts were also made on

social, economic, and cultural levels in a move to "thaw"relationships between the Super Powers.

The Pope, meanwhile, continued to push for worldcooperation through his concept of United Christianity.Within three months of becoming Pope, John XXIII wasplanning his Ecumenical Council which he envisioned as abeginning stage toward unifying the Christian world. ThePope prepared his church first with Vatican Council II, butthe council was automatically terminated upon the Pope'sdeath. Yet while only in session from October 11 - December8, 1962, one well known Catholic theologian Father Hans

Khrushchev with Kennedy

84

Kung believed the council had changed the atmosphere ofthe whole Catholic Church. To Father Kung and others, thecouncil's evolving concept of a "theology of union" was farmore important than the promulgation of any formalchanges.

In its brief session, the Vatican Council indicated to itsalmost half-billion followers that the Church was activelyworking for reform and renewal. To non-Catholics, the imageof a monolithic, authoritarian Vatican bureaucracy began tocrumble. One intimate advisor to the Pope, CardinalAugustin Bea, went so far as to say, "both individuals andsociety should leave each one free to accept and to fulfill hisobligations and duties exclusively by the use of his own freewill." Cardinal Bea told an American audience that theChurch could accept the teaching that a man had the right tochoose his own particular brand of religion or even to rejectreligion.

Through his Vatican Council, PopeJohn was paving the way for majorreforms in Catholic liturgy and ritualwhile extending a Catholic hand to allChristians. Through his activeparticipation in the concerns of theworld's poor, Roncalli was movingdown the road that had begun inBergamo, Italy as Catholic Action andhad been fortified in war-torn,impoverished French cities. Throughhis "Peace on Earth" encyclicalissued just before Easter 1963, Pope John again pleaded forworld disarmament - demonstrating his firm belief that theChurch had to be concerned with the affairs of Earth as wellas those of Heaven. Through his open-minded actions thePope was facilitating the warming of relationships betweenthe two Super Powers.

The January 1963 meeting with Khrushchev's son-in-law,Aleksei Adzhubei, which sent the world wondering ifsomething more would be forthcoming was to be followed bya visit by President Kennedy about June 20, 1963. But thePope was dead on June 3, 1963 and five months later the

85

President joined the Pope.

There is, of course, the possibility the deaths of JohnKennedy and the Pope in the same time frame were simplycoincidence. Then again we know about the connectionbetween coincidences and thoughts (Cosmic Rule #5). Andit had to be Cosmic Rule #5 kicking in when I happened tosee a television talk show with a guest named David A.Yallop.

In God's Name

Yallop's book in God's Name relateshis investigation of the murder ofPope John Paul I, predecessor ofonly a month to his successor JohnPaul II. Yallop provides substantialevidence indicating Pope John Paul Iwas murdered by members of theItalian Masonic Lodge known as theP2. To understand the reason for thePapal assassination, we must lookagain to the time just before andduring World War II.

Mussolini signed a concordat makingRoman Catholicism the only religion allowed in Italy and itsterritories. Adolf Hitler and his immediate associates were allRoman Catholics. In 1933, the Nazis signed a concordatwith Cardinal Pacelli, Vatican Secretary of State, whobecame Pope Pius XII (1939-1958) after the rather myste-rious death of his predecessor.

Also present at the 1933Vatican-Nazi signing wasVatican Prelate Montini later tobe Pope Paul VI (1963-1978),successor to Pope John XXIII(1958-1963). And in Spainwhere the republic's presidentsfought encroachment by theVatican, the Vatican-backedFreemason Franco becamedictator and was recognized assuch by the Vatican twenty

Pope John Paul I

86

months before the Spanish Civil War ended.

There are accusations by such men as Charles R. Allen Jr.an expert on escaped war criminals ("Reform Judaism"magazine) that the Vatican aided and abetted escapingNazis including the infamous Klaus Barbie.In 1942, theVatican took an 80 million dollar payment for Vatican landpurchased by Mussolini and put it in the hands of anassociation of trusted men made responsible for investingthese funds.

By 1971, this organization, theInstitute for Religious Work, washeaded by the American ArchbishopPaul Marcinkus. Marcinkus involvedthe Vatican with Roberto Calvi amajor Italian banker, who had taken amodest, local Italian bank of the 1940vintage and evolved it into the largestprivate financial institution in Italy.Marcinkus and Calvi had anagreement which moved Italian fundsto Switzerland Nicaragua, Peru,Argentina, Panama, and theBahamas where the Nassau Bank had ArchbishopMarcinkus listed as a director.

Calvi was also implicated as having dealingswith Gilli - Grand Master of the Italian Free-mason lodge known as P2 and considered afascist organization. Grand Master Gilli wasconsidered a critical contact for Calvi's Southand Central American financial transactions.Gilli was so highly regarded that Argentina'sPresident Peron was seen to kneel beforeGilli.

Gilli's P2 Masonic lodge was illegal due to its activities in the1970s which saw 1000 Italian leaders brought together tocreate a "state within a state". This radical Masonic lodgeleveled dramatic penalties to renegade members includingtongues being torn out and throats cut. Yet in spite of itsviolence, these Mason believed that a violent coup was notrequired to control the most important positions within Italy.

Archbishop Marcinkus withPope John Paul II

Roberto Calvi

87

P2 believed it could take over the country by placing itsMasonic members in places of power.

Calvi came to public atten-tion after his June 18, 1982death which was originallylisted as a suicide. Howeverevidence was uncoveredsupporting the contentionCalvi was murdered. Furtherinvestigations led to theconnection between Calvi'sbank, the Vatican, the P2,

and the Mafia whose money was probably being launderedthrough the Calvi-Vatican scheme.

David Yallop's In God's Name takes theinvestigation even further and claims therewere over one hundred members of theFreemasons within Vatican City and the P2had formed links with priests, bishops, andcardinals. Yallop concluded Pope John Paul Iwas assassinated before he could destroy theP2's control of the Vatican and the Vaticanfinances under Calvi's control. AssumingYallop was correct, the possibility Masonicpower had also been a reality in the days of John Kennedyand Pope John XXIII had to be considered.

And the probable Mafia connection to the Vatican was veryinteresting. In researching the Kennedy Assassination I hadconcluded the probable shooters were Mafia connected. Thepossibility the Mafia actually planned and ordered theAssassination had been considered, but in the end Iconcluded they were probably involved in the actualexecution but not in the planning and cover-up. It was to thebenefit of the Mafia to have Kennedy dead because thePresident's brother Attorney General Robert Kennedy wasleading a powerful fight against the Mafia. However thedegree of organization and cover-up appears to go beyondthe scope of Mafia power. This Mafia connection to Masonicand Vatican power centers is a book in itself and beyond ourcurrent purpose.

88

As already discussed, one possible connection betweenthose implicated in the complex assassination scenario andensuing cover-up was their common membership inFreemasonry. The various cover stories involving Oswaldwere probably sufficient to convince the Warren Commissionof a direct Soviet involvement in the Assassination whichcaused the Commission to disregard evidence counteringthe conclusion that Oswald acted alone to kill Kennedy.However it is interesting to note that at least one of theWarren Commission members was a Mason and future U.S.President Gerald Ford. Well perhaps Ford's Masonry wasjust coincidence, after all Masons are found everywhere.Perhaps the Masonic connection to the Kennedy murderwas nothing more than the result of an overly creative mind.Yet as a professional intelligence analyst, I had to admitthere was a pattern emerging.

I had identified the following groups as being connected withone another: Nazis with Oswald, Nazis and Masonry,Freemason and the Vatican, Pope John XXIII withKhrushchev and John Kennedy. So in addition to the strangeU.S. Navy connection with the Assassination there were thevarious connections between Kennedy, Nazis, Masons andthe Vatican. I had started out looking for the common ingre-dient in those individuals implicated in the Assassination,which led to uncovering connections between diversegroups. I began wondering what possible common ingredientcould link the Vatican, Masons, and the Nazis. There wasthe Mafia connection, but that did not seem to go farenough. As for Kennedy, I assumed his connection was thathe had uncovered some secret threatening one or more ofthese groups. If Kennedy had investigated the Masons usingthe vast investigative powers at his disposal, any Nazishadow group could have been put into jeopardy. If thePresident had identified or threatened toidentify Nazis in Masonic ranks, Kennedy'sdeath may have become necessary.

However the most critical aspect to all this isthat until Pope John XXIII changed Vaticanpolicy John Kennedy would have beenexcommunicated from the Church had hebecome a Freemason. Since Pope Clement

Pope Clement XII

89

XII's 1738 Papal Bull pronounced Masons as "enemies ofthe Roman Church", the Vatican had prohibited Catholicsfrom being masons under penalty of excommunication. Justbefore Kennedy's election, Pope John XXIII pronounced aCatholic could also be a Mason.

Perhaps the Pope's change of policy allowed Freemasons toapproach the President and ask him to become a member.Perhaps Kennedy chose to investigate the Freemasonorganization and its adherence to Ancient Mysteries andSecret Sciences. Perhaps the tradition of Masonic militarylodges had resulted in existence of a Masonic organizationof U.S. Navy officers. If such a naval lodge existed, perhapsits members had approached Kennedy, a former Navalofficer, which started him investigating the Freemasons.Could the Navy connection have been through existence ofa Naval Masonic organization? And what would a federallevel investigation of Freemasonry have uncovered?

And again Cosmic Rule #5 kicked in (chance and thought): afriend handed me a book saying, "You have to read this. Itproves Jesus Christ did not die on the cross. It was all ahoax."

The French Connection

Holy Blood, Holy Grail discussed dis-crepancies in the Crucifixion contrary toChristian tradition, Roman law, or Jewishcustom. The authors expand upon thesepoints of confusion by focusing on variousgroups directly involved in the life anddeath of Jesus. They conclude theCrucifixion was planned as a massive hoax perpetratedagainst the Jewish people and ultimately Christianity.

Unlike historical tradition, the Crucifixion was only a small,private gathering surrounding three crosses, with a crowdkept at a distance. Among the mourners were the politicallyradical Zealots desiring a Jewish revolution against theoccupying Roman Empire. Also among those present were anumber of Essenes representing the mystical occult side ofthe Jews.

Because the Jewish Sabbath was upon them, the Crucifixion

90

was ordered rushed. A crucifixion took at least twenty-fourhours and some men lasted a full week. The order to hurrythe death would force the soldiers into assisting nature.Normally the outstretched position of the crucifixion victimand resulting pressure on the chest caused the victim to fightfor every breath. To hurry a death, the traditional way was tobreak the victim's legs, where the body weight preventingthe expansion of the chest could not be countered bystiffening the legs, and suffocation would come quickly.

The very fact the Crucifixion was to be hurried was contraryto Roman Law, which stipulated the victim's body wouldhang until the physical remains were eaten by carrion birdsor otherwise naturally disposed of. Jesus should have beendenied the right to burial, never mind the right to have thecrucifixion hurried so he could be buried by sundown. Yetthe Roman soldier in charge of the proceedings, CenturionLonginus, had orders to release Jesus' body to Joseph ofArimathea, for burial in the nearby tomb, by the beginning ofthe Jewish Sabbath.

Jesus was of the Tribe of Judah and had a claim to thethrone of King David, making Jesus truly "King of the Jews".The politically active Zealots became interested in Jesusbecause of his purported birthright. Jesus along with hismother Mary and father Joseph were members of theEssenes - a mystically oriented Jewish tribe that periodicallyjoined with the Zealots in the past over mutually advanta-geous causes.

The Zealots conspired with the Essenes to orchestrate afulfillment of Biblical prophesy, concerning a messiah whowould deliver the Jews. A plan was contrived to simulate acrucifixion, burial, and resurrection of one Jesus whichrequired the assistance of Roman authorities - Romanleader Pontius Pilate may have been bribed to assist in theplanned illusion of death and resurrection.

The plan was simple enough. By bribing Pontius Pilate torelease Jesus' body for burial before the beginning ofSabbath, the Romans would be forced to break Jesus' legsto hurry the death. Yet if Jesus was already dead, therewould be no need to break his legs. To create the illusion ofdeath, the Zealots took advantage of the custom of putting a

91

sponge soaked in vinegar to the victim's lips, in order torevive the condemned so their agony could continue.Instead of a vinegar soaked sponge, the Zealots usedstratagem - a drug that brought on the semblance of death.With Jesus dead, the soldiers would have no need toaccomplish the distasteful process of leg breaking. Jesuswould be taken down from the cross, brought to the tomb,and revived by Essene doctors.

All was going according to the Zealot plan: the sponge waslifted to Jesus' lips; instead of vinegar acting as a stimulantthere was an opposite effect. Almost immediately after thesponge had touched his mouth, Jesus said, "It is finished,"and he bowed his head in apparent death. Thinking Jesuswas dead, it was no longer necessary for the Romansoldiers to break his legs. The illusion of death would befollowed by the Essene revival and the Zealots would havetheir martyr and hero who could conquer Rome as easily asdeath.

The Zealots had conspired to create the illusion of fulfillingancient prophecy to acquire a man who could claim a bloodright to the throne of Jerusalem and a man who also had thepower over death. Jesus would become the perfect leader: apromised secular messiah with divine powers who couldlead a massive Jewish uprising against the Romans.

The Essenes, on the other hAnd had another reason forconspiring with the Zealots; the Essenes needed toorchestrate the Crucifixion of Jesus to give their divineinspiration a world stage upon which to play. According toevidence, the Essene prophecy concerning the death ofJesus was brought to pass, when the Roman CenturionGaius Cassius Longinus thrust a spear into the sufferingJesus. Longinus may have simply been moved tocompassion to end Jesus suffering and been unaware of theseeming death that had overtaken the victim - as traditionholds. On the other hAnd Longinus may have been part ofthe Essene conspiracy and knowingly ended the Zealothopes of a secular messiah.

The authors of Holy Blood, Holy Grail believed the con-spiracy actually succeeded. For unspecified reasons, theauthors did not consider the legend of Longinus and the

92

Spear and did not even mention it. So, the basic concept ofa successful Crucifixion conspiracy is just not valid if thelegends of Longinus and the Spear of Destiny are true.

However there is a string of evidencewhich definitely indicates MaryMagdalene was Jesus' wife who fledPalestine after the Crucifixion (eitheralone or with Jesus). This marriageresulted in at least one child whogrew up in the Septimania region ofwhat is now called France. Theauthors of Holy Blood, Holy Grail pro-vide diverse evidence concerning theM a g d a l e n e ' s e x i s t e n c e i n

Septimania, primarily through detailing the entrenched andpowerful tradition of honoring the Magdalene foundthroughout the region.

The fact Mary Magdalene was Jesus' wife, hinges on Jewishlaw of that time which stipulated that a "Rabbi" had to bemarried and Jesus was often referred to by the title. The onlywoman continually associated with Jesus is MaryMagdalene; And that Magdalene-Jesus connection wouldseem to have survived the Crucifixion.

The authors of Holy Blood, Holy Grail interpret the evidenceas indicating Jesus survived the Crucifixion but was forcedto leave Palestine. Why he did not continue as the secularruler envisioned by the Zealots was not explained; nor werereasons given as to why Jesus would have to flee. Again,while the evidence presented by the authors of Holy Blood,Holy Grail has proved invaluable, their conclusion that Jesusdid not die is not supportable - in my opinion.

However the important consideration in tracking theMagdalene connection is not in whether Jesus was alive andwell with her in Septimania. The critical factor is whether ornot Jesus was of royal blood who passed on the familybirthright to children who grew up in Septimania. And thecrucial evidence in this regard involves the Throne of David,King of Jerusalem.

Evidence indicates that in the period immediately followingthe Crucifixion, Joseph of Arimathea, Mary Magdalene, and

93

other associates of Jesus fled to Septemania - an area nowknown as southern France and northern Spain. Septemaniahad a large and powerful Jewish community and theMagdalene and her children were held in highest esteem.Her husband and their father carried the birthright to theThrone of Jerusalem; if Jesus also actually resurrected fromthe dead then his children were probably even morerevered.

As the great Roman Empire rotted from within, nomadictribes pushed from without; and one of those tribes was theSicambrian Franks, coming out of Germany to settle in whatwas to become France. One of the Franks was Meroveewhose son was proclaimed King of the Franks in 448. Thisproclamation of French kingship could have logicallyresulted from a marriage between Merovee's family and thedescendants of Jesus and Mary Magdalene. This was thebeginning of the Merovingian dynasty.

The reason for this assumption of marriage is based upontwo legends. First was the Spear of Destiny story that hadthe Spear travel from Jerusalem to the Merovingian Court. IfJesus had actually died from Longinus' spear thrust, theEssenes would likely have considered the spearhead asacred object - as it was already traditionally considered, byway of being the official ceremonial spear of the Jews. Thespear in Longinus' hands was, after all, key to Jesus' deathand purported resurrection. Perhaps the Essenes were ableto acquire the spear which they took to Septimania, where iteventually became the symbol of the Merovingian kings.

The Merovingians gaveway to the ancestors ofChar lemagne whosedescendants became thekings and queens of virtu-ally every major Europeannation. From the Merovin-gians, the Spear cameinto possession of Charle-magne and the followingforty-four emperors of the

Holy Roman Empire, before being placed in the Hofburg

94

Treasure House in Vienna, Austria, where Adolf Hitlerclaimed ownership in the name of the Third Roman Empireof the Aryan race.

The purported connection between a bloodline of Jesus andthe Franks merging into the Merovingian dynasty could notbe ignored. During my studies of the Nazi movement, thefollowing was determined: Adolf Hitler had a preoccupationwith the Merovingian period; he apparently believed therewas nothing mystical concerning the life and death of Jesus;and he maintained Christianity had been the consequence ofsome Jewish action. Within context of Holy Blood, HolyGrail's evidence, Hitler's perceptions could be explained: hehad somehow become privy to the conspiracy behind theCrucifixion as well as the importance of the Spear of Destinyin that event.

The second batch of evidence actually involves a number oflegends ranging from the Holy Grail to the Vatican. Thefollowing discussion is rather complicated, but important. Toprovide the whole picture and scope of the conspiracyperpetuated against us concerning our real history, we haveto go back again to the Crucifixion. Bear with me on this - I'lltry to make it a concise rendering of truer history.

The Templars and the Vatican

There is a Jewish tradition that the bloodline runs throughthe mother not the father. Thus, it is Jesus' mother Mary whogave her son the birthright title "King of Jerusalem". After theCrucifixion and Resurrection, the earliest ChristianCommunity leaders only accept as their leaders those whowere blood relatives of Jesus. These early Christiancommunities were comprised of Jews and their leaders werecalled "desposyni" - Greek for "belonging to the Lord". Thedesposyni traced their blood relationship to Jesus throughthree sources: Jesus maternal grandparents, his motherMary's first cousin Elizbeth, and Mary's other female cousinCleophas' wife.

In the initial beginning of Christianity there was a well-founded tradition that leadership depended upon one'sancestry. Christianity, as it grew into a worldwideorganization, acknowledged the desposyni's church inJerusalem as the Mother Church and cash contributions

95

were made to this most important church. Then in 135 ADRoman Emperor Hadrian reconquered Jerusalem andbanned all Jews from the city under penalty of death -including Christian Jews. The desposyni power was brokenby 318 AD, when they were informed by Pope Silvester I thatRome was to be considered the Mother Church and allfurther contributions should be rendered to the Pope of theRoman Church. In the following two hundred years, JewishChristian communities were eradicated one by one throughsword, starvation, and attrition until they ceased to exist bythe first of the fifth century. Somewhere during this period,the desposyni also apparently ceased existing along withtheir Jewish Christian communities.

Pope Silvester I marks the point atwhich the Vatican was born as asecular entity. The Vatican's powerbase was based upon the Christianworld believing the teachings of Jesusand that the Pope of Rome was SimonPeter's successor, and Peter was therock upon which Jesus said he wouldbuild his church. Thus, Peter'ssuccessors not a Jewish bloodlinewould be the ultimate leaders of Christianity.

But Silvester I took the Vatican even further, by aligninghimself with the Byzantine Empire. The Vatican organizedthe Christian Church into a structure that conformed to theRoman government bureaucracy and the Byzantine Emperorgave the Pope in Rome jurisdiction over Western Europe.With the erosion of Roman Empire borders to the continualattacks of barbarians in the fifth century, destruction of theRoman Empire as a cohesive entity provided the Vaticanwith no competitors. The Church had the organization whichcould provide spiritual hope for all those hopeless humansattempting to find sanctuary in the dark days marking theend to the Roman Empire. By the reign of the sixty-fourthPope, Gregory the Great (590-604 AD), the Pope wasconsidered Jesus' representative among men and theChurch in Rome had usurped the Roman Empire.

And then the erosion that had been eating like a cancer at

Pope Silvester I

96

Roman civilization and its successor the Roman Christianworld, finally consumed them all. Vandals, Goths, Lombards,Franks and other nomadic barbaric tribes drove WesternEurope into the Dark Ages. It would take five hundred yearsfor Christianity to rise from the rubble of the Dark Ages and itdid so with a vengeance: from out of Western Europe camethe Crusaders.

At the time of the First Crusade in 1095, the Vatican had afirm grip over Western Europe, based upon the doctrine thatJesus Christ had died for the sins of man and thenresurrected. Proof of the Crucifixion conspiracy - whethersuccessful or failed - would destroy the doctrinal foundationsof the Roman Church and the massive temporal power baseupon which the Vatican had grown. If documentation of theZealot plan existed, Jesus would appear not to have died onthe cross, never mind been resurrected three days later. Ifdocumentation of an ancestry flowing from Mary Magdaleneand Jesus existed, descendants of this bloodline couldjeopardize Rome's claim to power by invoking the desposynitradition.

The First Crusade of 1095 was called by Pope Urban II torescue the Holy Land from the Moslems. Peter the Hermittook up the call and led 500,000 peasants to their virtualannihilation (only 25,000 survived). An army of noblemenhad better luck, and in 1099 Jerusalem was taken.

When Jerusalem fell to the Crusaders, the city was offeredto one of them, a certain Godfrey de Bouillon claiming tohave a birthright to the Throne of Jerusalem. Godfrey wasdescendant from Theodoric - the Merovingian who ruled

97

Septimania after the Carolingians had gained the throne ofFrance. By 742 Septimania was an independent, fullyautonomous state and in 768 Theodoric was officiallyrecognized as "King of the Jews" as "the seed of the royalhouse of David" by both the Carolingians and the Caliph ofBaghdad. By the First Crusade Theodoric's bloodline flowedin the veins of Godfrey de Bouillon - the man offered thethrone of Jerusalem.

It would appear that while the Merovingians had lost secularcontrol over France to the Charlemagne family, theMerovingian offspring retained a birthright to the Throne ofJerusalem and Godfrey was offered that throne after theFirst Crusade had given French knights control over the city.Yet Godfrey declined the throne. Instead, Godfrey appearsto have been instrumental in the creation of twoorganizations: the Ordre de Sion and the Knights Templars.

The Knight Templar were givenunprecedented position within theRoman Catholic world by a seriesof Popes. In the two hundredyears following the First Crusade,both the Vatican and Templarsexpanded their power bases. TheTemplars demonstrated aphenomenal growth in creating anautonomous international empire.At their zenith, the Templars wereengaging in high-level diplomacyby having established the funda-

mentals of modern banking, including issuance of the firstchecks and by becoming the primary money changers of theage. They owned their own seaports, shipyards, fleets, andhospitals. Based upon the Vatican's initial fervent backing ofthe Templars which had been founded by Godfrey andothers, it is possible Godfrey chose to exercise broadpowers through the Templars with the Vatican blessing.

In fact, it is possible Godfrey essentially blackmailed theVatican to support the Templars, in return for not making anissue of the bloodline publicly. Evidence exists supportingthe theory that the Ordre de Sion headed by Godfrey was

98

actually the power behind the Templars. History supports theconclusion that control over Jerusalem was critical to thepower of the Ordre de Sion. In 1187 when Jerusalem waslost to the Crusaders, there was an apparent break betweenthe Ordre de Sion and the Templars.

For the time Jerusalem was held by the Crusaders (1099-1187), the Templars and Ordre de Sion shared the samegrand master - indicating a close if not inseparable workingarrangement. The 1187 loss of Jerusalem appears to haveprecipitated the 1188 break between the Ordre de Sion andthe organization they had created the Knights Templar. TheOrdre de Sion changed its name to the Prieure de Sion andfrom then on had a separate grand master from theTemplars. There were now two separate entities incompetition with the Vatican.

By 1300 AD the Vatican was absorbed by materialwealth and authority, perpetuating its ownEuropean bureaucracy, out of touch with publicopinion, and fully corrupted. In 1302 PopeBoniface VIII declared that outside the RomanChurch there was no salvation and that "everyhuman creature" was subject of the RomanPontiff. The Templars were viewed as competitorsby both the Pope and the growing French royalty. On Friday,October 13, 1307 Templars in France were seized andplaced under arrest. The order was officially dissolved in1312.

When Pope Clement V and French KingPhilippe IV conspired to destroy theTemplars, a new alliance was forged. TheVatican probably did not know the Frenchmonarchy was being backed by the Ordrede Sion under the new name Prieure deSion. This union survived until themonarchies themselves were threatened

by the rising merchant class. Realizing they were againlosing their power base, the Prieure de Sion begansearching for another way to dominate the world. At first theytried creating the Rosicrucian organization to confront theVatican. When this was not totally successful, another more

PopeBoniface VII

Pope Clement V

99

subtle avenue was taken.

As the middle class gained power by organizing in craftunions, the Prieure de Sion appreciated the power suchorganizations could wield. In 1717 at London's Apple TreeTavern the Grand Lodge of Freemasonry became the newpower base for the Prieure de Sion. It was apparent thatsecret French history of a possible bloodline traced to Jesuswas not simply an interesting fact of ancient times. Theeffect of such a secret had dominated medieval history,severely influencing Vatican policy. But secret history hadalso dominated modern history in the form of Freemasonryand the Nazi Party of Adolf Hitler.

The following scenario had presented itself: by aligning withthe Zealots, the Essenes inadvertently set into motionevents that resulted in our present Twentieth Century world.Jesus' offspring gave Godfrey a birthright to Jerusalem thathe bartered into a power position within the Ordre de Sionand the Templars by blackmailing the Vatican. A Vatican-French Monarchy conspiracy destroyed the Templars. Thegrowth of trade and European economy eroded the positionsof the French monarchy and the Prieure de Sion, the powerbehind the throne. The Freemason Organization became thenew power structure for the Prieure de Sion which wouldseem to be what Masonic author Wilmshurst referred to as acore organization he claimed was behind Freemasonry.

But what happened to the Essenes? Were they simplypawns in a conspiracy, or did they really believe in themystical powers of Jesus. Did the Essenes teach Jesus asecret science through which he was able to heal, cast outdemons, and resurrect. Did Jesus really die on the cross?

The Essenes

Twenty-two years after the breakup of the Ordre de Sion andthe Templars following the loss of Jerusalem, the Vaticanordered a European Crusade. Thirty thousand mencrusaded against the Cathars for a period of forty years(1209-1229). The Cathars lived in the area of Lanquedocwhich was the area corresponding to Septimania andGodfrey's ancestral home. The crusade became known asthe Albigensian Crusade with the stated primary goal to killevery man, woman, and child of Cathar descent. The

100

Albigensian Crusade is considered the world's first case ofnational genocide.

At first glance, the Cathars simply represented the majorheresy of the day and posed a severe threat to the Vatican.The Cathars essentially rejected much upon which theCatholic Church had built itself. From the Vatican'sperspective, the Cathars posed a major doctrinal threat. Butthe forty years of fanatical genocide would seem to indicatethere was much more to the story than a difference indoctrinal opinion.

Perhaps the true significance of the Vatican's crusade was itwas waged against the very area out of which Godfrey'sfamily had issued. The wife and son of the last reigningMerovingian had lived in the town of Rennes-le-Chateau,and the surrounding area of Septimania had beenconsidered an autonomous state whose leader was "King ofthe Jews" by the French monarchy, the Caliph of Bagdad,and begrudgingly the Vatican. Perhaps the Vatican was lessintent upon destroying a heretic society then intent upondestroying a family that many believed had a birthright to thethrone of Jerusalem.

Perhaps the Vatican feared that a recapturing of Jerusalemwould result in another confrontation with someone claimingto be Jesus' descendant. The crusade against the Cathars(1209-1229) was conducted simultaneously with four othercrusades being waged against Moslem infidels in the MiddleEast. By eliminating the Cathar bloodline, the power of theOrdre de Sion would be negated and only the Templarswould be in competition with the Vatican. After 1307 theTemplars were also no longer a threat to the Vatican.

But just who were the Cathars. A comparison between theCathars and Essene doctrine indicates a possible connec-tion between the two:

* both the Cathars and Essenes believed in reincarnation;

* in place of Vatican emphasis on "faith", both stressed thenecessity of direct, personal knowledge of mystical orreligious experiences;

* both recognized a feminine equality in life and there werewomen serving as both teachers and preachers of Cathar

101

doctrine;

* the Cathars denied any mystical, supernatural, or divineaspect to the Crucifixion, and if the Essenes had access tosome Ancient Science providing the secret of resurrection,the two groups have another striking similarity.

With the existence of the Spear of Destiny in theCathar region, the Pope's fanatical desire toeliminate the Cathars, and the acknowledgment ofthe King of Septimania as "King of the Jews", theEssene-Cathar connection is fortified. A case can bemade for the Essenes evolving into the Cathars whiledescendants of Mary Magdalene and Jesus marriedinto the Franks - a union eventuating in theMerovingian Kings. Numerous indicators of the manyJews associated with the Merovingians and the

entrenched mysticism of the kings further point to Esseneinvolvement.

And somewhere along the line the Merovingians acquiredthe spear used by Centurion Longinus. And thus the Spearof Destiny became an historical catalyst in the founding ofthe Nazi Party and all that entails - whether or not the Spearactually was used in Jesus' death. The legend alone of themystical powers of the Spear may have been enough forHitler. In believing the legends concerning the Spear ofDestiny Hitler would have made the Spear a mystical tool (inaccordance with Cosmic Rule #1: Reality is what we think itis).

The Nazis believed the Spear of Destiny had been theinstrument of Jesus' death. But did the Nazis believe he hadsomehow beaten death and been resurrected?

If Jesus did die and resurrect, the Essenes must haveaccess to some mystical knowledge that allowed them tonurture Jesus into a superman. If the Essenes evolved into

the Cathars, such ancient knowledgemay have been placed in a safeplace.

The Dead Sea Scrolls found in 1947in caves near Israel's Dead Sea,were an attempt by ancient scholarsSample of the 972 texts called

the Dead Sea Scrolls

102

to save knowledge and the Essenes may have been theirauthors. If the Essenes had a tradition of creatingrepositories of knowledge, such a treasure of wisdom mayhave been buried somewhere in Septimania. Perhaps theNazis were after such ancient wisdom when they dugmassive excavations throughout Septimania and environs.Could the Nazis have found some hidden treasure givingthem access to a powerful ancient science?

Did such a science exist; and if it did, was it in the hands ofthe core group at the root of Freemasonry, the Prieure deSion? After all, the Nazi excavations were also madethroughout the ancient home of Godfrey - King of Jerusalemhad he wanted the crown. Maybe the ancient knowledge hadbeen found at the time of the First Crusade anddocumentation of the Jesus connection was part of thattreasure. Maybe the very reason for the First Crusade hadsomething to do with European nobility believing they had ablood right to the city of the Jews.

And is the Prieure de Sion actually comprised of peoplebelieving that the royal blood of Israel's King David, hadbeen passed through Jesus, to the originators of the PrieureDe Sion, the Ordre de Sion. In other worlds, are there peoplewalking around who think they are descendants of Jesus,whose family right is to rule Jerusalem and who have takenthat secret family history and parlayed it into becoming thepowerful Prieure de Sion - the core organization behindFreemasonry?

And where does the Vatican stand in all this? What is theVatican's history regarding Freemasonry?

Men Named John

In 1738 Pope Clement XII issued a Papal Bull pronouncingFreemasons as "enemies of the Roman Church". Thepenalty for a Catholic becoming a Mason was excom-munication from the Church.

Freemasonry was established through the efforts ofmembers of the Prieure de Sion, such as Robert Flood andJohann Valentin Andrea. Both Flood and Andrea wereGrand Masters of the Prieure de Sion. Since 1188 and thebreak with the Templars, the Grand Masters of the Prieure

103

de Sion all took the name of John - either as Jean or Jeanne(for Joan). Like the Cathars and Essenes the acceptance offemale leadership has allowed four women to be GrandMasters of the Prieure de Sion; although this may be more aresult of blood lineage than respect for the female. Whateverat the time of Cardinal Roncalli's ascension to the Papalthrone in 1958, the Grand Master of the Prieure de Sion wasJean Cocteau who had been known as Jean XXIII since1918.

This use of identical names by the new Pope and JeanCocteau may have been coincidence; However there hadalready been a Pope John XXIII. The first Pope John XXIIIhad been forced in 1415 to resign the papacy, he wassimultaneously claiming with two others. As tradition holds aPope's chosen name indicates the course he wishes to set,it seems preposterous that Roncalli would choose the nameof a man who confessed to a total of fifty-five crimesincluding adultery, fornication, murder, perjury, sacrilege,and gluttony.

There is another piece of data indicating Roncalli's choice ofname was extremely significant. Pope John XXIII was votedhis post in the fall of 1958. Yet as early as 1954 Roncalliwrote his sister Maria that, "In France...some crazyFrenchmen, who rejoice in revelations and second sight,have even announced the name I shall assume when theymake me Pope. Crazy, crazy, the whole lot of them."

One may wonder if those crazy Frenchmen belonged to thePrieure de Sion. If the Prieure de Sion had befriendedRoncalli, perhaps the Pope changed Vatican policy againstFreemasonry in consideration for the Masonry's core group -the Prieure de Sion.

One confusing aspect to this story is, that unlike the well-known Freemasons and Rosicrucians, until the 1950's thePrieure de Sion had no public life. However beginning in1956, data concerning the Prieure de Sion and otherconnected subjects began to be publicly released in bits andpieces. At the time of John Kennedy's assassination in 1963,Jean Cocteau was Jean (John) XXIII, Grand Master of thePrieure de Sion. During his reign which began in 1956 databegan being released in bits and pieces concerning the

104

existence of the Prieure de Sion. By 1982 the authors ofHoly Blood, Holy Grail had knit together this data and writtentheir book about the secret organization.

In light of Pope John XXIII's common name with the GrandMaster of the Prieure de Sion (Jean Cocteau - Jean XXIII),the Pope's statements to his sister Maria Roncalli, his historyof involvement with France, it is conceivable the Pope couldhave been working in concert with Jean Cocteau towardsome common end. Regardless of what that end might havebeen, the Pope's attitude toward Masonry may have set thestage for American Masons to approach the CatholicPresident Kennedy to join their ranks.

If John Kennedy used the vast powers of his office toinvestigated the Freemasons, he may also have discoveredthe crazy connections that I have uncovered. Perhaps thereis a Nazi group within the Masonic ranks still intent uponworld conquest. Kennedy may have contacted Pope JohnXXIII to further the President's understanding of the Pope'sinvolvement. Perhaps there is a worldwide organization ofimmense power, believing as the Italian P2 Masonic Fascistorganization of the 1970's, that you could conquergovernments by putting your people in the positions ofpower. If such an organization existed, Kennedy's best betfor a government still free from the influence of such a worldorganization would be the Soviet Union. Kennedy may havefound a need to circumvent his own government channels totalk directly to Khrushchev by way of Norman Cousins.

According to Robert Kennedy (ROBERT KENNEDY IN HIS OWN

WORDS page 258), he and Georgi Bolshako developed a linkbetween the Russian and US leaders. As Bolshakov wasattached to the Russian embassy in a minor position, thiscommunication avenue is considered a "back channel".Thus, the concept of back channel communications was anestablished practice between the two super powers. RobertKennedy gives examples of how his back channel withBolshakov affected world affairs. While this particularcommunication avenue was ended when Bolshakov'sposition became publicized, it goes to show a willingness onthe part of the Kennedy Administration to circumvent StateDepartment channels in favor of less formal communi-

105

cations.

If Norman Cousins was being used as an envoy betweenKennedy, Khrushchev, and the Pope, I found myself won-dering what the subject of the messages were. In addition tomy already well developed suspicions concerning theFreemasons and Prieure de Sion, the fact that JohnKennedy, Pope John XXIII, and Jean Cocteau all died in1963 made me suspect there could have been the existenceof a worldwide fascist organization.

And again there was an acquaintance whoprovided further data to fuel my paranoia.Another Army friend told me that he had readan article in a John Birch Society publicationthat claimed David Rockefeller went to Russiadays before the Warren Commission releasedtheir report.

Rockefeller supposedly met with the USSR's Politburo whichactually governed the Soviets. Rockefeller had with him twoversions of the same Life Magazine edition where the onlydifference was a set of photographs taken from Zapruder'sfilm of the Assassination. In one version, the frame showingKennedy's head flying backward was captioned indicatingthat the photo demonstrated Kennedy was killed from abullet fired from in front of the limousine. The second versionreplaced this photograph with another which was captionedindicating Kennedy was hit from behind. Rockefellersupposedly told the Politburo that if they did not get rid ofKhrushchev, the Warren Commission would conclude therewas a KGB conspiracy ordered byKhrushchev that killed the Presidentand war could likely be the outcome.If Khrushchev was forced to stepdown, the Warren Commission wouldconclude Oswald acted alone.

Khrushchev resigned his office inOctober 1964. David Lifton found theOctober 2, 1964 Life magazine issue,which carried 10 Zapruder frames,each a full half page. The official is-sue showed frame 313 with a caption

David Rockefeller

106

indicating the forward exploding head demonstrated a rearshot. Lifton also found the second version where frame 313was replaced by 323 showing the President's head andshoulder's touching the rear seat of the car published with acaption concerning the head "snapping to one side".

Of course, I did not actually see the John Birch article, andeven if I had there was no way I could prove its accusationsconcerning Rockefeller's role. However the very existence ofthe two versions of the Life edition and the fact Khrushchevdid resign makes me begrudgingly admire the entirescheme.

Not only did they kill the President, they setup Oswald tomake it look like a Soviet hit. This Soviet connection couldbe used to persuade the Warren Commission to overlookbothersome evidence; it also was used to blackmail thePolitburo into getting rid of Kennedy's possible ally against aworldwide fascist organization.

The other ally was Pope John XXIII who died of cancer, asdid Jack Ruby. This cancer connection I found interestingbecause during Nixon's Administration, John Mitchell's wifeMartha claimed she was being injected with cancer cells tokeep her from talking about what she knew. Martha died ofcancer after being labeled a bit crazy.

Well it would not be difficult to label me a bit crazy either.Kennedy killed by a Nazi conspiracy involving Freemasons,the Vatican, the U.S. Navy, the Secret Service, and theDallas Sheriff's Department. Crazy talk, except an enormousamount of evidence was pointing to that conclusion.

Even crazier was the whole concept of secret societiesruling the world. Except that one of those secret societies -the Thule Society of Germany - had taken the world throughthe nightmare of World War II by way of the Nazi Party. Andanother secret society - the P-2 of Italy - had nearly suc-ceeded in taking over Italy during the 1970's. And theFreemasons had been successful in leading revolutions inAmerica, France, and a dozen other nations. And in theUnited States we would seem to have a number of secretorganizations ranging from the Bohemian Club to the Free-masons, and my research indicated there were other groupseven more powerful than those identified.

107

The fact powerful men of politics, industry, finance, societyand the military could conspire to work within secret groupsto control the world was something that I could accept afterreconsidering history and a seeming need for men to cometogether through some herding instinct. "Herding instinct" isthe way I think about this need for men to come together invarious groupings. The prehistoric family grew intoprehistoric tribes. The tribes eventually evolved into cultureswhere various tribes were bonded by common elements.Somewhere along the line, someone decided to unite thecommon cultures under a common government and a nationis born. But being part of a nation is not enough.

Within the nation there is a tendency to still maintainseparate group identities. Sometimes it is a geographicdesignation, such as New England the Southern States, theHeartland the West Coast. The groupings take many forms:always cultural, always religious, often political andsometimes economic. And then you have the even morespecial and limited sorority and fraternities of the collegesand universities, as well as the Freemasons, the RainbowGirls, the Demolay Society, the Knights of Columbus, theBoy Scouts, the Girl Scouts, the Camp Fire Girls and others.

While understanding groupings are a way of addressing theneeds of the many by lumping common goals together, theherding instinct goes beyond this. There is some innateneed in men to come together with those who see the samelimited reality. We have not nurtured the power of theindividual. We have instead nurtured group power.

But this may be a necessity based upon rules #1 and #2 ofCosmic Reality. We would certainly have a mess, if everyindividual began believing in separate realities. If physicalreality conforms to what the majority believes, any individualproposing an alternative reality could threaten the very fiberof physical reality itself. And so we feel much safer and moresecure with reality itself, by joining together in groups Andthus, limiting exposure to alternative realities.

But then there is that third rule concerning those in powerwanting to keep rules #1 and #2 from everyone else. It maybe a natural, even desirable, tendency to empower thegroup to stabilize physical reality. But who controls what the

108

group thinks? In the case of many identified secret societies,what is believed is that the group must protect the SecretSciences and Ancient Knowledge, at all cost.

109

6 - The Resurrection of Jesus ChristConnection

In the last chapter, traditional History was severely attacked.Your present position has shifted, if you believe you heardhistory as it truly transpired. If you believe AncientKnowledge that had been secret is now revealed, you willhave the scepter of your own personal power within reach.

We are now going to shift gears. Let us take another look atscience which is also maintained as secret knowledge.

In wartime, secrets are admired. The PhiladelphiaExperiment of making a warship invisible was beyond TopSecret, during World War II. In peacetime, secrets should beviewed with suspicion. Only in the very recent past has moreinformation been revealed about the Philadelphia Experi-ment. Someone wanted to keep the knowledge gleamed onthe USS Eldridge, Destroyer Escort DE 173, in October1943, hidden away from everyone else.

The ship disappeared and the sailors with it. As statedearlier:

The Philadelphia Experiment demonstrated thepossible consequence incurred by individualscoming under attack by powerful electromagneticfields; in addition to physical death and mentaldysfunction, they could experience disruption ofthe molecular cohesion of the physical bodyresulting in disappearance.

Religious pictures depicting Jesus and other Holy Peoplesurrounded by a bright halo is only one indication there havealways been individuals, whether called mystic, psychic, orguru, who are able to "see" auras, energy fields present in allliving things. Then, during World War II, two Russians

110

perfected a technique for photographing auras. The Kirlianhusband and wife team discovered auras can be capturedon photographic film, when a weak electric current is passedthrough a living object.

Kirlian photography is based uponthe phenomena of the "coronadischarge" which gets its name froma similar visual effect of watching thesun's corona during an eclipse. Onearth the effect is obtained by placingelectrically grounded, living objects ina high frequency, low amperageelectric field. Millions of electronsbuild up around the grounded objectand are discharged toward theelectrode generating the field. Byplacing photographic film betweenthe object and electrode, the sparkpatterns being discharged can beelectrophotographed. The end resultunder optimum conditions are photographs displaying vivid,color patterns of the aura.

Different auras looked different. And the aura of a givenindividual would change from time to time. It was noticed thatcorona discharge patterns off human fingertips revealdiagnostic information concerning diseases in the body. Butof greatest interest is the fact that Kirlian photography ofleafs with pieces missing showed an intact corona image.The implication being, that a well defined energy field stillexists to interact with the high frequency of the electric field.The energy field remained when the physical was missing.

Thanks to Kirlian photography, there is visual, concrete proofas to the existence of the aura, existing independent ofphysical manifestation. But what is the aura?

Using one form of energy (electric in Kirlian photography) toenhance another form of energy is not new. It wasexperimentation with magnetic fields which allowedscientists to identify electric fields. Magnetism is still used tocreate the more versatile electricity.

The existence of the bioelectromagnetic field cannot be

Kirlian Photographyshowing friend’s aura. In

the color original, the aurais a bright white outlined inlayers of blue and purple.

111

disputed. Not only can it be photographically detectedthrough Kirlian techniques, the electric components can bemeasured as brain waves (electroencephalograph) andmuscular activity (electromyograph). But is this measurableenergy emitted by the body's physical molecules, or is thebioelectromagnetic field actually an entity unto itself? Inother words, which came first, the physical body or thebioelectromagnetic field. If the bioelectromagnetic field camefirst, it would support belief in the existence of the soul.

The Quantum Connection

For those having been brought up on a science before theSeventies, it is difficult to imagine a scientific world thatwould claim, "There is no matter. Matter is simply amanifestation of energy in relationship to itself." But with thearrival of Quantum Physics, that is exactly what the scientificworld has been forced to accept.

When Einstein presented this “Theoryof Relativity” to mankind, he usheredin an entire new era of physics. Thenew physics came to be calledQuantum Physics, which was giventhe awesome task of proving ordisproving the concept that matter isenergy in relationship to itself.Einstein basically claimed that matteris a result of our perception of energyin relationship to ourselves. Quantumphysics has, in fact, proven that there

is no matter.

But how is it that you can feel, see, and taste something thatdoes not exist. The answer lies in the concept of "frozen"energy. When you are running along side another person,you can easily carry on a conversation, because you areboth running at the same speed. But if you were standingstill and someone ran by you, not much can be said. In fact,they could run you would only see a blur. If they wererunning at the speed of light, you would see nothing at all.The only thing we have changed is the relationship of you tothe runner and the runner's speed.

The reason we perceive matter to be something solid, is that

112

there is a similar energy between ourselves and those thingscomprising the physical universe. We are energy bodiesoperating within the frequency of the physical universe.Everything in our reality is vibrating at the same speed andis, therefore, perceived as being frozen in time and space.

Quantum Physics calls the physical universe the positivetime-space continuum where energy is moving at or belowthe speed of light. Theoretically there could be energiesoperating beyond the speed of light And therefore invisible tothe physical universe. This is referred to as the negativetime-space continuum.

I remember my absolute confusion when first confronting thenew physics. What was discovered by experiments at thelevel of molecules and electrons, is that sometimes thesenuclear particles are material, but sometimes they wereobservable as energy waves. The experiments also drew theconclusion that whenever scientists studied a situation, thevery study skewed the results. The energy of the scientistswere interacting with the energies they were studying.

The implications are that the atom makes some choice to bean atom; a molecule makes some choice to be a molecule ofcarbon instead of oxygen; that an impregnated human celldecides to divide and divide until each cell makes a choice,like to become the heart rather than kidney.

It is easier for me to think of cells following abioelectromagnetic blueprint projected by the consciousnessof the soul, than in terms of each cell having someconscious decision making ability.

In the Tao of Physics this quantum idea about energy wascompared to Zen Buddhism and other Eastern mysticreligions. The book's conclusion is that the ancients knewQuantum Physics by another name.

Ancient Knowledge

Ancient healers believed the human body is only one aspectof a multidimensional entity. The physical manifestation ofthat total being exists within the positive time-spacecontinuum. The other aspects of the human being lie in thenegative time-space continuum and appear invisible to thephysical universe because they operate at speeds in excess

113

of the speed of light.

According to Chinese physicianssome 5,000 years ago, nutritiveenergy known as "Chi" brings life-giving nourishment of a subtle,energetic nature through points onthe skin to an internal system flowingthroughout the physical body. Theseportals on the skin are calledacupuncture points or acupoints.Each acupoint is the gateway of apair of meridian circuits. Onemeridian carries the Yang energybelieved associated with creativity

and action. The other meridian carries Yin energy, viewed aspassive and stagnant in nature. It is the oscillations betweenthese two opposites which keep an individual balanced in anever changing universe. For every physical body organ thereis a pair of meridians controlling the very cells themselves.These meridians actually look like miniature duct-like tubularsystems.

Professor Kim Bong Han of Korea isolated, identified, andtraced the meridians during the 1960's, by injectingradioactive phosphorus into rabbit acupoints and followingthe uptake of the substance into the rabbit's organs. Fluidextracted from the meridian's tubular structures revealedhigh concentrations of a number of hormonal substances,amino acids, DNA, RNA and other biological elements, atlevels far different than those normally found in thebloodstream. Two things were apparent from Kim's work: themeridian system is closed and self-contained; and there isan interrelationship between the meridians and othersystems within the physical body.

One amazing discovery made by Kim was that meridianducts in embryonic chicks were formed within fifteen hoursof conception, long before the most rudimentary organs. Themeridians appear to bring information concerning actualdevelopment of the embryo to DNA control centers within theindividual cells.

Now the acupoints themselves cannot by physically seen on

114

the skin. They can, however be traced by changes in theelectromagnetic fields within the traditional acupoints.Electric resistance in skin overlaying acupoints is lower thansurrounding skin by a factor of about 10 to 1. States such assleep and hypnosis can cause significant changes inelectrical conductivity of acupoints, compared to their normalstate in an awake person.

Dr. Ion Dumitrscu, developed electronography, which utilizesa combination of Kirlian photographic concepts with com-puters and scanning electrodes. Acupoints could be seen toglow brightly along meridians associated with diseasedorgans. The size and brightness of the acupoints correlatedto the disease's acuteness.

Dr. Hiroshi Motoyam devised the Apparatus for Measuringthe Functions of the Meridians and Corresponding InternalOrgans, or the AMI machine. The AMI is a computerizeddiagnostic machine which takes data from the acupoints andfeeds it into a computer which analyzes and interprets theinformation. When there is a marked electrical differencebetween paired meridians, the internal organ will be in astate of unbalance.

The Voll Machine developed by Dr. Reinhard Voll, examinesparameters of individual acupoints. By introduction ofelectrical voltage to the acupoint, the health of the meridiansystem could be determined by its ability to hold the charge.

What we are seeing is growing scientific proof that theacupuncture-meridian system, well known to ancienthealers, but only recently being embraced by moderndoctors.

Ancient healers also believe inanother system, difficult to measure,difficult to scientifically prove, calledthe chakra-nadis system. "Chakra" isSanskrit for "wheels" and are de-scribed as whirling vortices of energy.While there are some 360 chakrasidentified within the physical body,primary emphasis is placed on seven

major chakas falling in a line from the crown of the head tothe base of the spine.

115

The chakra are seen as feeding fluid-like energy to thephysical body by way of the 72,000 nadis channels. Thenadis system is purported to be contained within the nervoussystem which is the physical externalization of the nadiscircuits, which are really threads of energy being emittedfrom the chakras.

The combination of the meridian-acupoint system and thechakra-nadis system comprise the "etheric body". It shouldbe noted that metaphysicians since ancient times have saidthe etheric body exists, have described it, have stated itsfunction. It is probable that the etheric body is the source ofbioelectromagnetic energy, photographed as an aura withinand surrounding the human body using Kirlian techniques.

The etheric is the point ofinterface between thephysical cells of the bodyexisting in the positivetime-space continuumand energy bodiesexisting at speeds fasterthan light in the negativetime-space continuum.

According to metaphysical belief, the first of these energyfields is the astral, which esoteric literature considers thefocus of our sensual appetites, desires, longings, moods,feelings, and fears. In other words, the astral body has apowerful connection with our basic survival and emotionalnatures.

In a frequency range slightly higher than the astral, is themental body, which is an extension of our thoughts. Theenergy of thought takes form within our aura and affects theastral body in the form of emotions. Thus what we think hasa direct consequence on the astral body, which can, in turn,affect the etheric and physical bodies.

What I am trying to demonstrate, is the multi-level aspects ofthe human life form. The thing we see as the physical bodyis only the energy field moving below the speed of light.Those energy bodies holding our emotions and thoughts aresimply existing outside the speed of light. And the ethericbody is a combination of two, existing as a combination of

116

frequencies, where the meridian system moves slow enoughto be seen within the physical universe.

Somewhere within these layers of energy fields are layers ofconsciousness. Within the physical body is the brain which isthe source of conscious thought. The conscious mindoperates in a frequency designated "beta frequency". It isthe "normal" operating frequency of the awake individual.

When the individual becomes deeply relaxed, asleep or in astate of meditation or creativity, alpha frequencies aredetected. Alpha frequencies have been heavily studied andmeans have been developed to teach individuals toconsciously induce the alpha state. This training in inducingalpha states has been very successful and is calledbiofeedback.

There are also the delta and theta frequencies. By the1970's little was known about the delta state, but researchinto the theta state had begun. Biofeedback training had littlesuccess in inducing the theta state, except in one notableexception. Unlike others attempting theta training, one youngman demonstrated an ability to access and consciouslymaintain the theta state. The difference between him andothers would appear to have been his ingesting over 100doses of the hallucinatory drug - LSD.

This connection between the theta state and LSD takes onadd dimensions when a psychic signal is displayed by anelectroencephalograph - a device for registering brainwaves. Not only does the electroencephalograph show thepsychic frequency operates within the theta range, but theparticular pattern produced by the electroencephalographduring psychic states is virtually identical to brain thetawaves emitted by individuals under the influence of LSD.And these two identical signals are also identical to thepattern produced when a person is in the deepest levels ofsleep, where the associated rapid-eye-movement has givenrise to the term REM sleep.

NOTE: I am in no manner suggesting LSD be used to inducethe psychic states. Oh I would recommend it if pure LSD couldbe obtained. But I would not trust what you can get on thestreet.

It is my personal belief that the theta state is the operating

117

frequency of the subconscious. I further believe that oursubconscious on the physical side is the conscious level ofthose negative space-time continuum energies of theetheric, astral, and mental bodies. Our subconscious, is theinterface between our conscious minds and the consciousmind of our soul.

Now, this semi-scientific discussion is just to providesomething to think about in reading, why I believe in theexistence of a soul and the reality of reincarnation.

The Reincarnation Connection

The US Army IntelligenceCenter and School was locatedat Fort Huachuca some 20miles west of Tombstone,Arizona. On a trip out there withtwo fellow female ArmyOfficers, I was in the frontpassenger seat, looking downthe road through the endlessbrowns of the desert. Theshimmering of heated air above the road was mesmerizing.My mind slipped into the relaxed, meditative, alpha state.

I was jarred into beta reality when I heard myself say, "Whatthe hell is the river doing there?"

From the back seat, the voice of Ada Davis answered,"There was an earthquake and the riverbed moved about amile and a half from its original position."

"But" I asked, "what river."

"The San Pedro," Ada responded.

"But I mean, what river? I do not see any river."

"Over toward your right, where you can see the green line ofvegetation, is the San Pedro River."

"But how did I know about a river moving when I didn't evensee a river?" I was totally confused.

Ada leaned toward the front, looking at me, saying, "Maybeyou lived here, before, in another lifetime."

I turned around to look at her. "Reincarnation?" I asked.

118

"Sure."

I knew Ada was from Arkansas and a Native American. Hertribe used hallucinogens during religious ceremonies. Someof our fellow officers, when out on maneuvers in the desert,kept asking Ada which cactus was the peyote cactus.

Ada continued, "My people believe in reincarnation. Becauseyou have never been here before, if you did live in Arizona inanother life, that personality's familiarity with the area willmake it easier for you to recall that other life."

"Really?" I said with interest, excitement, and sometrepidation.

"Just relax. When thoughts come to mind that seem to becoming from some place other than your own experiences,just let the thoughts flow. Don't be afraid and don't try tojudge the images. Keep your mind out of it."

With Ada walking beside me, that day in Tombstonechanged me forever, as we walked through the town thathad changed very little from the time of Wyat Earp and hisbrothers Virgil and Morgan. The O.K. Coral was still standingas it had on October 26 1881, the day the Earps and DocHolliday shot up the Clantons and McLaury boys. TheOriental Saloon was there but much different. The CourtHouse was a museum.

The third of our group did not believe in reincarnation. Tokeep from bothering her, Ada and I did not talk much aboutwhat I was experiencing. Somehow, I just knew that sheunderstood what was happening to me, as thoughts andimages filed my head, for minutes at a time.

At one point, while walking down the wooden planks of theboardwalk lining the dirt street, I "saw" the shooting and saidallowed, "He killed someone here."

The unbeliever said, "Sure, you saw the sign." She pointedto the sign saying, "Luke Short killed Charley Smith...."

I was still staring at the dirt spot where Charley Smith haddied from a bullet I had shot into him when I was known asLuke Short. Ada said, "Great, now you know his name wasLuke Short."

NOTE: I need to point out that anyone Goggling “Luke Short”

119

will find out he did not die in Tombstone and lived to be anold man. But that is just one timeline. Another is the one Idescribe. Timelines will be discussed in Book 2.

I had known from the beginning that the thoughts drifting intoand overpowering my mind had been from a man. He wasarrogant and ignorant And as I was realizing, got a sexualkick out of killing. But I was trying not to judge what washappening, as Ada had directed. I kept trying to stay in aneutral place, allowing the memories from another mind fillmine with information from a time 95 years in the past.

The day had been long, and the thoughts fleeting. It was afamiliar feeling of knowing what was around the corner, orexpecting to see something or someone that was not there.It was really rather unnerving. Especially with the killing ofCharley Short. Late in the day, we were at the old CourtHouse, that had been turned into a museum.

There was a courtroom, surrounded by a few small roomsholding displays of artifacts from the past. And there was aplexiglass display depicting the life of John Heath. The timewas the same as the Gunfight at the O.K. Coral. Heath hadleft the Tombstone area, where he had grown up with theClantons, to go to Mexico. When he returned, Heath wasriding with a gang of outlaws.

One day, the Bisbee bank was robbed. John Heath wasarrested and tried for the robbery. He was found not guiltybecause of his alibi. The local townspeople decided theverdict was wrong. The lynched Heath from a telegraph pole.

Ada found me transfixed by the images behind theplexiglass. The words and picture of John Heath hangingfrom the pole by a rope around his neck had taken me backinto time. Ada Davis had to virtually shake me back into thereal world. When I finally noticed her, she had her hands onmy shoulders and was asking, "Are you alright?"

My mouth felt dry and my mind very tired. "Yes, I think so."

"You were really out there. What do you remember?"

I tried to think. Nothing came to mind. I was really tired."Nothing. I don't remember anything."

We soon made our way back to the parked car. On the way

120

out of town we saw a small building with a sign: Boot Hill.We walked through the building and out the back, whererock piles and wooden crosses marked the graves of manywho had died in the Tombstone environs. All of a sudden, Ifelt this strangeness and looked at one cross. There was aname on it. Charley Smith was buried right there.

Two weeks later, I returned to Tombstone with three otherpeople. After walking around the small town, two wentshopping and two went for a beer. Drinking the beer, I wassitting across from Robi, a medically retired Colonel in theUnited States Air Force. He was married to a woman whohad been my roommate during Basic Training, Army WomenOfficer School. The first time she showed me his picture, Ifelt I knew him. I was about to know from where.

It was a dry, hot afternoon and the first small beers wentdown real fast. Robby suddenly said, with a serious note tohis voice, "I apologize."

"For what?" I asked.

"It was an unfair gunfight."

I knew what he was talking about. That's the thing. I knew hewas talking about a moment in time when one man killedand one man died. A time before either Robby or myself hadbeen born. It was as if we were shot back through spacebecause we were in the same place we had been the lasttime our paths crossed.

I knew Luke Short had been a very bad man. The Earps andDoc Holliday were his friends. He was their leader. JohnHeath had been a farmer, who had seen his town taken overby some evil people. Heath thought that by killing the leaderof this evil gang, he could rid Tombstone of the poison thathad come in the form of gun toting thugs.

It had happened in the Oriental Saloon. Luke was at the barand drunk. Heath came in and called out Short's name. Thedrunk turned, and as he did, he dropped his gun hand.Heath drew his own gun and fired. The bullet ripped intoShort's stomach. He was thrown off the bar stool. As he layon his back, looking at the ceiling, Luke Short wasembarrassed, as his bowels and kidneys failed him beforehe took that last labored breath. Short died embarrassed.

121

I knew Heath had fled Tombstone with the Earps threateningto kill him. I also knew that the gunfight at the O.K. Coral hadbeen the result. The Earps killed the farmer gang invengeance for Heath's killing of Short.

"What happened after you left Tombstone?" I askedRobby/Heath.

"Went down to Nogales and south. Joined up with someothers and after a couple of years I came back. Thosebastards robbed a bank and I got lynched from a telephonepole."

"It was a telegraph pole."

"Oh, guess it was."

"You ever been in Tombstone before?"

"You mean in this lifetime?"

We laughed. "Yes. This time around."

"Nope. Always wanted to, though."

"Does the name John Heath mean anything?"

"Nope. Should it?"

"That was your name, back then." I told Robby the storyabout the plexiglass display.

Six years later, I went back to Fort Huachuca as an ArmyReserve Officer. During my two weeks there, three fellowofficers and I rented a car and spent a Saturday in Tuscon,at the Tuscon University Cowboy Museum.

I had been looking at the various paintings and artifacts andwas getting bored. I walked out of one room and into a hallwere one of my friends said the strangest thing. "You aremissing it. Better go back into that room."

It was the way he said what he said, that made me turnquickly around an walk to the far side of the room I had justleft. Before turning around, I sensed what I had missed wasalong the opposite wall. I walked over to the glass displayholding a white handled gun. Underneath it was a smallpiece of paper with the words, "Gun owned by John Heath."

I was stunned. Slowly I took the camera and focused on thegun. I had taken two pictures when another friend came in

122

saying, "Come on, we're getting ready to go, if it is alrightwith you.... You O.K.?"

After a moment I said, "You may not understand this, but Ibelieve this gun killed me in a past life."

He got really excited, saying, "I believe you! I belong to theEdgar Cayce Foundation."

I told him the story of John Heath and Luke Short and Robbyand me. The next day we took the rental car and went backto Tombstone. We were in the Court House museum. Theplexiglass display had been updated, but it did not draw meback into the trance experienced at my last visit. The EdgarCayce follower came over and said, "Come with me."

I followed him to the small room where cowboys would leavetheir saddles while visiting the Court House. He pointed to atable with a small plaque on it. "Farro Table where LukeShort was a dealer."

"Sit down," My new friend demanded, "you owe it toyourself."

He had left before I cautiously sat down and closed my eyes.I could smell the beer and dust and body odor. I could hear,though not distinctly, voices. The sense of a time long gonein space but not place.

How were my physical senses able to tune in to smells andsounds? The Ancients would say the memory of the soulhad been tapped. But my experience went beyond just aremembrance from a past life. Only time was separating mefrom Luke Short. He and I had sat at the same table. Andtime was just a relationship between place and space.

Einstein's Theory of Relativity demonstrates that time doesnot exit. Time is simply a relationship of place and space.Time is man's contrived measurement of his planet's dailytravels through the universe. Time as a separate realitysimply does not exist - it is only a measurement of therelationship of place and space. The place is Earth. Space isthe continuous points in the universe through which Earthtravels.

The table acted as a focal point emitting a specificfrequency. Everything in the physical world has its own

123

peculiar energy field whether alive or inanimate. Each placeis a compilation of all the things creating it. As Earth movesthrough the expanse of the universe, each infinite positionhas a different energy field. The three energy fields of object,place, and space combine to make a unique, one of a kindvibration.

In Tombstone, at the table, with Luke and I being manifestedby the same soul there was a great vibrational similaritybetween the 1890's and the 1980's. There was only a 90years separating us and in the timetable of the universe thatis not a very great difference. My ears and nose work withthe vibrations of sound and electromagnetic stimulation fromsmells. At the moment I sat before the table, the vibratorysimilarity activated my senses. It was more than just amemory.

Which brings us to Cosmic Rule #7: Everything that existsis linked to everything that exits. I favor the image ofexistence being like a spider web. When a bug flies into theweb, the web vibrates and the spider feels the movement.Every single change of vibration on the web of existence isfelt by everything that exists.

124

7 - THE TIME CONNECTION

If we accept that physical cells are the material represen-tation of a series of bioelectromagnetic fields, we are withinbound of Quantum Physics and also providing circum-stantial, scientific evidence of the existence of a soul. A soulcan be perceived of as the source of the bioelectromagneticfield utilizing physical molecules to create or project a humanbeing.

The first assumption being made is the existence of a soul.A given soul experiences life by projecting various person-alities within the Earth, or Physical Plane. Karma has beennamed as the reason a particular life experience is required.Karma can be thought of an an eye for an eye. What a pastpersonality did or did not do affects the next personality. Inthis way, progressive learning can be acquired.

For example, a Nazi could be reborn a Jew to understandwhat it is like to be a Jew. Or an alternative could entailbeing born into a personality who incurs a great deal ofinjustice. And that, you see, is the problem. It is the problemof the time continuum: for every specific lifetime, there willbe many alternative future life experiences which could fulfillthe law of karma. To fully learn, it is possible a soul couldproject many personalities within the same time frame. Theonly requirement would be to control space and place. Ifeach personality is thought of as a specific space, thenmany personalities could simultaneously exist within thesame time period.

For example, suppose we have a room of strangers. If a soulcan simultaneously project innumerable personalities,conceivably every individual in the room could be a projec-tion from the same soul. One soul could project various

125

bioelectromagnetic fields reflected physically as differentpeople occupying an identical space while being in separateplaces, i.e. their own bodies.

I am assuming the statement concerning man having beenmade in God's image refers to the soul. The soul cannot belimited by time - a simple measurement of place and space.It would be unfair of us to assume the soul cannot projectmany life experiences in the present of the past. Who are weto limit the definition of soul?

But if souls are behind each human, how do we explain theincreasing number of humans? It seems to be stretchinglogic to think souls are continually being produced. Howeverif one specific soul can simultaneously project more thanone human, the Earth's massive population growth caneasily be explained: various individuals share the same soul.

Which brings us to Cosmic Rule #8: There are a finitenumber of souls.

If we assume the soul is projecting the bioelectromagneticfield which is the body's blueprint, what happens when anindividual's bioelectromagnetic field is suddenly disrupted oraltered? Under mild attack, there would be a disruption ofthe normal electrical activity of the body and brain. As thedisruption increases, the brain might undergo irreversibledamage. If the attack were server enough, the physicalbody's autotomical nervous system could disfunctioncausing physical death. Under the most severe attack, themolecular cohesion of the body could begin disintegratingcausing the individual to disappear. But what happens ifthere is an instantaneous breaking apart of the physicalmolecules, under a catastrophic change in the bioelectro-magnetic field?

There have been innumerable examples of individuals whosimply burst into pillars of flame. These may have beenexamples of what results if an individual's bioelectro-magnetic field is suddenly and forcefully disrupted. Insteadof a rather gradual loss of molecular cohesion, witnessed inthe case of sailors after the Philadelphia Experiment, thespontaneous breaking apart of the physical cells wouldresult in an instantaneous energy release.

126

While such a scenario brings forth thoughts of a potentialpsychic weapon machine, as in the situation with VincentCollins, we may also have a key to understanding the resur-rection of Jesus. And the resurrection of Jesus demonstratesthe existence of the soul.

The Essenes were a group of Jewish mystics believing in animmortal soul, which projects fields of energy into physicalreality time and time again. The soul learns throughreincarnating into various human forms. If a human'sphysical mind can be correctly directed, the individual wouldgain "soul consciousness".

Think of the soul as a master computer (MC). Suppose theMC has a number of personal computers (PC) connected toit. Assume that in the beginning none of the PC's realizedthey were connected to the MC. Then consider what wouldhappen if one PC realized the MC existed and that it wasconnected to many other PC's. The PC that had becomeenlightened could access the data stored by all the otherPC's.

Let us assume the scenario depicted in the book Holy Blood,Holy Grail was not true regarding the death of Jesus and theprediction of Jesus' resurrection by the Essenes came topass. Jesus in resurrecting would have undergone an"instantaneous reincarnation" which was the Essenedefinition of "resurrection". The bioelectromagnetic fieldholding together the physical molecules of the body knownas Jesus would be slightly altered. The alteredbioelectromagnetic field perfectly matched that of anotherbioelectromagnetic field already manifesting a physical body.Jesus’ altered bioelectromagnetic field became aligned toanother adult body simultaneously being projected by Jesus'soul.

Is there proof that this occurred? Did Jesus’s resurrectionentail his bioelectromagnetic transfer to another body, thebody of a "stranger" to his family and friends? According tothe Bible, all those who knew Jesus had claimed to see himafter his death and resurrection at first as a stranger.

When Mary Magdalen and the other women went to theJesus' tomb, Mary "...saw Jesus standing, and knew not thatit was Jesus...supposing him to be the gardener.” And later,

127

when Jesus showed himself to the Disciples, as Simon Peterand the others were about to go fishing, the Bible states,"...But the disciples knew not that it was Jesus until he toldthem to cast out their nets which were soon full of fish."

Those closest to Jesus did not recognize him immediately.Jesus had to prove his consciousness had been reborn intoan apparent stranger.

Interesting theory, but is there any hard scientific proof of theResurrection never mind that Jesus even died?

The Shroud of Turin

In 1898 one of the earliest photo-graphers, Secondo Pia, took a picture ofherringbone linen known as the Shroudof Turin, in the city of Turin, Italy.Secondo Pia's camera focused on thepale, subtle, sand-colored etching on thesurface of the linen purported to be theimage of the crucified body of JesusChrist. The camera lens opened,

allowing light to chemically etch an image on the largephotographic plate. The resulting negative showed darkimages corresponding to light and light imagescorresponding to dark. On a negative, a black man lookswhite and a white man looks black.

Center of each panel shows image. Outer markingsare from fold marks and scorching from a fire thatalmost destroyed the Shroud of Turin.

Secondo Pia

128

The above photo shows the two views of the Shroud. Onthe left is the Shroud as it looks to the human eye. The panelon the right is what Secondo Pia saw when he looked at hisnegative plate. The Shroud itself acted like an negative.When Pia took the photo of the Shroud, the photographicplate appeared as a photograph. If the Shroud had beenaround Jesus' body at the moment of resurrection, as manybelieved, the image was that of Jesus. Secondo Pia had aphotograph of Jesus lying dead from crucifixion.

Some readers are going to rememberhearing the authenticity of the Shroudhad been proven false throughcarbon 14 dating in 1988. That testingcame under attack in 1993. Acontroversial theory states theshroud's fibers are coated withbacteria and fungi that skewed thecarbon testing. As the carbon 14 testwas the one scientific snag in myresearch, this 1993 question of itsvalidity and other questions regardingthe testing, is sufficient for me to throw out the carbon 14results. Those results had shown the Shroud was not as old

enough to have been the burialshroud of Jesus. Plus there is just toomuch other confirming data for theShroud’s authenticity.

According to tradition, when placed inthe tomb Jesus' body had beenpacked with blocks of aloes andmyrrh with a shroud draped over thebody to cover both the front andback. Thus, the mid point of theshroud corresponded to the top of thehead. The only thing remaining afterJesus' supposed resurrection was theshroud.

For fourteen hundred years, theburial shroud had essentially beenlost. While there is indication it had

Secondo Pia’s Jesus

129

been located in Constantinople in 1203 by Crusader Robertde Clari, it is known to have been in the possession ofTemplar Geoffrey de Charmy in the late fourteen hundred.By 1578 the shroud was in Turin, Italy where it has remainedunder control o f the Catholic Church.

Perhaps the most important event surrounding the Shroudwas the 1532 fire that nearly destroyed the linen. In fact, thesilver-lined, wooden box protecting the linen began burningbefore the nuns rescued it. The fire is critical becausetemperatures within the box rose to at least 200 degrees andstarted melting the silver. At that temperature range, thefollowing would have occurred:

- of more than two dozen medieval pigments which couldhave created the image on the Shroud, none would havesurvived;

- organic pigment such as aloe and myrrh which could havereacted with morbid sweat of a dead body to create theimage would have changed color and run;

- any organic or inorganic molecules used to create thefigure would have decomposed to penetrate the fibers butthe image is only on the surface of the linen.

Exposure to the fire proved the surface image could nothave been made by any known means from medieval ormodern times. On the other hAnd scientific researchconducted on the Shroud resulted in the following findings:

- six strains of pollen native only to Palestine were imbeddedin the fiber;

- the herringbone linen was proven consistent with thatproduced by a Palestinian manufacturer at the time of Jesus;

- cotton fibers grown in Palestine and not Europe weredetected.

Analysis of the very detailed image itself provide thefollowing facts:

- the numerous open wounds (90-120) correspond to lasheswhich would have been created by the Roman flagra (2-3pronged whips) reportedly used against Jesus;

- the headband of wounds could have been created by the

130

fishhook-like thorns of Palestine's Zizyphus spina;

- unlike erroneous depiction in Christian Art of Jesus havingnails through his palms, a crucifixion victim had nails placedthrough the wrists at a point where the meridian nerve wouldbe grazed causing the thumbs to be pulled into the palm andthe figure shows nails in the wrist and the thumbs cannot beseen outstretched;

- because a crucified man fights for breath by continuallychanging position from hanging from the wrist nails tostanding up to breath, the trail of blood flowing from the wristwould would change, as they do on the Shroud;

- coins placed upon the dead eyes correspond to the timeperiod of Jesus' death.

In the fall of 1978, Americans associated with the JetPropulsion Laboratory, Sandia Laboratories and the ArifForce Weapons Laboratory studied the Shroud with anexpensive collection of scientific gadgets. They concludedthe scorch-like image on the surface of the linen was mostlikely a result of some emanation of radiant energy. Radiantenergy can take the forms of electromagnetic, sound, heat,light x-rays, gamma rays, etceteras. The radiant energyformed the image in all directions at once.

This simultaneous etching in alldirections provides sufficientinformation concerning distanceto accomplish the unbelievable:it provides enough data tocreate a 3-D picture when aphotograph of the face was putin a VP-8 Image Analyzer. TheVP-8 is a computer designed tobe used in interstellar photos

where light (radiant) sources are operating at immensedistances from the camera. The Shroud of Turin is the onlyearthbound object that provides such 3-D images in theVP-8. Truly something extraordinary happened to the bodydraped in the shroud.

One scenario could explain such an extraordinaryhappening: when the transfer of Jesus' bioelectromagnetic

131

field occurred, there was an instantaneous disruption of themolecules which had been the physical body of a mannamed Jesus. This release of energy scorched the burialshroud.

If that is the case, the Shroud of Turin proves somethingelse: for clearly observable is a wound in the man's sidecorresponding to the legendary spear wound caused by aRoman Centurion who killed in an act of compassion. It wasa fatal wound.

Jesus promised to leave a sign. Perhaps that sign is theShroud of Turin.

If Jesus' bioelectromagnetic field was suddenly altered toadjust to the body of another man, the result would be amassive disruption to the molecular cohesion of his physicalbody. All the energy that had gone into manifesting thatphysical body would convert into some form of energy. IfJesus’ bioelectromagnetic field had not been altered, a deadbody would have existed and released energy would havetaken the form of normal decay byproduct.

While the Shroud of Turin provides data supporting thetheory of the altering of Jesus' bioelectromagnetic field, westill cannot prove the field was altered to correspond toanother individual's bioelectromagnetic field beyond biblicalreferences quoted above, concerning Jesus being a strangerand the actual definition of resurrection being instantaneousincarnation. Again for the purpose of discussion, let usassume Jesus as a conscious entity actually did continueliving in the body of another.

Assuming data concerning the mystical quality of the Shroudof Turin is accurate, Jesus died from the wound in his sideinflicted by the Roman Centurion Cassius Longinus. Thusthe Zealot plan failed. The resurrected Jesus proved tofamily and friends that he was not a stranger, and it wouldbe expected he continued his new life surrounded by lovedones from his life as Jesus having a direct bloodline throughhis mother Mary to the Throne of David. Whether in the bodyof the gardener or of someone else, Jesus would have beenin the company of his wife Mary Magdalen as she went toFrance to join the Essene community in the area ofSeptimania. If Jesus and Mary had descendants as depicted

132

in Holy Blood, Holy Grail who married into the Franks, theMerovingina Royal House could claim the Throne of David inJerusalem.

However the physical body of Jesus ceased existing at thetime of the Crucifixion when he spontaneously incarnatedinto another body form, one it can be assumed that did nothave a legitimate birthright to any secular throne. So whilethere had been a return from the dead, the Zealot plan wasdoomed as the Zealots needed someone who had alegitimate birthright to the throne to lead the Jewish people.Thus we have an explanation as to why - even though heconsciously survived the Crucifixion - Jesus did not lead amassive Jewish revolt against the Romans.

Even if Jesus ascended to Heaven in front of 11 of hisdisciplines 40 days after the Crucifixion and did not continuea human life in a new body, the fact his instantaneousresurrection was proven by the Shroud I consider fact. Forall I know, the new Jesus needed to disappear to live a quietlife with his wife and eventual child or children. Perhaps theAscension is just a made up story to explain his disap-pearance. Certainly the story of a Resurrected Jesus wasknown at the time. The public might have needed to begiven an explanation as to what happened to this newJesus. On the other hand, Jesus was a magical sort of beingand may have simply ascended to heaven.

For the Essenes Jesus was the perfect divine messiah. Byaccepting death to demonstrate the continuation of humanconsciousness within the immortal soul, Jesus challengedthe human race to strive for an expanded awareness. Jesusrepresented the model of the perfect man and a promise forall human individuals. Jesus was the example of humanpotential and divinity. The ultimate proof of that potentialitywas etched onto the surface of Jesus' burial shroud and theShroud of Turin became Jesus sign indicating the truthbehind his life, death and resurrection.

133

7 - The Time Connection

Thus far I have attempted presenting a concise rendering ofdeductions and conclusions derived from a massive amountof research into apparently diverse subjects. It took overthirty years of study, hundreds of books, tens of thousandsof pages, and an ability to remember certain events,statements, and thoughts others would have simply dis-regarded. But my ability to pull it together in these few pageshas come from Army training to "brief" - that is, explain onlywhat is needed for the commander to understand thebattlefield.

The Commander in this case is every individual whobelieves in a "Free Will Universe". I will risk being corny bydesignating these the Freedom Forces. The goal of thebattle is to control physical reality, herein called the 3-DUniverse. The battlefield is the human mind.

The opposing force is the Black Nobility who have been andintend to continue controlling the thoughts of humanity. Theirprimary weapon has been the manipulation of history,science, and knowledge in general. With the massiveproliferation of knowledge that came with the advent ofelectronic communication (from television to computers), theBlack Nobles had to develop more powerful ways of control.

The purpose of this section is to delve deeper into thequestion of secret science and ancient knowledge, tounderstand the new weapons targeted against your mind.

In his last address to the American people, President DwightEisenhower warned of a threat from the "military-industrialcomplex". While he coined a phrase, Eisenhower did notexplain what this threat entailed. In the first 600 page draft ofthis book I wrote a long section demonstrating the

134

interconnection between those who control government,finances, economy, academe, and even cultural affair of theUnited States. But in a very small nut shell: there is a selectgroup of a few hundred men who act as a "royal house"passing control over all aspects of America from onegeneration to the next generation.

Yet, in the end, I had to think in terms of: "Well it's a dirty job,but someone has to do it." As long as I am well fed,sheltered, healthy, and happy do I really care who is runningthe show? Even if someone comes along and enacts theExecutive Order which would overtly pull everything underthe control of one government agency, would I really care?Do I really care what the men in charge think. Freedom ofthought is an American right and as long as I can believe asI wish what harm exists?

If John Kennedy had lived to expose a Nazi power workingthrough the Freemasons, if he had somehow been able tofree America from those in actual control, would things bebetter for me? Should I really care that Oswald did or did notwork for the Office of Naval Intelligence and did or did notassassinate a President? As long as I am safe and happy,do I really care if I live in America of the 21st Century orGermany of the 1930s?

The average German's life was immensely benefitted in theearly days of Hitler's leadership. The Great Depression hadhit Germany, perhaps harder than most. A wheelbarrow fullof German money could not buy a loaf of German bread,before Hitler got things moving again.

In fact without Hitler the Great Depression would havelingered on for a long time. With the growing threat of warposed by the Nazis, US banks were willing to financeAmerican war industries. The promise of payment allowedthe country to build war stuff on the "pay later" concept. Thebanks charged the government interest of course; And theamount of money flowing through the economy doubledduring World War II.

No doubt about it, Hitler put the world economically right. Ifhe had not been quite so greedy and if the Japanese hadstayed out of the fight, History may have seen Hitler as atruly beneficial leader. Oh except for that Jewish Final Solu-

135

tion thing. Not only was the Holocaust sufficient enough tolist Hitler’s regime as profound evil, it hints at somethingmore.

Upon conquering France, Hitler ordered extensive exca-vation of the area once comprising Septimania out of whichemerged the Merovingians. What was Hitler looking for?What was it about the Cathar homeland that drew Nazis toexcavate the area? The authors of Holy Blood, Holy Grailclaim evidence exists proving the bloodline of theMerovingians originated with Jesus and Mary Magdalen.When the Merovingians lost power to the CharlemagneFamily, the Jesus bloodline continued to flow through theancestors of those who established the Ordre de Sion.

Perhaps Hitler believed the Charlemagne Family continuedto hold on to the Spear of Destiny and its accompanyingright to rule the world, while the Ordre de Sion evolved intothe Priuere de Sion claiming a blood connection to Jesus. Ifthe Prieure de Sion could evoke the tradition of thedesposyni and early Christian practice of church leadershipdepending upon ancestry, the Prieure de Sion could claimleadership over Christianity. And due to the Jesusconnection and the throne of Jerusalem, the Prieure de Sioncould call upon the Jewish homeland to unite under one,Jewish-Christian royal house. This scenario would be adevastating one if Hitler wished to rule the world.

The Prieure de Sion could identify a royal leader to unite theChristian and Jewish worlds against the Nazi world. To doso, the Prieure de Sion would have to document thebloodline of their would be leader all the way back to Jesus.Was Hitler's attempt to kill every Jew in Europe an effort tocontinue the Albigensian Crusade centuries before? ThePope had ordered his Crusaders to kill every man, woman,and child of Cathar descent. Hitler's death camps appearedto have the same intent. Was Hitler attempting to end anypossible, future threat by Jewish descendants of theCathars, who had been the Essenes, and who evolved intothe Merovingians. And were the Nazi excavations ofSeptimania an attempt to uncover any documentationproving the blood lineage connection to Jesus?

On the other hand perhaps Hitler was looking for something

136

much more daring in his diggings: what if he were looking fora long lost library of secret sciences? Freemasons andNazis have many similarities including a fascination with a"secret science" based upon some "Ancient Knowledge".And the Essenes, if they did evolve into the Cathars, didhave access to powerful knowledge and had a history forcreating libraries.

In the last days of World War II, with the Allies moving infrom the West and the Russians from the East, Adolf Hitlermaintained that "Germany would be saved." Hitler claimedhe would field revolutionary weapons which would save theThird Reich. The Germans lost their chance at the nuclearbomb when the Allies destroyed the factory processing"heavy water" needed to create nuclear fission material. Therockets which could reach New York City were also negatedthrough destruction of factory facilities. The jet planes andadvanced tanks the Germans had developed could not beproduced fast enough to impact on the war. But was Hitlerthinking in terms of physical weapons of destruction or didhe have something else in mind?

Based upon Hitler's preoccupation with the Spear of Destiny,it can be hypothesized that if he knew anything about theZealot-Essene crucifixion conspiracy, he would havebelieved the plan failed when the Roman centurion cameunder influence of occult forces associated with the Spear ofDestiny. Hitler may have considered Jesus only a pawn -playing a central role in creation of Christianity, due to hisdeath at the end of the Spear of Destiny. The Spear's powerwas critical - not any power Jesus may have possessed. Onthe other hand Hitler may have believed Jesus actually didresurrect. Hitler may have understood there was an ancientscience behind the resurrection - a science known by theEssenes, a science that could create "Supermen".

The Toronto University Study

At a minimum, a "superman" would have powers similar tomodern psychics. A study of a number of psychics atToronto University uncovered some rather remarkable facts.Interviews with psychics revealed a common element: allhad experienced a severe electric shock before the age often. The mother of the young man considered the most

137

powerful of those psychics had received such an electricshock three weeks before the birth of her psychic son. Thuselectric shock must somehow activate the psychic potentialwithin each individual.

Clues to what differentiates a psychic signal from othersignals came when man developed devices able to detectand measure electric impulses emitted in the ranges used bythe human brain. When those measuring devices came intoexistence the first frequency detected was given thedesignation "alpha wave". Further refining of equipmentconfirmed existence of "beta", "theta", and "delta" waveswhich we have already discussed.

And we discussed that the display of the psychic signal iswithin the theta range and is in a pattern virtually identical tothe theta wave emitted by a brain under the influence ofhallucinatory drugs. Thus a psychic signal and an LSDinduced signal produce almost identical brain wave patternsin the theta range.

LSD is almost identical to serotonin, which is naturallyproduced by raph cells of the lower brain. Serotonin isproduced when an individual is in an awake state andappears to inhibited the "spontaneous eruption of thought". Ifwe think of the brain as a computer, we need certaincontrols over its ability to retrieve information; otherwise thebrain would recall every blue it ever saw, every time thesubject of blue came up or came in view. As a personrelaxes and then falls into deeper levels of sleep, there is acorresponding drop in the serotonin levels of the brain.When the serotonin drops to its lowest, the brain is in a stateof REM sleep, where the accompanying rapid eyemovements gave this state of the brain its name.

Serotonin acts like a chemical control over the brain's abilityto respond to stimuli. Brains and computers both store andprocess information. While computers use electric impulsesand inorganic material, the brain uses chemicals andbiological cells. Without the chemical blockage by serotonin,a human computer will provide too much information to be ofvalue. Serotonin is a way of controlling the spontaneouseruption of thought so the conscious mind will not beoverwhelmed with information.

138

The conscious mind operates in the beta frequencies anduses serotonin to limit the amount of information supplied.The sleeping mind, on the other hAnd uses alternate thetafrequencies to obtain a greater capability for acceptinginformation supplied by the brain as the levels of serotonindrop. Apparently the theta frequency is capable of dealingwith much more information than can be done in the beta oreven alpha frequencies. It is estimated that the human beingonly uses 10% of the brain when awake. Perhaps the other90% operates in theta and delta ranges and are, therefore,not accessible to the normal conscious mind using thelimited beta ranges.

As stated above, serotonin and LSD are almost chemicallyidentical. They are so similar that the raph cells producingserotonin are fooled by the LSD into thinking there is plentyof serotonin in the brain. The raph cells stop the productionof serotonin and the brain begins to spontaneously erupt intouncontrolled thinking, called hallucination.

The LSD influenced brain begins emitting a theta rangesignal virtually identical to that of REM sleep. This jumpinginto the theta ranges could be caused by either of twothings. Perhaps the lack of serotonin (versus its LSD twin)results in theta thinking. Or perhaps the amount ofinformation flooding the brain without the serotonin triggersthe mind into operating in the theta range. However apsychic is somehow able to duplicate the signal withoutingesting a drug and without falling into REM sleep. And theyoung LSD user could also reach and hold theta statewithout reingesting the drug. It is also interesting to note thatthe intuitive and telepathic powers of people under theinfluence of LSD are often intensified.

If the studies have been done to further understanding ofthis connection between REM sleep, LSD, and psychics Ihave not heard of them. What the available data indicates isthat psychics may be created by inducing either the correctelectric shock or correct chemical environment in humanminds. It is real interesting that there are reliable reports thatAdolf Hitler ingested hallucinatory drugs. Perhaps Hitlerbelieved there was a science that could unlock the theta anddelta powers of the mind to create actual superbeings. It

139

would be a science capable of unlocking the hidden powersof the human mind.

The Atlantean Connection

Traditional interpretation of Hitler's "rumblings" concerningan Aryan race of superbeings holds he was speaking interms of the German people being somehow superior to allothers due to a genetic or "blood" quality. Under leadershipof the Nazis, the Aryan race would take its rightful place asthe world's superior people. Yet there may be anotherexplanation. For, according to the mystic Edgar Cayce, theAryan race is linked to the fabled civilization of Atlantiswhose people would be considered by contemporary men as"superhuman".

Edgar Cayce has a dozen biographies written about him andmore than 300 titles concerning various subjects he spokeabout during self-induced trance/meditative states. On adaily basis, for over forty years, Edgar Cayce went into thetrance/meditative state, providing information on thephysical, mental, and/or spiritual states of variousindividuals, who came to him for help. The messages Cayceprovided were transcribed and are referred to as "readings".The Association for Research and Enlightenment, Inc.(A.R.E.), in Virginia Beach, Virginia (founded by Cayce) hasa file of more than 14,000 readings.

As the readings focused on the health of an individual, theinformation Cayce supplied could normally be proven corrector not. Was his diagnosis correct? Did his cure work? Caycedied in 1945 and his reputation in the Healing Sciences hasmade him renowned worldwide.

During the readings, Cayce often provided details from thepast, when the individual had previous life times. While thisinformation was more difficult to substantiate, in manyimportant instances, Cayce's version of the past has beenconfirmed. For instance, before discovery of the Dead SeaScrolls, Cayce spoke in detail about the Essenes. Workconcerning the Scrolls has confirmed Cayce's view ofEssene life and history.

Introduction of Edgar Cayce would appear to complicate analready complex subject. Yet Cayce (1877-1945), with only

140

six years of formal education, somehow made a linkbetween Atlantis and the Pyrenees Mountains of southernFrance-northern Spain which corresponds to the lands ofSeptimania and the Cathars. While in a trance state in 1934,Cayce was relating information concerning an individual'spast life experiences on Atlantis when he mentioned,"Atlantians journeyed to what is now the Pyrenees...." Caycefurther explains that certain Atlantians fled the sinkingAtlantis to settle in the Pyrenees Mountains where, "none ofthe modern conveniences are a mystery at all."

In reference to a possible library existing in the Septimaniaarea, Cayce said in 1939, "those who came first to Pyrenees(were) active in preserving records - using powers called inthe present natural sources or electrical forces for propellingvehicles, ships, and for conveniences and communications.Out of all the possible geological points, Cayce pointed tothe Pyrenees as a settlement for Atlantians havingknowledge of sciences that we may still not have fullytapped.

Cayce claims that some of these original Atlantians left thePyrenees for Egypt where they introduced many things.When asked how the Great Pyramid was built, Cayce hadanswered, "By the use of those forces in nature as make foriron to swim. Stone floats in the air in the same manner."Could Atlantean science have built the Great Pyramid?

If the apparent data is accurate, psychics can be created byinducing either the correct electric shock at the right time orchemical environment in human minds to create potential"Superbeings" such as postulated by Adolf Hitler.Theoretically a secret science unraveling the mysteries ofbioelectromagnetic energy could produce powerful psychicsof the stature of Jesus, capable of healing, casting outdemons, knowing the future, and surviving death.

Certainly a man like Hitler would have gone to any ends togain access to that same science. Perhaps in ordering theexcavations in southern France, Hitler was really looking of atreasure of long secreted science. One can only hope Nazitroops who dug Hitler's excavations failed to discover anyancient records belonging to a sect of Jewish mystics or along lost continent called Atlantis.

141

Plato writing in the Fourth Century BC,spoke of an islandcontinent which "in a single day and night disappearedbeneath the sea." Some believe the Atlantis of Plato was afigment of imagination while others firmly believe Plato wasbasing his discourses upon fact. In the last 150 years over5,000 books have been written about Atlantis.

But if Atlantis was as advanced and powerful as indicated,why are there no records? Well there are no references toreincarnation in the Bible because in the Fifth Century AD allsuch references were deleted from the New Testament; yetthis does not negate the Essene belief in resurrection norJesus' association with the Essenes. Lack of documentationdoes not negate the occurrence: vast libraries weredestroyed in wars and acts of righteousness. Pope Gregorywas one of many men who ordered knowledge in the form ofdocumentation destroyed, "least it distract the faithful fromthe contemplation of heaven."

So while direct documentation may not exist, there is a vastamount of circumstantial data indicating that thousands ofyears before Christ some massive geological eventdestroyed civilization. Legends concerning a great flood arefound worldwide. And if Atlantis was overcome by oceanwaters, somewhere there must be archeological proof.

Buildings have been seen just beneath the surface of theAtlantic Ocean off the Azores, Bimini, the Andros Islands,Haiti, north of Cuba, Boa Vista Island of the Cape Verdes;roads, steps and/or walls have been located in coastalwaters of eastern Yucatan, British Hoduras, Venezuela,Bimini and Puerto Rico. Heinrich Schliemann, who discoverTroy in 1871, uncovered a bronze vase with the inscription inPhoenician, "From King Chronos of Atlantis". Papyrusmanuscripts still exist concerning an Egyptian sea search forAtlantis.

Timagenes writing in the First Century BC Greece, notedthat legend claimed ancient Gaul (France) was once invadedby people from an island which sank somewhere in themiddle of the Atlantic. And why exactly did the ChristianArnobius Afer write in the third century: "Did we (Christians)bring it about, that 10,000 years ago a vast number of menburst forth from the island which is called the Atlantis of

142

Neptune, as Plato tells, and utterly ruined and blotted outcountless tribes?"

Edgar Cayce discussed Atlantis innumerable times inproviding information concerning past lifetimes. He claimedthe destruction of the superior culture was due to mistakesthe Atlantians made. Cayce further stated those who oncelived in Atlantis are being reincarnated into the twentiethcentury to work out those weaknesses that led to Atlantis'demise.

Now I can no more prove Cayce's claims about reincarnationor Atlantis than I can prove - unequivocally - that JohnKennedy was assassinated by modern day Nazis; that PopeJohn XXIII was working with the Prieure de Sion; thatFreemasonry has been infiltrated by a Nazi Brotherhood;that Oswald was an operative for the U.S. Navy Intelligence.

As layer upon layer of history came into view, my firstinclination was to envision Freemasons as my enemy intentupon taking away my individual freedoms. But as a trainedintelligence officer, I know that there was a good chance theMasons - like Lee Harvey Oswald - were patsies and onlypart of another cover story. In searching for something evendeeper, there emerged Nazis adhering to the Spear ofDestiny theory entwined with the Prieure de Sion, theVatican, the Rosicrucians, and worldwide Freemasonry.

I will point to the Philadelphia Experiment and the Shroud ofTurin as circumstantial proof Jesus died and resurrected byan alteration and transfer of his bioelectromagnetic fieldcarrying with it the consciousness known to the world asJesus. I believe that bioelectromagnetic field was beingprojected by Jesus' soul, a soul capable of simultaneouslyprojecting many bioelectromagnetic fields represented onthe earth plane as individual human beings, some good andsome bad. The Luke Short connection had demonstrated tome that while I considered myself an enlightened being Iwas forced to confront a lifetime where my soul hadmanifested a really nasty sort of guy.

When Jesus proclaimed the brotherhood of all men and thathe died for the sins of man, I believe he died knowing thathis very own soul was simultaneously projecting thieves,adulterers, murderers, mothers, saints, and all forms of

143

human beings. He died for the sins of those with his soulfamily that had yet to tap soul consciousness and everlastingconscious life, and the power of the soul.

Was Adolf Hitler aware of such potential power? Are modernday fascists still searching for such power? Do we care? Ifyou were heir to a vast fortune and someone kept thatinformation from you, would you care? By keeping secretNew and Ancient Knowledge concerning psychic potential ofevery individuals, are the Freemasons, Prieure de Sion,Hitler's Nazis and the United States Government stealingyour rightful inheritance?

If there is such a thing as a bioelectromagnetic field at theroot over every person, can it be disrupted by a psychicdevice? Consider a group able to fine tune such a device toeradicate those humans operating in frequencies consideredundesirable. Suppose the mentally ill have similar bioelectro-magnetic fields and someone decides they should simplydisappear. Or maybe all Jews carry a similar genetic imprintof psychic potential threatening to evolve into superbeingsand should be destroyed. Perhaps the aging process is dueto changes in bioelectromagnetic fields of all people over acertain age who are considered drains upon the State, andmaybe drug addicts would be the next to go followed byhomosexuals and so on and so on until a perfect humanpopulation was obtained.

Yes they have or are trying to develop such weapons ofmass destruction and control. Beyond that, they are strivingfor mind control. In the same way a radio, television, or radarsignal can be jammed by a more powerful signal operating inthe same frequency, a psychic device could be developedcapable of muddling your ability to even think logically or tothink independently. Imagine satellites stationed above Earthradiating signals harmful to the very process of thought itself.

So in answer to my question concerning whether it matteredthat a US President, Catholic Pope, and Soviet Premierhoping to make some changes were stopped, I will say YES.Read again Pope John XXIII's words of hope for peace andprosperity for all and imagine a world built in his vision. Inthat world children would stop starving to death, the oldwould not fear death, the poor would not exist, terrorists and

144

soldiers would have no role in life and you and I would knowthe true meaning behind the phrase "the Brotherhood ofMan".

In the end I have succumbed to the facts as they werefound, concluding my enemy is ignorance in any and allforms and that the Vatican, Freemasons, Prieure de Sion,Nazis and others have spent enormous energy keepingmankind ignorant of the rules of Cosmic Reality:

1. Reality is what we think it is.2. Majority rules.3. Those who are in positions of power will keepeveryone else from knowing the first two rules ofCosmic Reality.4. Success lies in the being not in the doing.5. Chance is a pseudonym for thought."6. You are not alone.7. Everything that exists is linked to everything that exits.8. There are a finite number of souls.9. The goal of living is to tap into the conscious mind ofthe soul.10. To access the conscious mind of your soul changeyour bioelectromagnetic field.11. To change your bioelectromagnetic field, changeyour way of thinking.

Ancient Egyptians believed in "thought forms". Their priestsused dedicated minds to put forth specific thoughts whichbecame energy forms with their own destinies. Thoughtforms were projected to protect the pyramids and the deathrate of those first entering the pyramids is impressive.

Jesus thought himself into a resurrection. Hitler thoughthimself into world power and 63 million people died. If webegin to think and then act as if every thought we have is anenergy field projected onto the web of physical reality, wewill begin to change that reality to whatever we wish it to be.If no one could think of war, war could not exist. If we wouldnot allow ourselves to expend energy in the form of thoughtfor hateful, selfish, evil purposes, hate and evil would soonfade away. We are what we think. More importantly physicalreality is a reflection of humanity's sum total of thoughts.

I have briefed you as I would the Army Commander. My goal

145

was to tell you who the enemy is, where he is located, whathe is capable of doing, and what he intends to do. Theenemy is us and we are capable of doing unbelievabledamage to our brethren and our planet. As to our intentions,well that dear reader would lie with you.

Ultimate power rests in every individual thought. If we wishto control our reality we must begin by controlling each andevery thought. Evil does not rest in some dark corner of theworld. Evil rests in the minds that can produce evil thoughts -evil energy.

And thus I will leave you with two last Cosmic Reality Rules.They came from the voice that had touched my life in suchdrastic and intense ways in the past. I have never regrettedfollowing the dictates of a voice that periodically echoes inmy mind from some unseen and mystical source. Perhaps itis the voice of God, an Angel, or Guide. More than likely it isthe voice of my own soul guiding me to accept its existenceand to tap into all that it has learned through innumerablemanifestations of bioelectromagnetic fields, that lived andlearned upon third dimensional Earth as men and women ofall nationalities.

This is the message whispered in my head:

We are what we think.We are capable of our dreams,Limited by our doubts,Crippled by our fears,And we become the "why" of our actions.

And the two new Rules:

Cosmic Rule #12: We are capable of our dreams.

Cosmic Rule #13: Doubt limits us, but fear cripples us.

So here we have the entire list of the Rules of CosmicReality:

1. Reality is what we think it is.2. Majority rules.3. Those who are in positions of power will keepeveryone else from knowing the first two rules ofCosmic Reality.4. Success lies in the being not in the doing.

146

5. Chance is a pseudonym for thought."6. You are not alone.7. Everything that exists is linked to everything that exits.8. There are a finite number of souls.9. The goal of living is to tap into the conscious mind ofthe soul.10. To access the conscious mind of your soul changeyour bioelectromagnetic field.11. To change your bioelectromagnetic field, changeyour way of thinking.12. We are capable of our dreams.13. Doubt limits us, but fear cripples us.

My ardent hope is these Rules of Cosmic Reality can aidyou in becoming empowered. Empowerment will free you tobecome, well simply amazing.

That is how I ended Cosmic Reality in 2003. I put the bookon my website at 21C-online.com. I had already started ajob that still takes up much of my life and allows no time forwriting and the website. From time to time I would check thewebsite to see if it was still up and running. Even thatinteraction ceased in the last couple of years. I had againjoined the “establishment” and struggled to get by. I event-ually forgot the rules of Cosmic Reality.

Then at the beginning of 2010, I received a call from Tracy.She had read the book five years before and wanted to readit again. Tracy’s call led me to find that someone hadhacked into the major Internet Server where 21C-online.comsits and deleted Cosmic Reality. Now that pissed me off.

Tracy thinks things have evolved to the point where morepeople are willing to listen to my story. According to Rule#1, she is right. And after 7 years...I have another chapter towrite. But it is taking me over another year. When I startedresearching I just could not stop. The Internet keeps growingresearch information. It is now April 2012 and I have decidedit is really YOU who needs to do the research.

Every fact I garnered from all those books and printedarticles can be substantiated by thousands of Internetwebsites. All you have to do is Google. If you really want to

147

make the big change, keep reading or watching You Tube.Leaving it up to you.

What you going to do?

The following list contains the primary sources upon which Ibased much of my studies. It is by no mans a completebibliography. I honor those who came before Cosmic Reality.

BEST EVIDENCE Disguise and Deception in theAssassination of John F. Kennedy David S. Lifton;Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc.: New York 1980.

LEGEND: The Secret World of Lee Harvey Oswald EdwardJay Epstein; McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1978.

THE SPEAR OF DESTINY Trevor Ravenscroft; G.P.Putnam's Sons, New York 1973

THE PHILADELPHIA EXPERIMENT: Project Invisibility;William L. Moore; Gosset & Dunlap, New York, 1979

HOLY BLOOD, HOLY GRAIL; Michael Baigent, RichardLeigh, and Henry Lincoln; Delacorte Press; New York 1982

IN GOD'S NAME: An investigation into the murder of PopeJohn Paul I, David A. Yallop; Bantam Books; Toronto, 1984

148

BOOK TWO

Down the Rabbit Hole

1 - The Rest of the Story

2 - The Magic Decade

3 - "The Unaware Are Unaware

They Are Unaware."

4 - Down the Rabbit Hole

5 - What Now?

149

1 - The Rest of the Story

In Book One, I presented a series of researched conclu-sions, on a variety of subjects. The first version, The JohnKennedy - Jesus Christ Connection, was strictly factual andmuch more detailed. I printed out 10 copies as a fortiethbirthday present to myself. Less than 100 people read thatversion. I tried to get it published, but was told it would notbe published in the United States. This was in 1988. Themain reason I did not pursue publishing was the book wasdepressing. It presented a rather scary scenario with nosuggestion on how to change it.

This book, you are now reading, tells the story of how I cameabout concluding that the universe was run by certain rules,which I entitled The Rules of Cosmic Reality. With CosmicReality Rules to give the reader, The John Kennedy - JesusChrist Connection could be used as a tool, in developing anew outlook on life, where personal power could beaccessed. In this second book, I present the story about myexperiences leading to my understanding of Cosmic Reality.

Cosmic Reality - The John Kennedy - Jesus Christ Con-nection was finished in 1993. It presented summarizedfactual data from the first 1988 book and a way to fight back.It is presented under this cover as Book One. This is BookTwo and I am not sure how it will organize and cometogether. I will go over some of the information previouslypresented to expand on certain subjects.

This Book Two will tell stories I would not have included inthe earlier books. My credibility would have come intoquestion. But now all of what I wrote as the release of greatsecrets in 1988 is all over the Internet. If you Google anysubject mentioned in Book One, it is likely you will gethundreds of thousands of websites.

Childhood Memories

150

You know how something makes your mind recall an eventthat happened in your past? When I was a kid, my recol-lections went back to the past too. But often it was a pastfrom another timeframe. I just accepted these memorieswere from past lifetimes. No one ever mentioned that peopledid not live more than one life.

Being the oldest of ten children, who had moved away fromgrandparents and other extended family, there was not anextreme amount of supervision over what was thought.Television did not come into the house until I was nine. Wenever listened to radio. We were encouraged to read. TheCatholic Church never mentioned reincarnation either for oragainst. With no one saying different, I thought everyoneremembered past lifetimes.

Somewhere around age twelve, I came to the realization noone other than myself seemed to remember past lives. Infact, either through look or words, friends and familyindicated there might be something wrong with me, if Ibelieved there was anything more than one chance at life.While deciding my childhood memories were fiction from aninventive mind, I now required some other way of looking atlife.

Catechism classes from the Catholic Church offered asource of accepted knowledge. Unfortunately from layteacher to priest, my constant questions were normallyanswered with some reference to “faith”. With no otherdoctrine being presented, I got behind this Catholicsubmission to Faith and the concept there was only one life.The only way for this one life to end well, was to believe inJesus Christ and follow the Catholic doctrine, confess mysins, do pennants, eat fish on Friday, and go to Mass onSunday. Seemed easy enough. By the time I was eighteen, Iwas a very good Catholic.

Teenage Memories

Age 18 was when I was working a summer job at EmpireLaundry. The laundry washed work pants and shirts, ironedand folded them, and returned them to those businessesrenting the clothing. Most of the dozen workers had beenthere for years. The only other person around my age wasAggie Parquett. She was my work friend.

151

We were at a pizza shop when she told me the story of aghost house her family had lived in for over four years. Itwas on a farm outside Webster, Massachusetts, the townwhere the laundry was located. She never would tell meexactly where. Aggie considered it too dangerous a place.

All afternoon, while digesting pizza, I replayed the tale Aggiehad related. Just before four o’clock when we got off, I calledAggie’s sister. Mary had also worked at the laundry, but hadfound a better job. I told her I would pick her up, after work,and take her home. She was to tell me the same story Aggiehad spun.

That night I met Mrs. Parquett their mother. She invited meto dinner. That gave me the opportunity to question bothMary and Aggie further. But after dinner, Mrs. Parquett tookme aside and told me more. The following is a summation oftheir stories.

Aggie was the oldest, followed by a bother Joe, Mary, andAnnie. In addition to the kids, Mrs. Parquett’s husband andmother moved into the wooden farmhouse. You had to drivedown a dirt road, which ended in a forest enclosed meadow,with the house in the middle. There was a stream on oneside which emptied into a small pond, not far from the house.The entire farm was surrounded by trees that had taken overthe ancient farm fields, decades before.

Everything went well for the first couple years. Then Mr.Parquett decided to dig the cellar deeper, to make abasement room. He uncovered a skeleton. He decided tojust cover it back up and think about what to do. It wasobvious the disintegrating bones had been there for a longtime. There did not seem to be a reason to hurry notifyingthe authorities. That was when things got weird. He neverdid report his find to the authorities and the cellar was neverrenovated.

Strange sounds had always been detected; now they gotlouder and more frequent. It was like the wind carried thesound of people talking and chanting. And glimpses ofmovements of figures could be detected out of the corner ofeyes, night or day, inside or out. But when one lookeddirectly toward the object, nothing could be seen. Andsearching, as they periodically did, produced no source for

152

the disembodied voices.

The problem with automobiles began. Friends driving downthe dirt road often found their cars would just stop runningupon entering the valley. Some got to the front of the houseonly to be unable to restart the car. Minutes later, the carswould be perfectly alright.

Inside the house the telephone started acting up. The ringingphone would be answered but the ringing would continue.Often the dial tone could be heard instead of a voice. Nearthe end, Mrs. Parquett got so irate she actually cut thephone line. The phone continued ringing.

After hearing Mary, Abbie, and Annie discuss the morehorrifying events that were to come, I asked Mrs. Parquettwhy the family continued to stay in a house that was tobecome dangerous. She explained that her husband wasnot working and they had no money with which to move. Shealso believed something was oppressing the family’s abilityto think correctly.

Mrs. Parquett described a feeling of just living in the momentand blocking out thoughts and fears. Strange thingshappened without explanation and without the attempt toexplain. “We just did not think about what was happening,”she explained.

Father Parquett finally left. The weird happenings at the farmand the divorce forced the older kids to get jobs and movewith their mother into a small, two bedroom apartment. Theyhad been living there for six months when I had dinner withthem.

Mrs. Parquett’s mother had died the year before. Mrs.Parquett seemed to feel a sense of guilt in not movingsooner. As her mother’s health began failing, they believedher mind was also sick. It was only after Grandmother died,that the others began seeing movements and figuresGrandmother had called “ghosts”. “My mother was the first toactually see figures. She also saw images on the wall that Icould not see, like chains and tombstones and faces. I don’tknow if they were real too. She kept seeing a young girlcome into her room with a tray. Mom claimed it was Abbietrying to poison her. I don’t know why she thought that. Inever told the kids about what Mom was seeing. And she

153

claimed she could hear moaning in the night, coming fromthe cellar stairwell, which was on the opposite side of herbedroom wall.”

The cellar stairwell led down to the shallow grave. Mary wasthe one to notice the hole in the wall. There were shelvesalong the top of the stairwell that acted like a pantry. Marywas retrieving a can of food when she saw a shaft of light.She realized it was hole through the wall and the kitchencould be seen on the other side. The spooky thing was thekitchen was vastly different. Instead of linoleum tile on thefloor, there were wood planks. The wall paper was gone,also replaced by wood. The kitchen furnishings werereplaced, including the refrigerator and stove. Everythingseen through the hole looked decades older.

As impossible was the collapsing air-shaft. Between theupstairs and lower floor was a structure in the walls to allowair to flow between the two floors. Since moving in, Joewould climb into the upper wall opening and slide down andthrough the wall opening on the ground floor. On one slide,the wall seemed to collapse around him trapping him. Hissisters claimed there was no way he had just gotten too bigfor the stunt. They had also used the slide and knew it wasway big enough to let someone much bigger than Joe toslide down unimpeded. The sisters believed the house had“grabbed” their brother. The wall had to be taken down to getJoe out.

Perhaps the belief in the “doings of the house” was not soirrational, in light of the water problem. On more than oneoccasion, a thick, red liquid came out of the kitchen faucet.While not having it analyzed, everyone claimed it looked justlike blood. They would run the faucet until the water cameback. One day it took over two hours.

One night the family was watching television, when they sawa cigaret burning outside the window. When Joe opened thedoor and looked out on the porch where the smoker shouldhave been standing, he saw nothing. “Can you still see it?”He asked his sisters. They could, yet he could see no one.He was back inside looking at, it when it disappeared.

Mary looked out the upper window from her bedroom. Shesaw the lights of a car coming down the driveway. It was her

154

boyfriend’s. Excitedly watching, she saw Annie get out of thepassenger side. Then Annie got back into the car and theydrove away. Hours later, Mary was furious when her sisterfinally did come home. Abbie had picked her up. Initially,Annie denied being with the boyfriend. But, when Maryclaimed to have seen them together, Annie confessed that,at the time Mary had seen the car drive down to the front ofthe house, her sister was with the boyfriend, Annie had runinto at a local bar. But she had not been in his car.

The most frightening event also involved Mary. She awokefrom sleep feeling hands around her throat. Wide awake,she was presented with the vision of one hand having a ringaround a finger. But the hands did not seem to belong to thecloaked figure standing beside the bed. Mary realized shecould well be dying, when the bedroom light came on, in aburst that broke the darkness and the strangling hands andvision of the classical rendition of Death. Annie was standingin the doorway with her hand still over the light switch. Shesaid, “I don’t think I woke up until that light went on. I had noidea why I was there.”

This is the story as I remember it. I was impressed with thefact that four people all confirmed the same events. While Ihad never considered the existence of ghost or events ofsuch strangeness, I knew this family believed what theywere saying was all true. But it had not ended.

The near strangling of Mary was the last event at thefarmhouse. But a few weeks after hearing the story for thefirst time, I was stunned by Mary’s and Aggie’s relating of anevent that happened the night before, in the new home - theapartment. Mary had seen a figure at the end of the hall.Aggie had found the pajamas Mary had been wearing whenshe was nearly strangled. They had thrown them away thatnight, as they had been soiled as Mary had neared death.

A few weeks later I left home for college. The next time I sawthe Parquetts was at their Mother’s funeral during theChristmas holiday. I had no idea their Mom was so sick. Noone had mentioned Mrs. Parquett had been fighting cancerfor many years. I saw Aggie and Annie at the funeral home.Mary and I took a ride where she told me the story.

Mrs. Parquett got real sick fast. She was in the hospital for

155

three days and was stable. It was Christmas Eve and theyhad just finished dinner. There was three distinct knocks atthe front door. Aggie opened the door and there was no onethere. She looked down into the freshly fallen snow andcould see no footprints. She turned around and looked ather two sisters. She said nothing. Somehow all three knewthe knocks had been their Mom’s way of saying goodby. Thephone rang soon after, announcing the passing of a veryspecial woman.

I had met Mrs. Parquett only that one time, when she askedme to dinner. For some reason, she took me aside andexpanded my understanding of the haunted farm. And shetold me some other things. I don’t think even she knew whyshe made me her confidant. But she did. She told me aboutthe Anti-Christ and the small green men. I could have writtenthe entire family off as delusional. But while I had not knownof ghosts or the Anti-Christ, I had heard about the greenmen.

Mrs. Waldron taught me Freshman English. She was aspecial teacher, instilling creativity by a willingness to gooutside the bounds of accepted concepts. When Billiesuggested the debate be about flying saucers, Mrs. Waldronsaid, “Why not. Anyone willing to debate for the existence offlying saucers?” My hand went up when no one elsevolunteered. I liked Mrs. Waldron, who was a friend of myMom. And that is when I began studying the possibility thatEarth could have been visited by beings outside the planet.

The facts indicate Earth has been visited, even in BiblicalTimes. You just have to ask the question and take a look foryour selves. Just ask everyone you know. Bet you will hearsome stories. If someone did not see something, someoneheard about someone who had an encounter of one sort oranother. Even the movie “ET” is suppose to be based on areal event, when space crafts crashed over Roswell, NewMexico and one extraterrestrial (or ET) survived for sometime.

While I became a believer and won the Freshman Englishdebate, I had not personally known anyone who had seenanything remotely like a flying saucer. Mrs. Parquett claimedthat in the 1950's there had been many such sightings in the

156

Massachusetts-Connecticut area. In fact, she claims herbrother ran over a small being, with a strong green tint to itsskin. The automobile killed the creature. Her brother pulledthe body over to the side of the road and drove on, thinkingof it like an animal not a human.

I never added this story about a run over ET to my list offlying saucer stories. This story was just too weird. Besides,there were other green men stories from the many books Ihad read since Freshman English. I liked to entertain peoplewith my repertoire of flying saucer story telling.

College Memories

It was my Freshman year at the University of Massa-chusetts, Amherst, in the Berkshire Mountain area in thewestern part of the state. I was living in a small dormitory,which was in a complex of five floor buildings and four 22floor towers. In the middle of this tiny city was a two storydinning hall. My dormitory room was just across from thisdinning facility.

My next door neighbors were Little Nancy and Big Nancy.We had spent the early evening with my spinning tales aboutflying saucers and strange humanoid beings associated withthem. We had then parted for hours of study. It was almost 2AM when I walked through their open door to say good night.Big Nancy was already on the top bunk of the bed that wasperpendicular to the large window. A curtain was closed, butfrom the corner of the curtain that did not completely seal offthe window Big Nancy could see into the courtyard and thedinning hall.

Little Nancy and I were chit-chatting when Big Nancy said,“You guys are not going to believe this, but there is a flyingsaucer out there.”

Well, of course I did not believe this. Howeve I stuck myhead around the curtain and took a look. The next thing Iknew, I was swearing and screaming, “Look at that *&^%$#@ thing.”

Little Nancy jumped up and joined me. She said nothing. Ikept screaming. Flying low was a saucer shaped thing withred light surrounding its circumference, like a lighted beltaround a belly. It kept coming, I kept screaming, and soon it

157

was just over the dinning facility and moving slowly righttoward the window we were looking out. I think it could haveflown right into the dormitory and none of us would havemoved. I’m not sure we could move. It was such a startlingsight, such an out-of-world event that, my mind did not seemcapable of thought or even fear. Suddenly the flying vehiclejust accelerated up and to the right. In an instant, it wasgone.

A few weeks later, around 11:30 PM, I was sitting in thestudy-lounge with my friend Barbara and some others.Turning to her I said, “I feel funny.”

“What do you mean?”

“I feel funny...and I have felt this way before.”

“When, what?”

I searched my mind for a hint of the source for this oddfeeling and when I had felt it before. Then I remembered thatjust before seeing the flying saucer I had this same feeling.While walking down the hall from the study-lounge to myroom, I had felt this same way. In passing the two Nancy’sopen door, I had walked in to say goodnight. “It was thenight of the flying saucer,” I said.

I was filled with this need to go outside and look for thesaucer. I just knew it was there and in which part of the sky itcould be seen. Moments later, I had run down the stairs andwas in the courtyard looking at the bright light in the sky.

Barbara had followed me. She and I questioned the sourceof the light. Then I said, “Go right,” and the light moved toour right. “Up,” I commanded and the light obeyed. We nevertalked about this happening and I have no memory of goingup to my room. I just do not remember anything other than alight in the sky moving to my commands.

The next episode happened when a group of us walkedacross campus to see a movie. It was a wide field we werecrossing with three others in front of myself and Barbara.Again the sighting was preceded by that odd, nervousfeeling. “I feel it again,” I said to Barbara, while turning tolook over my left shoulder. After turning around, I imme-diately stopped. There was just nothing to say. Although itwas night, the silvery flying vehicle was clearly visible and as

158

big as a house.

Within a moment it had flown directly overhead. An instantlater it overtook the three leading members of our group.They stopped, startled, looking up at the silent image in thesky quickly flying away at a very low altitude.

It suddenly altered its course and took a drastic right turn tothe south, moving toward the town of Amherst. We allsilently watched as it took another drastic right-hand changeof course and moved westward. It stopped and hovered untilthe second vehicle came up from the ground. The big craftwas a shimmering, luminescent silver. The smaller vehiclewas identical to the red lighted saucer, seen that first night. Ithad come up from the ground and, sort of, merged with thehoovering silver vehicle.

From the south came the lights of an aircraft moving quicklytoward the silver saucer. When the smaller vehicle hadmerged, it continued to hoover, until the lights of what Ibelieved was a military jet was almost on top of it. A momentlater and it was just gone.

By this time Freshman year had run into the Holiday Seasonand I got a ride back home with a schoolmate who’s familylived in the next town. We had not gone very far in our hour-plus drive when I saw the red light. I had that feeling. Ipointed it out to him. I also pointed it out to my family aftergetting home. It was in the same area of the sky. Maybe itwas just a planet or something, but I did not think so.

A few weeks after returning to school the most spectacularsighting happened. It was dusk and we had just returnedfrom dinner. We were in Barbara’s dormitory room, locatedon the fourth floor, directly over the two Nancy’s room. Therewere again, five witnesses. One was looking out and said,“Star light, star bright, first star I see to night. What the hell isthat?”

We joined her at the window and looked at the large,diamond light source sitting in the darkening sky. Someonesuggested it was helicopter and that would fit the picture.The light began turning and then moving toward us. It was tofly between our dormitory and the dinning hall, directlybetween two towers that stretched to 22 floors. It was at thefifteenth floor height, because people on that floor were on

159

the balconies of both towers when it silently flew by. Theysaid they could have reached out to touch it, if they couldhave moved.

It was colored the blue you see on some guns. It had shortwings jutting out of the tubular body, which appeared to havewindows along the sides. While not hearing anything, I kindof sensed a humming. I did not have that odd feeling, eitherbefore, during, or after.

One aspect to these sightings is the failure of myself orthose who were sharing the event to talk about thehappening. I do not remember us sitting around talkingabout what we had seen. Maybe we did, but I do notremember it.

A couple of weeks later, Barbara came to show me aclipping from the Buffalo paper, her boyfriend had sent withhis latest letter. While we had seen and heard nothing inMassachusetts, the flying saucer sighting had made the frontpage of the Buffalo, New York newspaper.

The article explained how over 600 students had seen anunidentified flying object flying over the University ofMassachusetts. Turns out the University was under radarsurveillance from Westover Air Force Base in nearbySpringfield. According to the Buffalo paper, the Air Forcesaid, “There was no conventional aircraft in the area at thetime of the University sightings.” The sighting was an official“unidentified flying object event”.

The last sighting came while I was walking alone to theCampus Library. I had the feeling, saw the light and enteredthe building of books. I was studying an entry in theCatalogue of Periodical Publications. I had a feeling, lookedup, and stared into the eyes of a stranger walking towardme. In that brief encounter, I felt she knew everything aboutme, every thought, every word, every deed. She passed by,I looked down, and immediately looked in the direction shehad been walking. No one was there.

On the way back to the dormitory I felt overwhelmed. Schoolwas not going well. It was much more demanding than HighSchool. I was struggling. But there was more. College wasforcing me to confront reality that I had been taught was real.My belief in the American way was coming under attack from

160

many sides, on many fronts. It was the Sixties after all. Andmy History courses had introduced me to an expanded viewof the Catholic Church and its Popes.

A church built by men of the historic Catholic power couldnot have built a good church. The Catholic Church was apolitical entity that used “Faith” as a way of controlling thecongregation. Its Popes had committed unbelievable sins.Like a house of cards, a religious belief built upon faith is avery weak thing.

The Unidentified Flying Objects was just one too manyconsiderations. And now there was that strange, all knowinggirl in the library. I spoke to my silent and invisiblecompanions, demanding they just leave me alone. They didexactly as I had asked. It was the end of the sightings inMassachusetts.

What I learned from my studies on flying objects and extra-terrestrials was there was a tremendous amount of storiesand a substantial amount of hard physical evidence andverifiable sightings. My own experiences confirmed my beliefin the existence of beneficial extraterrestrial visitations. I didnot believe in bad ET’s. It would be another two decadesbefore I would again encounter extraterrestrials and changemy mind about bad ET’s.

What is Reality?

My introduction into the realities of the 1960's and a collegeenvironment full of alternative thoughts made me questionvirtually every aspect of my up bring from religion to politics.The story of the haunted farm had led me to study thephenomena of ghosts and other aspects of the “OccultSciences”. “Occult”, by the way, means “secret”. In thesixties that is the term used for a compilation of unexplainedphenomena: Occult Sciences. By the 1990's the same thingswere being called New Age Science. By whatever name,the Parquett family had led me to an awareness of life beingmuch more complex than taught to American children.College was teaching life in America was not the perfecthaven for justice and freedom that our parents, teachers,and political leaders would have us believe.

All in all, I really got to the point that I did not have thefaintest clue as to what was real and what was illusion. One

161

day I could not decide whether to get out of bed or not.When I finally forced myself to get up, I could not decidewhat to wear. I went back to bed for days. In the end, Iunderstood it. There was nothing to believe in beyond myown experiences. I decided not to decide on what was rightor wrong, good or bad, true or false. I would put everythinginto the “consideration bin”.

Belief, Knowing and Faith

I also took a hard look at certain words and concepts: faith,belief, knowing. In the end I settled on the followingdefinitions, because they worked for me. “Belief” is the resultof learning certain facts or theories that appear to mean acertain thing. “Knowing” is when experience confirms thebelief. “Faith” is a working way of getting through life whenyou are just not sure about what you believe or know.

The third thing I realized as a Freshman was there was onlyone person who would know every thought and action Iwould make in my life. That person was myself. I have keptthat point of view for most of my life: my best friend is myself.I try to advise myself as I would a best friend. And, yes, I talkto myself.

The next year was when Barbara, myself and others beganexperimenting with telepathy. It was also the time when myfile on the John Kennedy Assassination was taken by agentsunknown. I continued to struggle as a Physical Educationstudent, while excelling in other courses including those inthe History Department. By my Junior year I switched mycollege major to that of History. Having made the decisionafter the school year began, I ended up with two classes onSoviet History and Soviet Society. This led me to focus mystudies on the Soviet Union, its history, culture, society,economy, and politics. This background led me to thehighest echelons of the United States Intelligence Com-munity.

Minerals and Energy

As an Electronic Warfare expert with the U.S. Army, theworld took on a new look. I started thinking in terms of theelectro-magnetic universe. It was not until the late 1980'sthat I took my knowledge of an electronic-magnetic scienceto the next level.

162

It started with my next door neighbor Sandi’s gift of anamethyst crystal pendant in 1988. After a few days ofwearing it, I noticed a whole list of things I began feeling. Ifound a book on crystal energy and began a long journeyinto the New Age. In that first book, the author listed affectscrystals can have on humans. It matched my list, line forline. Sandi’s crystal was acting upon my electromagneticfield. Amazing concept that I had to accept because I hadexperienced the effect. I knew the crystal had a power overme. The search became one of finding the scientificexplanation, in order to develop a basis of belief.

The following is a summation of what I discovered, basedupon information compiled from 1988-1990. It is informationthat will allow you to understand the basis of certain eventsthat came about in the 1990's. This same information wassummarized in Book One, but it might be good to just reviewit all.

“The Future of Medicine: Healing by Energy”1990 Article, by N.l. Hopkins

Experience acquired as a U.S. Army Electronic WarfareOfficer provided an ability to think of electromagnetic energy,fields, waves, and signals as tangible, physical aspects of aphysical universe. On the battlefield energy is used forcommunication, radar detection, weapon guidance, and airtraffic control. An enemy can use those same invisiblesignals to identify, locate, spy-on, and destroy opposingmilitary forces. Energy terminology includes “ElectronicWarfare” and “Electronic Battlefields”.

Vibrational Medicine is a growing field of thought,recognizing human and animal bodies are energybattlefields were energy warfare can fight off attacks byinfections, toxic buildup, trauma, and even aging itself.

This is not a new concept in the Art of Healing. Psychichealers, herbalists, homeopathic doctors, and acupuncturistshave been using energy to heal, for many thousands ofyears. What is new about the subject, is the growing body ofqualitative proof by the orthodox scientific community,concerning numerous claims and aspects of VibrationalMedicine.

163

Every new realization goes through threestages. The first stage, one laughs at a newrealization. The second stage, establishmentwill fight against it. The third stage,everybody wonders why didn’t we have this along time ago. - Schoppenhauer

This human body contains an estimated 200 quintillion cells(200 plus 30's). Each cell contains enough data to fill some1,000 encyclopedia volumes. Each healthy cell is a perfectbalanced electromagnetic universe designed to operate inthe unique energy field of an earth before Thomas Edison.Today, those cells are continually confronting man-madeenergy fields ranging from the coffee maker to the powerlines carrying instantaneous death, from television tocomputer, from microwave stations carrying telephone callsto radar systems guiding airplanes. They have a name for itnow, the call it “electronic smog”. And, electronic smog iscontinually attacking those 200 quintillion cells comprisingyour body.

The government of the United States has taken the positionthat there should be only voluntary standards concerning thegeneration of extraneous electromagnetic energy. Therecommended maximum of 10 milliwatt per squarecentimeter is 1,000 times below the mandatory standards setby the Soviet Union and other Eastern European countriesregarding electromagnetic radiation. After hundreds ofexperiments, the Soviet Union moved out of Shoppenhauer’ssecond stage of fighting the facts. In summary, even minorelectromagnetic fields can cause such things as high bloodpressure, insomnia, headaches, dizziness, nervousness,blood diseases, heart attacks, sexual disturbances and birthdefects.

We are not going to look at the vast data supporting thenegative effects of electromagnetic waves on human health.Our discussion is going to focus on how energy can be usedto maintain health and to heal.

When Einstein presented his “Theory of Relativity” tomankind, he ushered in an entire new era of physics. Thenew physics came to be called Quantum Physics, which wasgiven the awesome task of proving or disproving the concept

164

that matter is energy in relationship to itself. Einsteinclaimed, in essence, that matter is a result of our perceptionof energy in relationship to ourselves. Quantum Physicshas, in fact, proven that there is no matter.

Well how is it, you ask, that you can feel, see, and tastesomething that does not exist. The answer lies in theconcept of “frozen” energy. When you are running alongside another person, you can easily carry on a conversation,as you are both running at the same speed. But supposeyou were standing still and someone ran by you; not muchcan be said. In fact, if that person was running incrediblyfast, you would see nothing but a blur (i.e. Superman). IfSuperman could run at the speed of light, you would seeabsolutely nothing. The only thing we have changed is therelationship of you and the runner’s speed.

The reason we perceive matter to be something solid is thatthere is a similar frequency range between ourselves andthose things comprising the physical universe. We areenergy bodies operating in the frequencies of the physicaluniverse. Everything else in the physical universe isvibrating at essentially the same speed and is, therefore,perceived as being frozen in time and space.

Quantum physics calls the physical universe the PositiveTime-Space Continuum where energy is moving at or belowthe speed of light. Within this universe, the primary energyforce is called electromagnetic energy. Theoretically, therecould be energies operating beyond the speed of light and,therefore, invisible to the physical universe. This is referredto as the Negative Time-Light Continuum.

The key to vibrational medicine lies in accepting themultidimensional anatomy of the human being. Your “space”is not just that contained within your physical body. Inreality, your body is one aspect of a multidimensional entity -it is that aspect operating within the positive space/timecontinuum. The other aspects of your true being lie in thenegative time/space continuum and appear to be invisible tothe physical universe, because they are operating at speedsin excess of the speed of light.

Quantum Physics has proven the existence of faster thanlight energies, by complicated measuring devices analyzing

165

the effects of these invisible energies on the physical plane.We also have been able to surmise the existence of otherenergy bodies within our multidimensional anatomies, byobserving the impact such bodies have upon us. We cannot see or touch the soul with our limited perceptions, butthere are more of us believing in the existence of a soul thanthose who do not.

There is really no one within the physical universe who candefinitively define or number these other dimensional energybodies. We can not judge reality based upon the limitedfrequency range of our physical sense organs (eyes, ears,nose, taste, touch). There are, however, certain subtlebodies which are accepted by metaphysicians. Some subtlebodies are even provable by orthodox science.

The most talked about subtle body is that of the “astral”.This energy body is one that appears able to move outsidethe confines of the physical body to allow “astral projection”.The astral appears to house a conscious awareness whichis taken beyond the physical universe into other dimension,such as occurs in near death experiences. Yet the astralcan perceive the physical universe and move about within it.Many experiments have been conducted proving theexistence of this astral extension of the human being. Infact, many governments have pursued the ability of theastral to invisibly travel to enhance espionage capabilities.This is called “remote viewing”.

The subtle body having the most scientific backup is calledthe “etheric”. The etheric is the subtle body most closelyaligned to the frequency of the physical dimension. In fact,the etheric provides the “energetic blueprint” formulating ourvery bodies. At the cellular level, the etheric and physicalbodies actually share the same cells.

To understand how two separate yet interconnected, energybodies can share the same cells, we can use the televisionas an example. Each television station transmits a signalwhich can be received by your television. All signals arereceived continually and simultaneously. The only thing youchange within the television is the tuner - a device allowingonly one unique frequency to be seen and heard. Yetregardless of which signal is chosen, all the signals are

166

viewed upon the same screen. The screen is a sharedmechanism.

The cells we perceived as being physical, are continuallyand simultaneously shared by both the physical and ethericbodies. And each body has its own frequency peculiarsystems which interface with cells. In the physical bodythere are circulatory, nervous, muscular and other systems.The etheric as has its own unique systems.

The physical body surrounds the cells in fluid containing theability to discover abnormal cells, virus, or bacteria thatshould not be there. Antibodies are sent to fight theseunwanted elements and the immune system is doing its job.

The corresponding etheric system that detects cellabnormalities begins with the ethereal fluidium - a part of theetheric body surrounding every cell. It is surmised theethereal fluidium has that capability of transmitting a warningto the etheric body, when the cells are unbalanced in theirenergies. Instead of sending out “antibodies”, the ethericintensifies its output of “vital energy”, also called the “lifeforce”, to those imbalanced areas. Thus, in an acute state ofillness, the human being is fighting the disease from thephysical side’s immune system and the etheric side’sintensification of nutritive energy. The etheric accomplishesthis by way of two systems: the acupuncture-meridian andthe chakra-nadis systems.

According to the Chinese physicians, some 5,000 years ago,nutritive energy known as “Ch’i” brings life-givingnourishment of a subtle energetic nature, through points onthe skin to an internal system flowing throughout thephysical body. These portals on the skin are called“acupuncture points” or “acupoints”. Each acupoint is thegateway to a pair of meridian circuits. One meridian carriesthe “yang” energy, viewed as the male principle associatedwith creativity and action. The other meridian carries the“yin” or female principle, which is passive and stagnant innature. It is the oscillations between these two oppositeswhich keep an individual balanced within an ever changinguniverse.

167

For every physical body organ, there is a pair of meridianscontrolling the very cells themselves. These meridians canbe thought of as energy circuits looking like miniature duct-like tubular systems. Professor Kim Bong Han of Koreaisolated, identified, and traced the meridians during the1960's by injecting radioactive phosphorus into rabbitacupoints and following the uptake of the substance into therabbit’s organs. Fluid extracted from these tubularstructures revealed high concentrations of a number ofhormonal substances, amino acids, DNA, RNA, and otherbiological elements, at levels far different than nose normallyfound in the bloodstream. Two things were apparent fromKim Bong Han’s work: the meridian system is closed andself-contained and there is an interrelationship between themeridian and other systems within the physical body.

One amazing discovery made by Kim Bong Han was thatmeridian ducts in embryonic chicks were formed withinfifteen hours of conception, long before the mostrudimentary organs. The meridians appear to bringinformation concerning actual development of the embry tothe DNA control centers within the cells. The meridiansystem is, thus, a guidance system interfacing between theetheric body and the cells. In other words, the ethericappears to provide the blueprint for the physical body.

Now you may protest, saying, “If the meridian system can bephysically traced, why does it necessarily belong to theetheric body?”

The answer lies in the very makeup of the acupointsthemselves, which can not be physically measured by canbe traced by changes in the energy patterns and fieldssurrounding them. Electrical resistance in skin overlayingacupoints is lower than surrounding skin by a factor of about10 to 1. It has also been noted that electrical parameters ofacupoints can vary according to emotional, as well asphysiological changes. States such as sleep and hypnosiscan cause significant changes in electrical conductivity ofacupoints compared to when measured in an awake, normalindividual. So while acupoints do not display a physicalidentity, something is obviously influencing those invisiblepoints on the skin.

168

It should be noted that metaphysicians since ancient timeshave said the etheric body exists, have described it, havestated its function. Modern science continued to find exactlywhat was described by metaphysicians every time they takea “scientific” look. Metaphysicians also described anothersystem called the chakra-nadis system. And again, everytime scientist figure a way of taking a scientific look, theyconfirm claims described by metaphysicians from thousandsof years ago.

Yet metaphysicians did not stop with subtle bodies,acupoints, and meridians; they also described anothersystem found within and without the physical body. Thisother system is called the chakra-nadis system. And everytime they can figure out a way to look at this invisible world,the scientists have confirmed metaphysical claims.

“Chakra” is Sanskrit for “wheels” and are seen by psychicsas whirling vortices of energy. While there are some 360chakras within the physical body, primary emphasis is placeon the seven major chakras falling in a virtual line, from thecrown of the head to the base of the spine. The chakra feedfluid-like energy to the physical body by way of 72,000 nadiscircuits - threads of energy being emitted from the chakras.

Based upon the above, it is logical to assume the ethericbody reacts to a diseased or damaged condition within cellsin the following way: The ethereal fluidium surrounding cellschanges or detects changes within the cells. This change isdetected by the nadis circuit which relays the information tothe appropriate chakra. This alerts the etheric body thatthere is a specific problem arising which is handled by anetheric increase in nutritive energy flowing through theacupoint-meridian system to interact and further energizethe ethereal fluidium and the damaged cells.

Thus the physical body is continually being monitored andprovided necessary energy to overcome damaging effects ofemotional depression, physical stress, chemical toxicity,nutritional deficiencies, viral or bacterial infections, andphysical trauma. This perfect scenario predisposes twocritical elements: first, that the etheric body can providenecessary additional nutritive energy; and secondly, that theetheric gets the warning something has gone wrong. This

169

second point is dependent upon the condition of the chakra-nadis system. The first is dependent upon the health of theetheric body itself.

Obviously if there is massive damage to the physical cells,regardless of the health of the etheric body, there may be noway for the etheric to generate sufficient energy to overcomesuch damage. But in a very weakened etheric condition,even small energy requirements can overpower the ethericbody’s defenses. And the etheric body can becomeweakened due to the influences of the other, higherfrequency subtle bodies comprising the humanmultidimensional body.

We have already mentioned the next higher body, the astral,which esoteric literature considers the focus of our sensualappetites, desires, longings, moods, feelings, appetites, andfears. In other words, the astral body has a powerfulconnection with our basic survival and emotional natures.

In a frequency range slightly higher than the astral, is themental body, an extension of our very thoughts. The energyof thought takes form within our aura and effects the astralbody in the form of emotions. Thus what we think has adirect consequence on the astral body, which can furthereffect the etheric and physical bodies. This transference ofenergy from one energy body level to another, is a functionof the chakra system, for there is a chakra present in eachsubtle body.

The chakras are energy vortexes or whirlpools, designed tocreate compatibility between energy levels of the varioussubtle bodies. Thus energy from the mental octave isaltered by chakras to be used at the astral level; the astrallevel energies are transformed into energies compatible withthe etheric body; and the etheric energies are changed to beacceptable to the physical. The reverse energy flow is alsopossible.

Through the chakra transformers, our thoughts and emotionscan impact upon the etheric and physical bodies. Anythingfrom psychological dysfunction to diseases result frommisalignment of the subtle bodies. While toxic and chemicalattacks from the environment can directly attack the physical

170

body causing misalignment, misalignments can also resultfrom thoughts and emotions.

A perfectly health body is in tune with all aspects of itsmultidimensional anatomy. The point of balance is at thechakras, the central points of interface between the subtlebodies. Under duress from physical level elements (virus,trauma, nutritional deficiencies, etc.) there is a shift awayfrom perfect equilibrium; the body begins to vibrate at lessharmonious frequencies. This change in vibration can startin the physical, but will impact upon the subtle bodies.Conversely, problems within other bodies can impact uponthe etheric and eventually result in physical vibrationaloscillations of an unbalanced, destructive nature. The bodybecomes “dis-eased”, out of harmony with its ownmultidimensional nature.

Dr. Ion Dumitrscu, a Rumanian physician, developed “elec-tronography” which utilizes a combination of Kirlianphotographic concepts with computers and scanningelectrodes. Acupoints could be seen to glow brightly alongmeridians associated with diseased organs. The size andbrightness of the acupoints correlated to the disease’sacuteness.

Dr. Hiroshi Motoyam, a Japanese researcher, devised the“Apparatus for Measuring the Functions of the Meridians andCorresponding Internal Organs” or the AMI machine. TheAMI is a computerized diagnostic machine, which sendsdata from the acupoints to a computer for analysis andinterpretation. When there is a marked electrical differencebetween paired meridians, the internal organ is in a state ofunbalance.

The Voll Machine, developed by German physician Dr.Reinhard Voll, examines parameters of individual acupoints.By introduction of electrical voltage to the acupoints, thehealth of the meridian system can be determined by itsability to hole a charge. Voll Machine technology and datahave allowed for diagnostic output; and, the Voll Machinecan determined potential cures for energy imbalances,through analysis based upon the concept of “biologicalresonance”.

171

If you were to open a piano, allowing the strings to be seen,an interesting phenomena happens whenever you hit agiven note. If, for instance, you hit Middle C, all othercorresponding C strings begin to vibrate in unison. Whilethese additional vibrations are not loud enough to be heard,the strings can be seen to vibrate. This is called“sympathetic resonance”, a phenomena that can be seenthroughout nature. For instance, the eardrum resonatessound wave. 69-79% of sounds heard upon the audiblelevel, resonate within the entire bone skeletal system.

Soviet, European, and American scientist have found analarming disturbance to brain waves, endocrine systems,and even reproductive functions. This is a result of lowlevels of electromagnetic impulses creating biologicalresonance within the physical cells. While high levels ofradiation (an atomic bomb) can rip the atoms apart, lowlevels create cellular agitation - or imbalance. Thisimbalance has been demonstrated to actually reverse thenatural spin of human blood, in people suffering fromelectromagnetic pollution. It is interesting to note, in light ofthe growing proliferation of cancer, that cancer patients alsohave blood spinning in a reversed direction, from those ofhealthy individuals.

Assume the cell is already in a state of imbalance. Supposeyou could figure out the exact type of energy required tobring it back to the state of balance and health?

Canadian Dr. Bernard Grad, McGill University, devisedexperiments to analyze psychic healing properties displayedby Hungarian Oscar Estebany. After tests convinced Gradthe healer could influence disease at the cellular state inmice, the doctor devised a series of experiments with plants.He discovered that while psychic Estebany and otherindividual’s having “green thumbs” emitted energyenhancing plant growth, severely depressed people couldinhibit plant growth by their apparent negative energy. So,both positive and negative results could be obtained byhuman energy interaction with plants.

Grad took his studies further. He demonstrated that water insealed containers could be “charged” by humans and thenused on seeds and plants. Water could absorb positive

172

human energy, store the charge, and transfer it to plantsduring watering.

There was more to this article, which we will get into later.What is important here, is the fact that water will hold acharge which can energize the physical body of plants andhumans.

Enerology

The reason we took that detour into an understanding ofenergy fields and bodies, was to provide a foundation uponwhich to understand how crystals can effect the humanbody. When I started wearing the amethyst crystal given tome by Sandi, my energy field was suddenly being FED apowerful energy. On the physical level the new input ofenergy registered as “heat flashes”, nervousness,headaches, inability to fall asleep, and other subtle effects.While this all seems rather negative, I did not believe Sandiwould give me something that was bad for me. Thatprompted my stop at a bookstore for a book on crystals.About this time, Sandi heard there was going to be a Crystaland Mineral Show, at a local mall. We went to our firstencounter with a large amount of minerals.

Technically a crystal is a type of mineral. It is, after all, theMineral Kingdom. As Earth cooled, it turned from a cloud ofrotating gas, to a molten sphere of liquid metals. As thesphere continued to cool, the inner liquid metal was coveredby an outer crust. As the crust became thicker, areas ofmolten metal built up pressure that resulted in a breakout inthe crust where magma flowed to the surface.

In the end was a landscape of hardened mineral andvolcanoes. 75% of the outer crust was silicon-dioxide, thefoundation of clay, sand, and eventually quartz crystals.

The outburst of fire and brimstone from the volcanoesreacted with chemicals to begin building an atmosphere.With an atmosphere, rain became possible. Rain broughtpools of oceans, lakes, streams, rivers, and swamps, wherelife could emerge. The first microscopic forms of life grew onthe silicon-dioxide molecules and adopted the pattern being

173

followed by the silicon-dioxide. That pattern within quartz isidentical to the double helix of DNA.

The Story of Nectar

The concept that everything is energy extends to everythingincluding plants and minerals. When we were living beforeoil and rubber, nothing prevented the soles of our feetconnecting with Mother Earth. Now the soles of our shoesare plastic or rubber acting as a barrier between us and thevast energies of the planet. The vast healing energies of theplanet.

Modern scientific inquiry has determined that every mineralemits a specific frequency of energy that affects the energybodies making up the etheric body. If there is a physicaldisease it is simply a manifestation of something that is outof balance. The problem is not with the physical cells; it isthat the energy system behind the physical cells are out ofbalance. By subjecting the energy bodies with mineralenergy that will correct the imbalance, the physicalmanifestation of the imbalance will heal.

While wearing a ruby ring will provide energies healing to theheart, another method of providing the body with mineralenergies comes from “gem elixirs”. Gem elixirs are made bysoaking various minerals in water until the energy of themineral is contained in the water. While it is perfectly safeand reasonable to drink this water when it is fresh, it doesnot have to be ingested. Mineral baths are healing justbecause one is being immersed in the energies. Contactwith an energy field causes all other energy fields to“resonate”. If you hit the Middle C of a piano, all the other Cstrings will begin to vibrate or resonate.

In the 1990's I and others began studying gem elixirs andthen experimenting with them. In the end we had a gallon ofwater that had over a dozen mineral energies added to it.Through a process first discovered by Einstein, we wereable to stabilize the elixir preventing it from deteriorating.After over 20 years the gallon of water is still crystal clear. Itis like a battery full of healing energies.

Because of the concept of resonance that gallon has beenused to charge talc powder. The molecular configuration of

174

talc allows it to also act like a battery entrapping theenergies. When the talc is added to water the water beginsvibrating through resonance.

As water is the main ingredient in foam, we had a companythat makes foam for the inside of shoes make a batch usingwater energized by what we had begun calling NectarPowder. After having a stack of these inner soles, we tookthem for testing. A fully accredited doctor did stress testingon patients who had just arrived at his office. Everyoneshowed high levels of stress from driving to the office andjust the fact they were at the doctor’s office. He found thatwithin 4 minutes of the patient putting the foam insert intotheir shoes they were stress free.

The foam insoles were also tested at the FloridaInternational University Sports Laboratory. Athletes wereput through a series of tests. The testing was done againwith the insoles in their shoes. The results were a dramaticimprovement in their overall ability to perform. The shoemaker Nike spent a year testing and had the same results.

However the person who was driving the attempt at sellingthe Nectar Powder was on the shifty side and was trying torip the rest of us off. Because he would not come forguidance and could not explain the scientific reasons for thesports enhancement aspects, Nike did not know how tomarket the product. They went with Air Jordan. We did noteven find out about this until a year after he had failed andthat was only because his wife had gotten smart anddivorced him and then ratted him out.

We have never tried to sell Nectar Powder but we havegiven it away. It has made dramatic improvements in thehealth of people and many animals.

By using aloe vera (99.9% water) in its gel form with a touchof Nectar Powder mixed in, a powerful balanced energy fieldis created. This gel can be used on the soles of the feetwhere the acupoint system can be directly accessed (SeeReflexology) for a general healing. Or in the case of arthritisor other specific, accessible areas, you can rub it over thedamaged area. If there is not immediate relief, we havefound putting it on 3 times in ten minutes often works (we

175

think it is like a battering ram where the 3 strikes breaks upthe pain and inflamation).

I am not trying to sell you on Nectar. I am trying to make youenvision natural mineral energy being as integral to yourexistence as Mother Earth. And this is because you arereally a complicated multi-faceted energy being.

This concept of energy as the blueprint for everythingextends beyond the layers of energy bodies comprising you.It extends to absolutely everything.

The Earth Energy Grid

One of the things that I found in researching the UFOphenomena was the description of the flight paths oftencorresponded to what I had personally seen. The craft thatflew over the field at the University had made 90 degreeturns. It made me wonder if the craft were somehow usingthe Earth Grid to operate. Someone else had compiled amap of UFO sightings and noticed the sightings seemed tofall in clusters or along certain lines.

There is a massive amount of information regarding thisphenomena. The grid system has been charted and variousexplanations of what it is offered. It certainly could be acomplex electromagnetic energy system created by thespinning of the planet. Aircraft could be using the grid forpropulsion. To me the grid system is equivalent to theChakra-Meridian-Nadis systems in the human body. It is theenergetic grid system that is the blueprint for “Gaia” - thespiritual entity we call Earth.

How I came to this conclusion was due to an acre of land inSouth Florida, 3 miles from the Atlantic Ocean. It was 1985and on a whim we went down 8th Avenue and saw a housefor sale or rent. The friend in the car eventually convincedme we should go in together to buy this very large andinexpensive property.

So here is this small house sitting on an acre of land forsale. But the insane thing was they only wanted $50,000.Some Columbian developers had bought the property todevelop it, assuming they could also buy the adjacentproperty. But before they could pull this off, the Columbian

176

economy crashed and they had to pull out. Thus the smallprice.

The friend pulled out after the paperwork had been filed. Iwas using the Veteran Loan thing. I was not financiallyqualified. 11 days later the US economy started tanking andthe interest rates crashed to a point I could qualify. Thehouse would not pass a VA inspection. I took a chance andrented it to be able to get it up to code on my own moneyand hard work. In 1986 I bought the place. But that is onlybecause the inspector saw a concrete block house insteadof the stucco wood frame the house is constructed of. How aprofessional appraiser did that is, well magical. Actuallyevery aspect of obtaining this property was magical like itwas suppose to happen.

Bit by bit the magical beings and power centers on theproperty became identified. This is a wild story but thebottom line is I am only the caretaker of one of the mostpowerful points on the planet.

177

2 - The Magic Decade

In 1978 I had taken a job as a maintenance engineer at a520 unit condominium right on the Atlantic Ocean in SouthFlorida. It was the night shift and I spent the next 25 yearsseeing the sun rise over the ocean. As I only had to be thereto make sure all systems (water, hot water, gas, electric)were working and to help out if a tenant had a night timeproblem, most of the time I just read and wrote.

In 1991 a store opened up that catered to customersinterested in books and classes on metaphysics and NewAge thought. A vast new source of reading material andreally out there kind of people giving classes opened awhole new area of knowledge. My next door neighbor andbest friend Sandi and I began going to classes, hanging outwith people making their living being psychics and readingbooks on subjects that were way outside the mainstream.

Impact Point

One day I was telling Sandi about aguy named Billy Meier who claimedto be in touch with extraterrestrialsand had hundreds of photographs ofspacecraft. I mentioned that he saidthe craft could change trees into sap-lings so they could land in a forest.This image caused Sandi to recall anepisode she had completely forgottenabout.

Sandi was a young teenager hikingby herself in the Berkshire Mountains

Billy Meier

178

of Massachusetts where she lived. As she came up over aridge, she was seeing sky where there should have beentrees. At the top of the ridge she looked down and saw around silver vehicle with some small people around it. Asmuch as I prodded her, there was nothing more sheremembered. Sandi said, “The trees in a rather large areahad all been shrunk to small trees.”

As soon as I heard that and focused on the image, I felt as ifI was transported back into time. I was in my grandmother’sarms and she was standing in front of a tall, black, wroughtiron fence that surrounded the town’s water supply. Behindthe fence was a small pond that was spring fed, very deepand FED the water needs of the neighborhood. Beyond thepond was a forest. On that day trees had been shrunk.

I need to stop here and give a background note. When I wasin my twenties I asked my mom about the scar I had on myforehead right in the center. Mom proceeded to tell me thestory about how I got that scar. She said her mother hadtaken me as a three year old on a walk. Supposedly I hadfallen into the wrought iron fence at the waterworks and cutmy head. Grandma ran home and virtually threw me at thefirst adult she encountered. I was still bleeding.

Now you would think that a woman who had six kids of herown would be use to cuts and blood. You would not thinkshe would spend the next three days locked in her bedroom.My mom was completely baffled by Grandma’s apparentbreakdown. Mom said Grandma would never talk about theincident. But it did leave a scar on my forehead – right abovethe area metaphysicians say the Third Eye exists. The ThirdEye, is considered to be the pineal gland and is consideredby some as a gateway leading to higher consciousness.

Okay back to the waterworks. The trees were shrunk.Grandma was immobile as I stared at the saucer shapedvehicle hovering inside the hollowed out forest. A whitebeam took me out of her arms and into the vehicle. I clearlyrecalled this even though I was only three years old.

The next images are of a white haired man who made mefeel very loved. I was also thinking like an adult as heshowed me around the vehicle explaining all sorts of things.

179

I do not remember details. I do not have any concept of howmuch time passed. Finally he told me they were going tosend me back to Grandma but they were going to make aslight cut on my forehead. I knew they had already donesomething to my forehead (don’t know what) and asked himwhy it was necessary to do more.

He told me they needed an impact point. He explained thatsomewhere in the future I would remember my visit with him.“When you remember how you got the scar on yourforehead, you will remember the rest.” And I did rememberthe visit with him, but I still don’t have a clue about what hetold me.

A couple of nights later, Sandi and I attended a presentationby a woman who was highly respected as a psychic. Duringthis event, she looked at me and asked, “What happened toyou when you were 3 years old?”

Sandi and I looked at each other in amazement. “Well,” Isaid, “I was beamed aboard a spacecraft.” She oddly did notask for further clarification but went on with her talk. Whenshe finished she asked me if I would meet with her thefollowing day.

The next day I did ask for clarification. I told her the storyand then she told me one. She asked if I was familiar withBilly Meier. When I confirmed I was, she asked, “And youknow he has a stack of photographs that he has taken ofextraterrestrial vehicles?”

She then told me about her first introduction to Meier in themid 1970’s. She had been in Colorado participating in someevent when a man gave her a briefcase. He had a foreignaccent and asked her to get the briefcase to someone inAmerica who might be able to do something with what wasinside. He told her they were original photographs of UFOstaken by a man from Switzerland by the name of Meier.Before she could even look at what was inside the briefcase,the briefcase was stolen from her hotel room.

When she was telling me this story almost 20 years later,she seemed to be still scared. She had returned to the hotelroom, put the briefcase on the bed and gone to take ashower. When she got out of the bathroom she realized the

180

briefcase was gone. It had not been in her possession formore than a couple of hours. It is this story that makes mebelieve Billy Meier is in fact legitimate, despite attempts todiscredit him.

Why she made the connection between Meier and myselfhad to do with psychic information she had received whenshe asked about what happened to me at the age of three.Meier claimed the extraterrestrials he was communicatingwith were from the Pleiades star system. Years later I alsocame to believe my space friends were Peiadians.

Mayan Black Cube

The Pleiades are commonly known as the “Seven Sisters”.This star cluster is easily detected by the naked eyebecause 7 of the stars are extremely bright. There are manyothers who believe Pleiadians have and/or are visiting Earthand most accounts have them being a peaceful and lovingrace desiring only to assist Earth.

Some months after this encounter, the owner of the NewAge shop was having a friend come to visit. As I lived aloneshe asked me if I could put her up for a few weeks. Thefriend Brenda was one of the first to establish a psychictelephone company and was considering a relocation toSouth Florida. We hit it off immediately.

A few days into her stay, Brenda took out a collection ofcrystals she carried with her. The most interesting thing inthe collection was not a crystal. It was a square, black rockabout and inch and a half on each side. She told thefollowing story before handing it to me.

Brenda was living in Atlanta, Georgia. A female friend ofhers had recently moved back to Atlanta from somewhere upNorth. The friend had been given the black square becauseone of her boy friends could not handle the energy. He hadpicked it up from the ground while visiting a Mayan temple inMexico. He felt guilty because all the tourists were instructednot to take anything from the area. But he also felt the stonewas not his to keep. So he gives it to Brenda’s friend whowas about to move.

The friend put it in the box with all of her other collections ofrocks and crystals. Months after the move, the friend

181

unpacked the box and found all the crystals and rocks wereshattered except for the black square. Totally freaked outshe asked Brenda to take it.

Brenda had received the square only the week before. Whenshe handed it to me I went through some massive change. Ifelt like I was mentally connected to some other mind andbegan following the directions that were flooding my mind.Brenda who was a very powerful psychic realized she hadalso fallen under some power that was also talking in herhead. We started collecting crystals and minerals (I had alarge collection) which we took outside and placed in a largepattern on the ground.

I managed to telephone Sandi to come over as we weredoing something very ceremonial and to bring whatever shefelt like bringing (Sandi had an even bigger collection ofcrystals and stones). I was very focused on following thedirections coming into my head, as this Intricate pattern ofcrystals, rocks, stones, and animal totems (like feathers)were being laid out.

At some point I noticed the sky to the west had at least adozen bright lights that I did not think were stars. Brendastarted poking my shoulder saying, “Nance, ah..look overthere…there is a space brother right over there.”

I did not stop to look as I was still incredibly focused. Brendakept nudging me and finally I said to her, “Look at the sky.”

The next thing she said was, “Oh shit!”

Sandi came up just then and she saw Brenda staring at thesky. Sandi looked and said, “Wow.”

The lights just above the horizon were obviously in somedefined formation.

Not sure how long we were out in the yard. Once we had setout all the stones in things in the geometric patterns we wereseeing, there seemed nothing else to do. Apparently ourvisitors need our help in setting up an energy vortex to helpbalance the planet.

Star Family

A couple of nights later while at work I had a most interesting

182

experience. The pool area of the condominium was about anacre of space. Surrounding the pool were a few hundredlounge chairs, tables with chairs with umbrellas, hugeplanters, and a Jacuzzi. Each night I would walk out there tocheck on the pool and make sure there were no leakingirrigation pipes and so forth. As the condominium was builtfarther out toward the ocean than was allowed later (it hadbeen one of the early buildings), the sea wall at the east endwas right on the beach.

It was about 1:30 AM (I worked the night shift) and I walkedout the door into the pool area. The first thing I did was looktoward the ocean. There appeared to be a round domedthing floating in the ocean just off the beach. It was visibleonly because of the small lights outlining its shape. Well letme tell you, I just did not know what to think. So I just wentabout my business at a much more diligent way than normal.

I had no sensations of fear or something weird. Beyondbeing aware that I thought I had seen something odd on theocean, I simply was not thinking. Half way through myrounds of the pool deck I would normally stand at the seawall and just admire the dark ocean and sky full of stars.Yep, I did see a round domed shaped thing on the oceanvery close to shore.

I was standing at the sea wall looking at this unidentifiedfloating object outlined in lights. Suddenly it was like I couldsee inside the vehicle and I had an incredibly powerfultelepathic connection with a female essence inside. I say“essence” because I cannot describe her beyond a memoryof utter beauty of a humanoid and of being engulFED bylove. I was simultaneously silently asking questions at onelevel and at the same time aware my brain seemed to belinked at another level and receiving a vast amount ofinformation.

I later calculated that an hour and a half had gone by while Iwas outside on the pool deck. So quite a lot of time went bybefore I mentally asked, “How the hell do I know this is notsome figment of my imagination?”

At that moment my attention was switched to a couplewalking on the beach from my right. While nighttime, lights

183

from condominiums lining the beach allowed me to see themeasily. I realized these two would see the vehicle and theirreaction would clarify my own mental state.

The two were walking hand-in-hand and the woman was theone who looked toward the vehicle. She did not seemfreaked out but did say something to her companion. Theman looked in the same direction she was looking and theyproceeded to converse. It was like they were trying todetermine what they were seeing and they did not seem tobe excited at all.

I thought, “WTF,” and looked at the vehicle. Damned if I didnot see the lights outlining what looked to be a boat! Wellnow I was just laughing. I really was questioning my ownsanity as I watched them walk right in front of what nowlooked like a boat. They had stopped looking at it and werejust preoccupied with themselves. As they walked by it,lights started turning on and there again was a domed,saucer shaped thing floating on calm waters!

Shortly after this my female friend aboard the craft told methey had to leave and that I should go on inside the building.I asked to stay but was mentally informed it was not safe todo so. Now I could have tried to keep watching, hiding fromsome vantage point, but I knew they would obviously knowthat. I was told to go back in and start reading the book I hadjust acquired that very day.

I did as instructed and found myself saddened to tears withher farewell. She said it would be a very long time before Iwould see her again. I did go in and began reading the book.Today I can’t remember what it was titled and cannot find itin my collection. But I remember what it was about and whatit taught me. Just wish I remembered more.

Merkabah

It was later in 1992 and I was still working the midnight shiftat the condominium. I got home around 8:30 AM and imme-diately started hearing a voice in my head.

“You need to build something,” the voice said.

“Build what?” I silently questioned.

“Out of the scaffolding,” the voice said without answering the

184

“what” question.

I had found a pile of scaffolding laying on the ground andcovered with vines not long after taking over the property. Icould not imagine why it was there. The fact I was now beingtold to build something with it made me laugh out loud. “TheUniverse is certainly an interesting and complex place,” Ithought.

It took her a bit of time to actually relocate the pile ofscaffolding. “Okay so now I hope whatever you need builtcan be built right here,” I silently stated after realizing howheavy each of the scaffolding pieces was.

“No,” came into my head.

“Oh great! So where?”

Silence was all I heard.

Brenda Brock was staying with me and had just gotten up. Itold her what was happening and she took a cup of coffeeand one hand and a pendulum in the other. The carvedamethyst pendulum hanging from the silver chain washanging straight down while she held the opposite end of thechain. She mentally asked the question as to where thisunknown structure was to be built and began walking aroundthe property.

At first the pendulum simply dangled and moved only inresponse to Brendal’s motion of walking. Brenda walked inone direction for about 20 feet and saw no energeticmovement to the pendulum. She took a 90 degree turn foranother 20 feet. This went on for a good five minutes and Iwas getting exasperated with the process. Brenda made onelast 90 degree turn when the amethyst began circling. At theend of the chain the amethyst pendulum had taken on a lifeof its own. From the end of the chain it was making a smallcircle. Brenda kept walking in the same direction and thecircle was getting bigger. She had to adjust the direction afew times to keep the pendulum continuing to swing in alarger and larger circle. All of a sudden it stopped moving.Brenda had found the place where I was suppose to buildsomething.

“Damn,” I said aloud looking where the scaffolding was

185

laying on the ground. “You had to have it on the other side ofthe property!” I spent the next four hours moving each pieceof scaffolding and setting it to stand up while tying eachpiece to the one I had previously moved. In the end thescaffolding marked out an area about 20 feet long and tenfeet wide.

I looked at it for quite awhile trying to figure out what theheck it was suppose to be. Finally giving up trying tounderstand why I had just spent an entire morning onlistening to a voice in my head, I went in to go to sleep.

It was later that night when I picked up THE KEYS OFENOCH book. I opened it to where the book mark was. Ifinished reading the page I had left and turned the page.Now I was by this time accustomed to magical thingshappening, but this one essentially “blew my mind”. On thenext page was a drawing of exactly what I had spent themorning building.

I just stared at the diagram shaking her head. “What the hellis this book really all about,” I mused. I was only on page130 of almost 600 pages and the book was again showingitself to be something very mystical.

The first time I encountered the book was in 1972 while at aChristmas party thrown by a coworker. The coworker’shusband kept hounding me to look at this thick book with awhite cover with the word YHWH across the top. I finally satdown with the book pusher and took a look at its contentswhile he continued to babble on about what it was about. Itdid not take long to realize it was like a technical manual forhow stuff works but on a hugely grand scale. The husbandwas claiming the author J.J. Hurtak had been taken byEnoch to other places in the universe and been givenunbelievable access to unbelievable knowledge. I blew himand the book off by saying, “Well I think it would takesomeone other than me to understand what this book isabout. Best I can see is that you would have to dedicateyour life to understanding it.”

Twenty years later Brenda was visiting for a couple of weeksand one day said, “I have a book you might be interested in.”Out came another copy of THE KEYS OF ENOCH. This time

186

I consented to actually trying to read it.

After building what became called the Merkabah, I wasmotivated to try to grasp the information being presented inthe book. It took me months of reading and often I honestlywas not sure what I had just read. So I eventually took somecourses on the book by people who seemed to understandit. In the end all I can say is that I have read it. I would neverclaim to understand it completely. But I was certain therewas a deep magic to it. After all I now had a merkabah onthe property.

After the initial scaffolding established the area, I and twofriends Curtis and Peter really got to work. We built a foursided pyramid with the same angles as the Great Pyramid inEgypt. We used copper pipe to build the pyramid and tomake a circle to which the pyramid was attached. All of theconnections were made by Curtis’s expert soldering. Four“feet” poles were attached to the circle and the three of uscarried the structure over to the scaffolding. The circleactually extended just beyond the scaffolding marking thewidth of the area. It did not completely cover the length.

Peter was pushing the first pole into the ground and foundhimself struggling. “I can’t believe I am having this muchtrouble,” he complained. After getting it about two feet in theground, Peter said, “Try putting your pole in.”

Assuming I was also going to have a similar problempushing the pole into the ground, I really pushed and thepole not only went in for about a foot but it suddenly wentdown over three feet. “Wow,” I exclaimed, “I think there is ahole here!”

The three of us looked at each other and at the structure.Peter directed, “Curtis, just put your pole in.” He also had tostruggle to get it down to a three foot mark. To keepeverything stable, I had gone over to the fourth pole andbegan putting it down into the ground. After getting his poleto the three foot mark, Peter came over and helped me getthe fourth pole down until the circle was stable andperpendicular with the ground. The circle was six feet abovethe ground.

I asked, “So what do you think that hole is all about?”

187

referring to the pole that had hit a hole. I thought it very oddthat a random placing of the first pole ended up in theopposite pole hitting a hole not visible from the surface.

Peter responded, “Must be the entry to the Underground,”and he laughed. I knew he was referencing the undergroundtunnel system supposedly existing on a worldwide basis thatshamans used to travel. All three of us laughed while silentlywondering if Peter was not absolutely correct.

Peter and I had been working with a variety of devices toenhance energies derived from a collection of gems andother minerals and even Earth itself. We had come to anunderstanding of how geometric forms could control andenhance energies that were something more than electricand/or magnetic. One device could charge up a quartz thatwould travel about a foot before losing its anti-gravitationalcharacteristics. Yes the crystal would fly for a foot beforecrashing.

Another time before the pyramid structure had been addedto the Merkabah, my experimentation got local mediacoverage. I came over with a copper pipe two inches wideand 4 foot long with no idea of what I was suppose to dowith it.

The previous night I had found the pipe in the boiler room ofwhere I worked. The voices started immediately, “Take it.”Not being a thief I refused. Actually I refused a dozen timesbefore taking it and putting it in the van. I basically justwanted the head chatter to stop.

After getting home I followed the directions. The pipe washammered into the spot the voice had pointed out. Thecopper pipe, geometric form Curtis created was put on top ofit.

Before going to bed I told Peter what was happening.

“Any idea why or what it is suppose to do?” he asked.

“Not a clue I replied.”

Not more than an hour later Peter called sounding a bitfrantic. “Get out there and take down the pipe! They haveweather warnings on all the TV stations. We are being hit byover 1500 lightening strikes per minute!” I never replied. I

188

just hung up and ran as fast as I could and pulled out thepipe. Local reporters said the freak weather that had createdthe unprecedented lightening lasted just under an hour.

A few hours later Peter came over and excitedly explainedwhat he thought had happened. “I think the dimensions ofthe pipe was a quarter of the Earth wave that Tesla wastapping into when he blew the Colorado electric system.”

Nicola Tesla was arguably the greatest scientist in history.He believed Earth put out a pulse of energy that could beharnessed to create electricity. Tesla’s 1889-1900 ex-periments in Colorado had required him to use his fortune torebuild the state’s electric system.

What we had been show was the awesome power that Teslahad unleashed in Colorado was very real.Using what we hadalready been learned with this new information we made achange to the Merkabah.

Inside the Merkabah running lengthwise from the middlepoint under the apex of the pyramid to the scaffolding, welaid down a complex copper wire matrix on the ground. Thismatrix was covered with glass blocks. All in all it proved tobe a powerful addition to whatever it was “they” wereconstructing.

Sometime later Curtis showed up with two copper tubed,complex geometric devices that were about a foot tall. Onewas hung from the apex of the pyramid. The second onewas laid in a hole dug directly under the apex. I took somecopper wire and attached it to the copper wire matrix and thedevice we were burying. We had just finished the projectwhen I heard a voice screaming in my head, “RUN!”

I grabbed Curtis and repeated the command, “Run!” Both ofus ran about thirty feet before I remembered Hugger cat wasin the Merkabah sleeping on a chair. I stopped and started torun back.

All of a sudden a beam of white light that looked solid andabout two feet wide flashed from out of the south about threefeet from the surface and went by us toward the center of theMerkabah. It stopped traveling forward as soon as it gotunder the apex of the pyramid and traveled up toward thetop of the pyramid. At that point there was a huge flash of

189

light that filled the entire Merkabah.

I was stunned by the sight and had stopped running torescue the cat. But the cat was rescuing herself. The Huggercat was running from the Merkabah and was a good six feetaway when she jumped. An instant later I had cat claws inmy shoulders and Hugger was holding on while turning tolook back at where she had just been.

Curis was jumping up and down yelling profanities thatended with, “....did you see that!”

I replied, “Yes, but I have to wonder what Hugger saw.”Hugger never did go back into the Merkabah, but did nothave any physical marks to prove she had experienced anamazing event.

Archangel Gabriel

One day I was in the Merkabah cleaning up the altar areawhere a large collection of mineral specimens were sitting. Itwas an impressive collection ranging from gem stones like aruby to an almost perfect black square of mineral thatsomeone had illegally picked up at a Mayan temple. As Ipicked up each piece and wiped it clean I had gotten into adeep meditative state. The meditation was broken when Irealized there was a very strong odor that took me a fewmoments to realize was the smell of a horse. I thought, “Whyam I smelling a horse?”

And then I heard the hoof of a horse striking the groundthree times just behind me. I turned and right in front of mewas a huge, chestnut colored horse with a rider. The riderwas dressed in white and had such a brilliancy that I couldnot make out the facial features. “Who are you,” I said outloud.

“Gabriel,” was the reply. I assumed it was the ArchangelGabriel.

But I could not focus on Gabriel as the horse who was withinreach was dominating my attention. The fire in his eyes wassomething you did not want to see in a horse. But there wasa calmness and peace that was nothing less than bliss. Idon’t believe this,” I said aloud. The words had hardly beenvoiced when the vision moved from solid to a mist and

190

disappeared.

I knew better than to bring doubt into a mystical experience.I had been given an unbelievable opportunity to directlycommunicate with the Archangel Gabriel and I hadsabotaged it by voicing doubt. I promised herself never tomake that mistake again. I also carried a sense of loss.What had he wanted to teach me?

Archangel Michael

It was a few months later when I was in the Merkabahmeditating while lying on the glass blocks over the copperwire matrix. My feet were near the center of the pyramid andwhen I opened my eyes and looked forward toward theopposite side of the Merkabah a large figure was standingcompletely dressed in white. The first thought that enteredmy mind was, “Do not doubt.” Aloud I said, “Who are you?”

“Michael.” I knew this was Archangel Michael because whilehe was in a solid form I could detect the misty image ofwings.

Suddenly there was a movement at the side of the Merkabahwhere the pole over the hole stood. I turned and to my utteramazement I saw a small gnome like image standing aboutthree feet tall. No sooner had I seen the gnome than thegnome jumped up, did a flip, and dove head first into theground which now had an obvious opening. Michael followedhim also head first down into the hole, like he was flying.

I never hesitated allowing my consciousness to also followthem down the hole.

It could be called “imagining” but it really is a type of “remoteviewing” that I had first learned from a shaman teaching howto travel the underworld tunnel system. The gnome, Michaeland I were virtually flying through the narrow tunnels. I wasfollowing without any thought except to keep up with my twoodd companions.

I suddenly realized they were no longer in front of me.Somehow I had lost them in the tunnel. But in front of mewas a wide opening. I stopped my forward momentumbefore flying right out of the side of the mountain. From myperch at the exit to the tunnel system I surveyed the view. I

191

was on a cliff side of a mountain overlooking a valleysurrounded by mountains. Below I saw thousands of lightorbs floating upward from the surface.

“Where am I and what the heck am I looking at?” Iwondered. Before getting any thought as an answer, I feltmyself being drawn back through the tunnel system until Iquickly was standing behind the gnome and Michael inside acavern.

Both the gnome and Michael had their hands out to theirsides with the palms up. From each hand white light wasemanating and flowing upward. Upon wondering where thewhite light was going, I found herself in a large conferenceroom with a group of white males in suits sitting around thetable. It appeared to me that three men from this meetingwere being particularly targeted by the white light. When Iwondered where I was, I got that it was Chicago. Andwithout any adieu I found herself back in the Merkabah lyingon the glass bed.

I laid there recalling every instant of what had transpired. Itwas as real to me as Gabriel on the horse was. “Yes,” Ithought, “but what constitutes real?” A short time later,maybe as long as a couple of hours, I turned on thetelevision. President Clinton was making a speech of somekind and I was not paying attention, until I got that voice inmy head saying, “Watch.”

When finally focused on what Clinton was saying, I realizedhe was referring to the men in suits. President Clinton wasannouncing that, while they did not believe it was possibleand it was a bit of a miracle, the “Dayton Peace Accords”had been signed and the Balkan War was over. It was backin 1995 and although it was not Chicago, in my references“Chicago” was the city that would have designated that areaof the world.

It was a confirmation that I had actually followed a gnomeand an Archangel travel through the tunnel system to assisthumans in making peace. I suspected the valley with thewhite orbs had been somewhere in the Balkans.

Comet Shoemaker–Levy 9

I was not sure what a merkabah really was, but it was

192

undeniably magical. There are numerable interpretations ofwhat it is suppose to be. All I know was that since building itthere had been continual gatherings of like minded peoplewho would sit in it, playing musical instruments, andconnecting with something out side of the group. It was likewe would all end up in a meditative even trance like state.There were at least six people per gathering and onoccasion as many as two dozen. People were being drawninto my life who were totally committed to metaphysicalknowledge and even the shaman from a local NativeAmerican tribe got involved.

The most spectacular and profound experiences cameduring July 1994. In March 1993 a comet was detectedorbiting Jupiter and named Comet Shoemaker–Levy 9 . Butthe comet had already broken up from gravitational forces ofthe giant planet. Those pieces began to hit Jupiter one afteranother.

I think 22 of us were there for the first hit on July 16th. Wewatched the clock tick past the estimated time of thecollision. We were sitting in the Merkabah and just beingquiet. It actually did not take more than about 14 minutesbefore we felt a change. The only thing I remember anyonesaying was a comment made about how there was a purplehue around everything and someone else remarking abouthow he felt like he did when he took LSD. It surprised mehow everyone seemed to agree with the fact that the visuallandscape had taken on the same fuzziness perceived whenon a hallucinogenic. You do not see sharp angles or edgeson LSD. Everything just seems to blend into everything else.This effect did not last but about 20 minutes.

While there were a total of 21 distinct impacts over the next6 days, we only got together when it was convenient. Wewere not able to have that large a number for the others.And none were as amazing as the first.

What Comet Shoemaker–Levy 9 demonstrated was theinterconnectedness of celestial bodies. When 22 peoplewitness the same event and agree on everything each feltand saw, you can bet something happened. What hadhappened had happened on Jupiter hundreds of thousandsof miles away.

193

The Music Connection

We would sit in the Merkabah and play music. Only one ofus was actually a musician. We had many flutes anddifferent types of drums. Rattles and crazy pieces of woodthat rubbed together would make haunting sounds.Depended who was there and what they were feeling as towhat instrument would be chosen. And we would just play.

I can honestly say the music I heard there rivaled anything Ihave heard before or since. It was difficult to know if wewere creating the music or the music flowing through us wascreating a magical event. It was hypnotic. I often got imagesof others just like us playing away on some distant world.During special events on Earth, the music would connect mewith others also celebrating the special event.

What Was the Magic?

The above is just a taste of what was happening throughoutthe 1990's. Magical events and people were common. Lifewas amazing.

We had learned what we think is real is only a small slice ofthe picture. We came away believing in Archangels andGnomes and Space Brothers. We learned to see the world interms of energies. We began feeling the world by acknowl-edging those energies.

Most importantly we came to a profound understanding orthe interconnectedness of everything. We certainly had anintroduction to that with the Jupiter impact event. We felt theenergetic shift when the planet was struck. But the realinsight into interconnectedness came from the music.

Yes, if I had to chose the top thing learned, it would be theinterconnectedness of everything. You just never felt aloneand always felt safe. Everything that happened in life was fora reason. It is easier to love than to hate. Communicationfixes most things. The Universe says yes but we say no.Everything we need will be provided. Follow your heart, as itis a better guide than your head.

What Went Wrong?

And then George Bush was elected President in 2000. Ninemonths later 9/11 transpired. Everything changed. The

194

timeline I had been on during the 1990's had suddenlyshifted. While I cannot absolutely confirm why it changed, Ibelieve I know what took me off the path to total bliss.

When I first moved into the little house it was a mess. Therewere continual renovation projects ongoing. One day afriend who was working on putting in a new electrical systemcame into the kitchen. He had something in his hand thatfilled me with dread.

I was actually backing up while asking, “What is that!”

He held it out for me to see. It was a wooden carving. Itshowed a globe being held in talons like you see on anEagle. It was only half a globe about 3" diameter.

“I found this between the beam and the wall.”

“Like it was put there when the house was built?”

“It is the only way it could have gotten there.”

I eventually handled this strange art, but only to put it out ofthe way. I did not think of it again, unless I ran across it. But15 years later it was December 25th 2000 and I could notstop thinking about it. There was something evil representedby this thing. And what the hell was it doing in my house?

No one was around for Christmas celebrations. Alone withmy thoughts and the thoughts kept going to this piece ofwood. I meditated about it and finally built a fire and burnedit. Everything changed.

195

3 - "The unaware are unaware

they are unaware."

As the oldest of ten kids, living a state away from theextended family, there was no one telling me I had not livedbefore. As I could remember past lifetimes, I assumedeveryone else remembered too. I was twelve when I dis-covered the awful truth: no one seemed to remember. I hadmentioned something about past lives to a couple of friends,who told me I was a nut case. Sure enough, reincarnationwas not something in which other Americans believed.

Three years later John Kennedy was murdered. The doubtset in. Three years after that, as a Freshman at theUniversity, I was being exposed to knowledge that solidifiedthe doubt. I questioned everything I had ever been taught. Iwalked out of the Catholic Church. I started to detest mygovernment. I found capitalism and the greed of theindustrial-financial establishments to be obscene. And oneday my mind snapped. I stopped going to classes. ActuallyI never really got out of bed for a few days.

Maybe I heard a voice. Maybe I just started from scratch. Irealized there was no one who would know every thing I didand every thought I had...except myself. I decided I wouldbe my own best friend and only believe that which I believed.I started trusting my feelings about things, rather thantrusting what “was suppose to be”. What anyone elsethought of me was none of my business.

The new Me ended up becoming a voting member of theUniversity’s History Department in my Senior year. I was theonly student in such a position. My mastery of history

196

resulted in one professor asking me to stop attending hisclasses because I was embarrassing him. You see, I had alifetime of learning discarded and needed to learn it allagain. But this time, I was the one who was deciding whatwas truth and what was something less. No one could tellme what to do or what to think. That made me stand outfrom the crowd. That made me look at life from a differentvantage point and to provide creative, even innovativethought. That made me a success. That is why I wasoffered the opportunity to work for the University to developa curriculum for developing Drug Counselors. That is oneof the reasons I was so successful in the U.S. Army.

And, yes, I decided that reincarnation was a fact of life. Ibegan nurturing connection with my soul, in order toremember past lives. History was a lot easier when youcould actually remember what really happened, by tappinginto the memories of past lives.

As I am writing this in 2010 and the Internet now permeatesour lives, you can go on line to http://www.childpastlives.orgfor further information regarding studies that have been doneon childhood memories of previous lives. Or go tohttp://www.soulsurvivor-book.com for a detailed story of onechild’s memories and his parents search to confirm thosememories. Or, if you are lucky, just start asking questionsfrom any child who happens to be in you life. When a childis born, their connection to the soul is pure. Their minds arevoid of clutter that interferes with listening to internalmessages.

I was drawn to read a book by Ruth Montgomery who was aself-described Christian psychic and who wrote a number ofnonfiction books. The book was not giving me anything Iwas not already acquainted with. I kept trying to just put itdown, but that pesky feeling of needing to read it kept megoing. In the last few pages I found what I needed to know.There was a definition of the difference between praying andmeditation. Prayer is talking to God. Meditation is listeningto God. Children are still in a state where they can listen toGod. Or listen to their own soul.

There is a story about the indentation all of us have justabove the middle of our lip. Supposedly just before birth an

197

angel touches the child at that point, leaving the indentationand taking away all memory of the time before birth. Insupport of this story was an exchange between myself and afour year old girl.

I asked her, “Who were you before?”

I looked at me with puzzlement and then responded, “BeforeI was born?”

“Yes, before you were born.”

I thought about the question and finally replied with somesurprise, “I don’t remember!”

The General

Why some of us remember and others do not, I cannotexplain. In my case, I believe the man who died three yearsbefore I was born promised himself he would remember. Hewas an avid follower of the Occult Sciences and traveled toAfrica and Europe. In certain locations, he recalled pastlives. He was a General in the U.S. Army and the onlyknown dignitary to go inside the tunnel where the Spear ofDestiny was found in Nuremberg, Germany. He knew aboutthe Spear and Hitler’s fascination with it. He was aware ofChurchill having ordered that the Spear be found. His namewas George S. Patton.

I am not saying that I was Patton. I believe Patton and Ishare a common soul. We are like two PC’s tied into thesame Server Computer. His life experience resulted inkarmic forces that influenced my life. And remember myearlier discussion of Old West Tombstone and my life as agunslinger named Luke Short? Well in a moment I willexplain how Luke would have influenced George.

NOTE: But before that I need to point out that anyoneGoggling “Luke Short” will find out he did not die inTombstone and lived to be an old man. But that is just onetimeline. Another is the one I describe. Timelines will bediscussed later.

Perhaps Luke Short’s life experiences influenced GeorgePatton. Luke died in 1881 and Patton was born in 1885.Patton may have been drawn to ivory pistol handles,because John Heath had used a similar white handled pistol

198

to kill Luke Short. If Short, Patton, and myself were like PC’swho’s files are maintained on the server computer of onesoul, we could unwittingly be following clues FED to us bythat Soul Computer. It is really like some weird cosmicgame.

A friend gave me a stack of books and The Spear of Destinyvirtually jumped out of the stack. I was carrying the 8 or sobooks as a stack and The Spear of Destiny did not just fall, itlanded a good 3 feet away. Patton had been fascinated bythe subject and actually saw the Spear shortly before hedied.

I remembered past lives, as did Patton. Both of usresearched occult phenomena and served in the U.S. Army.I ended up in Tombstone with Ada who was verycomfortable with and conversant in reincarnation. Ifacilitated my learning about Luke Short.

I also met Robbie who recalled details of John Heath’s life,the man who shot and killed Luke Short. Robbie’s apologyfor killing Short confirmed my memories of Heath murderingShort. Ten years later I took a photograph of a revolver withwhite handles that was suppose to be John Heath’s pistol.Patton wore ivory handled pistols.

George Patton died following an automobile accident thatsome said was actually an assassination. I have had over25 automobile accidents and only been at fault for two ofthem. Only recently did I uncover the fact that the accidenthad been staged and Patton was actually murdered. Wereall those accidents intended to somehow make me aware ofthis fact?

Cosmic Rule #5 is that chance is a pseudonym for thought.I have provided just a short list of seemingly chancesituations that would lead me to believe in a soul connectionbetween Short, Patton, and myself. Another chance eventwas my going for the first and only time to a town inMassachusetts that Patton’s wife had resided in. Thishappened before Tombstone, and my overwhelming feelingthat I had been in the Massachusetts town before was utterlyspooky. Years later I discovered the link between Patton’swife and the town. That was when I started to look at

199

Patton’s life with interest. I think Patton’s complete grasp ofwar tactics benefitted me immensely in my military career.

Maybe Luke Short’s complete mastery of the six-shooter andhorse ridding showed up in Patton. In the 1912 Olympics,Patton was among three riders to turn in a perfectperformance in the equestrian cross-country steeplechase.In the pistol shooting competition, Patton missed coming infirst. He and others held that the judges were in error whenthey claimed one of Patton’s bullets had missed the target.Patton believed his bullet had simply gone through the holemade by a previous bullet. Regardless, you have to bedamn good to get to the Olympics and Patton may have hadLuke Short to thank.

This is just one trail of previous lifetimes that I haveaccessed. There are other lifetimes confirmed by peoplewhom I have had relationships with in this lifetime, whererecall of previous life experiences were made by each of theparticipants. Of this I am absolutely certain: we have alllived many lives.

Why would the concept of reincarnation be so dangerous toOrthodox Christian, Islamic, and Judaic religions whobelieve there is only one lifetime? Certain mystical sects ofJudaism and Islam and both Hindu and Buddhist religions,believe in a Great Wheel of Return or reincarnation whereKarma rules. The Hindu and Buddhist religions do quite wellwithout having to become worthy of Heaven in one lifetime.

The obvious answer is that, if you have to go thru a Christianpriest to get to Heaven in one try, the priest has you prettywell in control. But what if it is more than this direct controlthey are seeking. What if reincarnation is a pathway toempowerment. How can you access the knowledge storedwithin your soul gleamed from previous lifetimes, if you haveno clue you ever lived before?

The John Kennedy - Jesus Christ Connection

Rule #8 of Cosmic Reality states, “There are a finite numberof souls.” This rule is based in part upon the QuantumPhysics concept that Time is illusionary and is only arelationship of Place and Space. A soul can project LukeShort who dies and is reborn as George Patton who dies

200

and is reborn as myself. I think this is a simplistic andlimiting view of what the soul is capable of, in its search forexperience and knowledge.

By now you know that I believe Jesus Christ’s conscious-ness went from his dead body into that of an individual beingsimultaneously projected by his soul. In computer terms: thefiles from the Jesus PC were downloaded into another PC bythe soul or server computer. Because those files alsodictated the parameters of the bioelectromagnetic fieldcreating the body of Jesus, files concerning the physicalbody were deleted. Without the bioelectromagnetic blueprintpresent, Jesus’ body simply disintegrated in a flash ofenergy that scorched an image on what became the Shroudof Turin.

For all this to happen, the soul must be able to projectindividuals who live at the same time. If you Google“simultaneous lifetimes, Google comes back with 14,200,000entries. At a quick glance, many of these entries seem to betied to science. However there are many that are speakingof life experiences. This list surprised and tickled me. I hadno idea so many others had stumbled upon this fact ofsimultaneous incarnations. I discovered this fact because ofa television show.

By 1983 a lifetime of research had resulted in a 600 pagemanuscript. I queried various publiIrs about any interest inpublishing the book. Only one editor was interested.However when he talked to his bosses, he was told no onein the United States would publish such a subject. I suspectI would never have gone any further.

Then in June1985, I was watching the TV show “Call ToGlory”. It revolved around an Air Force pilot and his family inthe 1960's. There was a two part storyline simply titled “JFKPart 1" and “JFK Part 2" which was televised as a movieevent. The storyline covered the Assassination and thedays following.

What was most creative was their use of the television.While the plot concerning the family was playing out, inevery scene was a television in the background showingblack and white images first transmitted throughout America

201

in 1963. Most of the time I was watching the television in thebackground. When there was a dramatic event happeningon the TV, the performers would become silent, staring atthe television which would become audible.

There was nothing of real import happening on thebackground TV. It was just various film clips andphotographs of the crowd in Dealey Plaza in the momentsbefore Kennedy was shot. The final film I recall was a fatherand his son waving toward the camera.

In a heartbeat my mind was transported through time. I wasin Dealey Plaza waving back at the little boy and his father. Iwas in Dallas, in Dealey Plaza, in the limousine, in the bodyof the President of the United States. The boy and his dadwere the last conscious memory John Kennedy had. Theblow to the neck and feeling of needing to swallow but beingunable to do so flooded my consciousness. I was aware ofthe flaying of the arms as the elbows were thrust out andhands clenching and moving toward the damaged neck. Itwas all happening in slow motion. Even the blow to the righttemple seemed to go on forever.

When the images of my 1985 television came back intoview, I was sobbing. It was the most emotional moment ofmy life. The tragic end to hope and the man who could havemade changes that would have altered the future.

I pondered what had happened to send my consciousnessback into time allowing me to be there with Kennedy as hewas murdered in Dallas. At some point it became clear:John Kennedy and I shared the same soul.

I soon pulled out the 600 pages and started looking at it withrenewed purpose. I had felt the killing bullet hit the

President in the right temple.Kennedy was shot in the righttemple, just as Zapruder had toldJay Watson of WFAA-TV during aninterview. And Zapruder witnessedthe entire killing through hiscamera’s view-finder. If anyonewas totally focused on the targetbesides an assassin, it wasAbraham Zapruder on right

demonstrating where he believedthe fatal bullet struck.

202

Zapruder.

Oswald was not the sole assassin. While my research hadmade it probable, it was now a certainty. Someone unknownwas responsible for ripping apart my future when theydecided to kill the President. I found myself really pissed off.I would rewrite the book and get it to the public, no matterwhat it took.

This was in 1985. The final 100 page book was put on theinternet as part of 21C-online.com, which I had created asan online magazine in 1992. I have no idea how manypeople may have read it, before someone took it down offthe server. There were many dozens of other entries butonly the book disappeared.

But it disappeared after I heard a statement on GoodMorning America that someone on the Internet actuallythought the Freemasons were connected to the assas-sination of President Kennedy. While they did not identifywho thought that, it did cross my mind that they werespeaking of me. That was back in 2010 and I do not knowhow many others may have come across this same theory.But as of 2012 there are over 200,000 Google entries for“Freemasons JFK assassination”!

“Those who do not know, do not know they do notknow.”

Tracy was a fan who informed me of the missing book on theInternet. She has become a good friend. It was Tracy whosaid to me, “Those who do not know, do not know they donot know.”

No truer words have been spoken. For most of the 21st

Century I worked as an office manager in a smallmanufacturing company. For the first few years I was keptbusy reorganizing and revamping operations, as well aslearning the business. By 2010 I had operations streamlinedto the point that I spent a lot of time researching on thegrowing Internet.

To be honest, I was rather smug in my feelings of supe-riority. I, after all, knew secrets and had accessed powersothers simply ignore. But the more I researched the lesssmug I became. While the book The John Kennedy - Jesus

203

Christ Connection had been full of secrets, by 2010 most ofthem were all over the Internet.

Also on the Internet was information I had not known. Andalmost every time my first reaction to some new revelationwas, “No way!” And then I would continue to look andcontinued to find out that the world was even more scarythan I had ever imagined.

One person went off on me and said something like, “Youbelieve everything you see on the Internet!” I had somethingabout 9/11 regarding the evidence of explosives being used.I did not bother to reply when she said, “I know how ithappened, I saw a program on the History Channel!” I havenever tried to talk to her about anything that matters sincethen. In my mind, no point. (“If you are not willing to learn, noone can help you. If you are determined to learn, no one canstop you.”)

Well I openly admit that there are some things on theInternet that you either have to believe or not, because thereis no way to prove or disprove something. For instance,there is a You Tube video that shows the following:

The woman took this picture of herself with her phone. Shetook it to check on lighting, before her daughter took a photoof her on another camera that could download the photo.Her phone did not have any capability to get a photo out ofit. Some time went by before the woman was deleting photosfrom the phone and actually looked at this photo.

In the right hand corner ofthe photo is the word “kill”projected backward. It isactually being projectedon the large televisionscreen directly behind thewoman. Too bad she didnot see this immediately,at which time she couldhave ident i f ied thechannel and program.

It may not have mattered.This is an example of

204

subliminal messaging. Until I saw this video, I was notprompted to study this subject. If you Google the term youcome up with, “About 1,300,000 results”. What this womancaught is rather unbelievable. The messages are so shortduration the human mind does not see them. She justhappened to click the shutter at the only instantaneous pointat which this subliminal message could have possibly beencaptured. As it is likely it was not actually recorded butsimply added to the signal, you cannot slow down arecording to see these things. Where the messagingoriginates is also not determinable.

This is just one danger we encounter when we have all ofour media controlled by a very limited group of media giants.I am not going to continue with this specific subject ofsubliminal messaging; except to point out that the wordcould have been anything that could connote fear or greed.It also was probably only one word out of who knows howmany. Just note that the technology exists and we are allvulnerable.

The issue here is not whether the technology is available.The issue is whether or not such despicable subliminalmessaging would actually be used. All of us want to believein the benevolence of others, including our government.

MK-ULTRA

Oh I suppose the CIA personnel thought they were doingsomething that would help secure the nation from theCommunist Threat in the 1950's. They started a project onmind control that is known as MK-ULTRA, believing the ColdWar enemies were doing the same. They were studyinghallucinogens effects on mind control. Official testimonyclaims the program was discontinued in the 1960's. Manybelieve there was simply a name change and much moresecurity over the mind-control research program and that itcontinues today.

Although CIA Director Richard Helms ordered the filesdestroyed in 1973, the U.S. Congress investigated theprogram in 1975 by taking testimony from individuals withfirst hand information. By 1977 a Freedom of Informationrequest came up with 20,000 documents, which then

205

prompted another Congressional investigation.

By 1994 there were hearings to determine if the people whowere subjected to this research were harmed and should becompensated. During that hearing, David Gries, Director,Center for the Study of Human Intelligence, CIA, testified.Based upon that testimony, it was concluded that between1953 and 1964 there were149 projects conducted involvingdrug and other studies on human subjects who did not knowwhat was being done to them.

In December of that same year of 1994, a Staff Report wasissued by the 103rd Congress’s Senate Committee onVeterans' Affairs entitled Is Military Research Hazardous toVeterans' Health? Lessons Spanning Half a Century. TheMK-ULTRA program was discussed as were otherprograms. As Senator John D. Rockefeller IV stated in theForward to the report:

During the last few years, the public hasbecome aware of several examples whereU.S. Government researchers intentionallyexposed Americans to potentially dangeroussubstances without their knowledge orconsent. The Senate Committee on Veterans'Affairs...has conducted a comprehensiveanalysis of the extent to which veteransparticipated in such research while they wereserving in the U.S. military.

So what other programs did the United States governmentengage in that targeted unwitting subjects that wereAmerican veterans or civilians? They summarized theirconclusions by saying:

During the last 50 years, hundreds ofthousands of military personnel have beeninvolved in human experimentation and otherintentional exposures conducted by theDepartment of Defense (DOD), often withouta service member's knowledge or consent.

Note the number of “hundreds of thousands”! And I just betthey only looked at programs that the “public” had becomeprivy to. Here is the list discussed in the Committee on

206

Veterans’ Affairs report, in addition to their discussion of MK-ULTRA:

- approximately 60,000 military personnel were used ashuman subjects in the 1940's to test two chemical agents,mustard gas and lewisite.

- At Dugway Proving Ground: “

From 1951 through 1969, hundreds, perhapsthousands of open-air tests using bacteriaand viruses that cause disease in human,animals, and plants were conducted atDugway...In 1968, approximately 6,400 sheepdied following the intentional release of adeadly nerve gas from a plane. According to aveterinarian who evaluated the sick and dyingsheep, there was little doubt that the sheephad been poisoned with nerve gas. Thesheep and other animals in the area haddepressed cholinesterase levels, suggestingorganophosphate nerve poisoning. Initially,the Department of Defense denied anyresponsibility for the accident, stating that thesheep died from organophosphate pesticidessprayed on a nearby alfalfa field. However,the nerve agent VX was identified when thepoisoned sheep were autopsied, which madeit clear that the deaths were not caused bypesticides. Eventually, the Department ofDefense reimbursed the ranchers for theiranimals. It is unknown how many people inthe surrounding vicinity were also exposed topotentially harmful agents used in open-airtests at Dugway.

- Radiation testing:

From 1945 to 1962, the United Statesconducted numerous nuclear detonationtests...Veterans who participated in activitiesthat directly exposed them to radioactivefallout are referred to as "atomicveterans."...In addition to detonation testing,

207

radioactive releases were also intentionallyconducted at U.S. nuclear sites in the yearsfollowing World War II....It is not known howmany civilians and military personnel wereexposed to fallout from these tests.

- They also go on for pages discussing INVESTIGATIONALDRUGS USED IN THE PERSIAN GULF WAR.

Their final conclusions: FOR AT LEAST 50 YEARS, DODHAS KNOWINGLY EXPOSED MILITARY PERSONNEL TOPOTENTIALLY DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES, OFTEN INSECRET.

The U.S. General Accounting Office issued areport on September 28, 1994, which statedthat between 1940 and 1974, DOD and othernational security agencies studied hundredsof thousands of human subjects in tests andexperiments involving hazardous substances.Note GAO stated that some tests andexperiments were conducted in secret.Medical research involving the testing ofnerve agents, nerve agent antidotes,psychochemicals, and irritants was oftenclassified. Additionally, some work conductedfor DOD by contractors still remains classifiedtoday. For example, the Central IntelligenceAgency (CIA) has not released the names of15 of the approximately 80 organizations thatconducted experiments under the MKULTRAprogram, which gave psychochemical drugsto an undetermined number of people withouttheir knowledge or consent. According to theGAO report, the CIA has not released thisinformation because the organizations do notwant to be identified.

Sorry about all the quotations. Just could not bring myself tosummarize these amazing confessions by the U.S. Govern-ment. Yes indeed, they have not hesitated to secretly dovery bad things to their citizens.

It is fairly obvious that in the 1950's fear of the Communist

208

enemy was part of the motivation for some. And I will go outon a limb here (NOT) by suggesting that those organizationswho helped the DOD in conducting these experiments weredoing so because they were making money. If theorganizations were only working to protect the nation, whywould 15 of them “not want to be identified”? You wouldthink they would be so proud of their patriotism.

My position here is that fear in its many forms feeds greed.And in the name of national security (fear) the U.S. Govern-ment will be aided by greedy companies to conduct immoralacts.

From everything I have uncovered, the U.S. Governmenthas been operating for decades with one goal in mind andthat is POO. What the heck is POO, you ask? POO is“Power Over Others”. POO is the entire motivation of theBlack Nobles. By promoting fear and greed, the BlackNobles have created the ultimate control over everyone. Andby 2010 I was confronting the possible reality that the BlackNobles were in complete control of the United States.

Fear begets Greed, Greed begets POO

Fear promotes greed. When humanity was comprised oftribal societies fear was abated by everyone in the tribeworking together. Greed did not exist because greed entailshaving more than the next guy. Early man knew the fate ofthe one was tied to the fate of the tribe.

When the tribe became many tribes things started to gowrong. My tribe is better than your tribe mentality simplyexpanded into my nation is better than your nation, myreligion is better than your religion, my political system isbetter than your system, etcetera. If all fear disappeared,greed would also vanish. But fear must permeate every levelof our society because greed has been systematicallyinterwoven with every aspect of our 21st Century societies.Greed dominates the Super Consciousness and permeatesdown to the individual.

Cosmic Rule #12: We are capable of our dreams.

If you are filled with greed and fear, you can never reachCosmic Rule #12: We are capable of our dreams. And whyare we so fearful and greedy? Well because of Cosmic Rule

209

#3: Those in control will keep everyone else from knowingthe first two rules of Cosmic Reality.

We are, of course, talking about those Black Nobles whohave created this fear driven greed state that has effectivelystripped away everything the Founding Fathers created. Ifyou want the details, plan on spending a great deal of timeresearching. Pick your source, as there are probablythousands of them on the Internet. My recommendation is togo to divinecosmos.com where David Wilcock has used histalents for research to create Financial Tyranny.

There Wilcock details how a core of 1,318 corporationscontrol 80% of the world’s wealth. This core group isactually run by only 147 super-corporations that areprimarily financial institutions. At the head of it all is theFederal Reserve.

Why do most Americans have no concept of what we havebeen discussing? Because few of them have the time anddetermination to research the Internet for the truth. TheInternet is still (as of 2013) the only free source ofinformation and by “free” I mean not controlled by thedominate media companies.

Back in 1997 there were an estimated 50 firms providingall the media including movies, TV, cable, book andmagazine publishing, music production. But even then only 9firms were really the dominating players. But by 2012 therewere on 6 companies with a major stranglehold on absoluteall sources of information except the Internet. Thosecompanies are the megacorporations General Electric,Walt Disney, News Corp, Time Warner, Viacom and CBS.

So the vast majority of everything we know is emanatingfrom only six companies! And even worse, those sixcompanies are controlled by the same people.

What this means is that the American people could be toldan absolutely impossible, epic lie and they would believe it.Heck the American people are mostly good people who onlywant to be treated as they treat others. Maybe this madethem gullible back when they told the Fluoride lie.

Kills Rats, Eats Concrete, Comes from the Tap

210

Proponents of water fluoridation have for over 60 years triedto maintain that science supports their case that fluoridationis "safe and effective" and that the people opposed tofluoridation are "unscientific " or worse. This is simply not thecase. At the Fluoride Action Network is a list of 50 reasonsfluoridation of our water may be the single most damagingthing we allow happen to us.

During Congressional Testimony, U.S. Army Major GeorgeR. Jordan testified the Russians openly admitted to "... usingthe fluoride in the water supplies in their concentrationcamps, to make the prisoners stupid, docile, andsubservient." This is only one of the stunning facts aboutfluoride of which most Americans are unaware. It should benoted that the Russians do no add fluoride to the publicwater systems. In America 70% of the water supplies go thrufluoridation, which means 185 million”stupid, docile, andsubservient Americans are poisoned with ever sip of tapwater. U.S. bottled water is no safer in most cases becausethe water source has fluoride.

Here are a few other facts you probably did not know ornever considered:

- Fluoride is the only chemical added to water for thepurpose of medical treatment. And it is forced medication bydirection of a government given to everyone regardless ofage, health or even vulnerability. And the dose cannot becontrolled and there are no studies regarding the monitoringof fluoride exposure or side effects.

- Randomized Control Trials are required for manufactureddrugs. No such trial has ever been conducted to determinethe safety and purported dental health benefits of fluoride.The FDA continues to list fluoride as an unapproved newdrug! And the purported reason for putting Fluoride in thewater is to protect the teeth of children. Yet two,independent, recent studies on the role of fluoridation inpreventing tooth decay could find essentially no benefit.

- A minimum of 40% of the fluoride ingested by anaccumulates in the body. In children 80% of ingestedfluoride ends up in their bones! In 2006 the NationalResearch Council stated, “...it is apparent that fluorides have

211

the ability to interfere with the functions of the brain.” Thedamage being cited by the NRC indicates fluoride is aneurotoxic agent that impacts brain development creatinglowered IQ, learning difficulties, emotional behaviorproblems. Other damage being suspected are impairedvisual-spatial organization, fetal brain damage, lowering ofthe thyroid function, cause of arthritic symptoms, bonedamage that increases hip breaks in elderly and may evencause bone cancer, reproductive problems may be fluoriderelated.

While fluoride occurs naturallyin nature, it is a by-product ofthe aluminum industry whichgets rid of the dangerouspoison by giving it to localwater agencies to be added tothe public drinking water. It is

also used in rat poisons and pesticides. And of course it isadded to dental hygiene products where the labels warn youthat if swallowed contact poison control.

I saw an amazing YouTube video of a local news segmentcovering a chemical spill at the water treatment plant. Thestuff was shown eating the concrete. Near the end thebroadcasters said the stuff was fluoride that was going intothe drinking water. Neither broadcaster seemed at allconcerned!

Earlier I told you there was no need to go out and take up acause. This is the one cause I encourage you to get behindfor the health of your family. Go to the Fluoride ActionNetwork and find out how other municipalities, states andeven nations have eradicated this policy of fluoridation. See:http://www.fluoridealert.org.

Pineal Gland or Third Eye

But health concerns are secondary to the dangers offluoridation. The real attack is much more damaging. Thereal attack is on your pineal gland where your Third Eye islocated. The calcified parts of the pineal gland have thehighest levels of fluoride accumulation than any other part ofthe body.

212

The pineal gland is shaped like a pinecone and the pineconeis a dominate symbol throughout the world. The power itholds is understood by those controlling current reality. Byblocking the workings of the pineal gland and thus the ThirdEye is keeping 185 million Americans from knowing rules 1(Reality is what we think it is) and 2 (majority wins) of Cos-mic Reality.

Telepathy is simply learning how to adjust your brain to tuneinto and focus on certain frequencies. The Third Eye allowsyou to tune in spiritual frequencies to become empowered.Some call it the “Seat of the Soul” because of it being thelink to your multidimensional self.

In addition to melatonin production, which regulates cyclesof awake and sleep, the pineal gland secrets "Dimethy-triptamine" or DMT at your birth, when you dream and whenyou die. Ingesting DMT results in some stunning halluci-nations. In the northwest Amazon native tribes, DMT is usedfor purposes of healing and divination.

DMT has gained a lot of attention and research. It is anaturally occurring psychedelic compound found in animalsand plants. After ingesting or smoking the visual effects areapparently virtually instantaneous and extremely intense.The user seems to be teleported to a vastly different realitythat one writer called “DMT Town”.

The critical question here is, is “DMT Town” more “real” thanwhat we think is Reality? And yes I am questioning the FirstRule of Cosmic Reality - We are what we think. But onlybecause I think our ability to think has been severelydamaged by many forms of mind control perpetrate upon us.From fluoridation to subliminal imaging to MK-ULTRA wehave been attacked. And I suspect there are many moreways that have yet to be revealed to me.

Your Bleeped Up Brain

TV’s History Channel started a series in the summer of 2013called “Your Bleeped Up Brain”. It truly is an eye opener.Using a series of tests, the viewer is set up to fail.

Those card tricks and magic tricks work because our brainscannot possibly take in and digest all of the informationbeing picked up by the five senses. So our brains take a

213

random selection of information and makes an image ofwhat it thinks is really happening. By understanding thiscritical operation, people can fool your brain by directing itsattention away from what is really happening.

Someone wants the American people “stupid, docile, andsubservient”. But who is orchestrating these attacks? Whocomprises the Black Nobles? There are many on the list ofSecret Societies including the Freemasons, the BohemianGrove, the Vatican’s Opus Dei, and Illuminati. But the mostpublic secret societies are the International Banking Carteland the United States Federal Government.

Vested Interest

They really are secret societies. Everything you think youknow about the Federal Government is just wrong. You weretaught a false history and under the auspices of “nationalsecurity” true history has been kept from you. No, theyprobably do not engage in secret ceremonies but itsmembers are sworn to secrecy about its activities. It’s thatnational security thing.

But the extent that Federal Employees at the pinnacle of theorganization know the truth, is something I can not judge. Itdoes not really matter. The human reaction is to not want tobe introduced to any information that upsets the status quo.When one has a vested interest in something, best not digtoo deep.

And we are all vested. On Social Security - vested in notmaking a detrimental change. Have a Federal job - work tokeep your position. In Congress - keep your head down.Obama Medical - really vested in its success. You see what Imean? Problem is it is all smoke and mirrors and if it is notfixed the future is grim.

The following comic presentation is a simplification of whathas happened to the original constitution establishing theRepublic. After putting together a draft, it seemed so simple,I went back and researched it all over again. It really israther preposterous and simultaneously the truth as I knowit.

214

215

The Constitution for the United States

Founding Father Patrick Henry warned of dangers inherentin the Constitution. Henry feared the structure of thegovernment would allow a small group to control thegovernment. As he put it, the only check in the Constitutionpreventing an evolution to totalitarian government is, “It is ona supposition that our American Governors shall behonest....”

216

Although the Revolutionary War ended in 1783, it was notuntil September 17, 1787 that the Constitution was adopted.The goal of the document is to provide a basis upon which asmall Federal Government would be given certain veryspecific jobs requiring a centralized approach, while theStates would remain essentially independent. This is a formof government called a Republic.

What is truly stunning is the only powers given in the originalConstitution (Article 1, Section 8) were the power to produceand regulate money, collect taxes, defend the nation andprovide “general Welfare” of the United States. GeneralWelfare entails such things as creation of a Post Office androads, determining and regulating rules for naturalization,bankruptcy and commerce. The States also allowed theFederal Government to govern a 10 square mile district(District of Columbia or D.C.) and any territories the nationmight buy or obtain through war.

The Civil War should never have been fought, in my opinion.By the very concept behind creating the Republic, any Stateshould have the right to dissolve its relationship with theRepublic. But the war was fought and the only ones whowon were the International Banking Cartel (who wereundeniably complicit in fueling the Civil War) . The financialruin resulting from the war allowed a massive opening forInternational Bankers to gain control of the nation.

It happened with the Act of 1871, passed unconstitutionallyby the Forty-first Congress. The District of Columbia wouldhence forth be governed by a private corporation. This newgoverning body was designated THE UNITED STATESwhich is in reality a corporation! And who owns it. In returnfor loaning money to bail out the bankrupt nation, theInternational Bankers got to own the corporation runningD.C.!

That corporation adopted a statement of basic principles bywhich it would operate. That document was called THECONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.In the Preamble of the Republic’s Constitution it is calledThe Constitution for the United States. The corporateconstitution must by law be capitalized because it indicates abusiness document. “Of” has replaced “for”. The term "OF"

217

means "belonging to" as in "property of," and "FOR" means"on behalf of."

To the individual this abomination has resulted not inabsolute rights guaranteed by the Republic Constitution butrelative rights. An absolute right is the right to be free to doanything that does not hurt someone else. A relative rightentails you have to be given permission to have a specificright.

Absolute right to drive a car anywhere. A relative right todrive a car with a license. Absolute right to conduct businesswith anyone. A relative right to conduct business requiresnumerous licenses and regulations. Absolute right to ownproperty. Relative right to own property only if you pay taxes(i.e. rent) to a government. Taxes, licenses, and finesindicate you do not have Absolute Rights.

Under the Republic an individual is considered a “sovereign”being which means independent and holding a superiorposition to all others. Under the Corporation the corporationis the supreme of everything. Individuals are actuallyconsidered corporate assets!

DUNS Number

A "DUNS number" is given to a single business entity. TheDUNS number 16-190-6193 has a company name“Government Of The United States”, also known as “U SGovernment”. The mailing address is “The U S Capitol,Washington, DC, USA”. The Executives are listed as“Barack H Obama - President” and “Mr Joseph R Biden -Vice President”. The Line of Business is “United StatesFederal Government”. Interestingly the Year Established isgiven as the date the original Constitution was adopted1787.

So if the President and Vice-President are consideredemployees of the Corporation, it must be assumed that thiscompany, whose line of business is the United StatesFederal Government, is the actual employer of everyoneworking for the Federal Government! It should not besurprising that the Departments of State, Defense, Judiciary,Labor, etcetera are all sections of the Corporation. Even thebook of regulations guiding all operations of the Federal

218

Government is entitled UNITED STATES CODE - in capitalsindicating a corporate document.

Admiralty/Maritime Law

The ability of this Corporation to take control stems directlyfrom a change in the basis of law being used. The RepublicConstitution stipulated, in different sections, that CommonLaw, Equity Law and Admiralty/Maritime Law could be used.Common Law is derived from common sense and is focusedon protecting the individual. Equity Law is used incommerce. Maritime Law was designed to protect sea goingvessels and, when used within the concept of a land basedvessel, it is protecting the Ship of State or the Corporation.

The proof of the adoption of MaritimeLaw is indicated by the flag alwayssomewhere in a courtroom. If the flaghas a yellow fringe bordered on threesides it is “military flag” - (U.S.C. Chapter1, 2, and 3; Executive Order No. 10834, August 21,

1959, 24 F.R. 6865).

It indicates that Admiralty Law (the King’s Law) is being usedand Common Law (God’s Law) has no jurisdiction. Thedefendant has been given due notice by the flag that he orshe is not a sovereign being but a subject of the corporation!This use of the flag was paramount in Admiralty/MaritimeLaw, as flying a specific flag indicated which laws the shipwould use in doing business with citizens of a port city.

Continual Supreme Court decisions have confirmed theFederal Government is a corporation and Maritime Law canbe used in virtually any legal case brought by the FederalGovernment. The most recent critical decision was theJanuary 2010 decision on Citizens United v. Federal Elec-tion Commission where corporation spending on electionswas not limited. Common interpretation has become that acorporation is a “person”. This just reaffirms the dogma of acorporation being superior to any individual.

The key to understanding this change to Maritime Law isthat Maritime Law is focused on commerce. By expandingocean based commerce to include land based commerce,Maritime Law is allowed to stand. Admiralty/Maritime Law

219

protects the corporation not the individual. In the Admiraltysetting in a court of law, the Republic Constitution does notapply. Don’t bother to cite your Bill of Rights.

1933 and The New Deal

While the Act of 1871 provided the structure for thecorporate takeover of the Republic, it was the timeframefrom 1933-1939 that marks its complete takeover.

In 1933 all Federal contracts were paid in gold and 100billion dollars in gold was owed by the United States. WorldWar I and the Great Depression had taken their toll.Unfortunately there was only an estimated 11 billion dollarsin gold worldwide.

While kept a state secret, the Federal Government wasbankrupt. As Congressman Traficant said on the Housefloor, March 17, 1933, “Mr. Speaker, we are here now inChapter 11. Members of Congress are official trusteespresiding over the greatest reorganization of any bankruptentity in world history, the U.S. government.”

In bankruptcy a person’s or corporation’s assets are ceasedby creditors. The creditors in this case were InternationalBankers. And as the corporation the UNITED STATESpresented the case they owned everyone and everythingwithin its jurisdiction, the President of the United States(Roosevelt, Chief Executor of the Corporation) declared aNational Emergency on March 9, 1933. Their intent was toconfiscate all the gold held by all Americans, to give theBankers. The American People were told it was being held inFort Knox. But who owns it?

The legal maneuver to do this was to make an amendmentto the War Powers Act of 1917 when World War I was goingon. President Wilson signed the Act to prevent trading withany enemy by requiring licensing. The Act stipulated this didnot apply to any U.S. citizen.

The 1933 FDR Amendment ["Section 2. Subdivision (b) of section 5 of

the Act of October 6, 1917, (40 Stat. L. 411)] stated the President coulddeclare an emergency and use any agency of the FederalGovernment to insure that no “export, hoarding, melting, orearmarking of gold or silver coin or bullion or currency, BYANY PERSON WITHIN THE UNITED STATES OR ANY

220

PLACE SUBJECT TO THE JURISDICTION THEREOF.”

With the 1917 War Powers Act the concept of Declaring anEmergency comes about. This just awful law requires theConstitution (either one) be set aside. There is noConstitution in operation under a declared Emergency.Without the Constitution there is nothing to limit the powersof the Federal Government.

In 1933 Roosevelt’s declaration of emergency was donewhile the country was NOT at war. It was put into effect togain complete control over the American citizens. It was amove demanded by the bankrupt situation the nation hadfound itself.

In 1933 the American people were forced to give up theirgold. A huge fine of $10,000 could be levied against anyonehoarding gold. For each troy ounce a citizen turned in theywould get $20.67. When all the gold was controlled by theFederal Government including its exchange rate, the price ofgold rose to $35. Cool move, hey?

Emergency Powers

In 1973 and in the mist of the Watergate Scandal, the U.S.Senate of the 93rd Congress set up a committee to look atthe termination of all emergency powers. Some sane peoplerealized Nixon’s position as President afforded him vastpowers under the concept of Emergency Powers and he hadalready issued two on March 23, 1970, and August 15,1971.

What they determined is at least 470 statutes normally underthe jurisdiction of the Congress were moved to the provinceof the President under Emergency Acts still in effect. Therewere the two Nixon, one Truman for the Korean War and the1933 FDR Emergency Decree. To quote the report, “Thisvast range of powers, taken together, confer enoughauthority to rule the country without reference to normalconstitutional processes.”

The first process in the investigation was to determine whatstatutes existed because of the Emergency Decrees. Thefollowing provides great insight into the enormity of just thatproblem: “Nowhere in the Government, in either theExecutive or Legislative branches, did there exist a completecatalog of all emergency statutes. Many were aware that

221

there had been a delegation of an enormous amount ofpower but, of how much power, no one knew.”

The report concludes in part that the nation in 1973 founditself in, “...the present phenomenon of a permanent state ofnational emergency.” The report goes on to explain inhistorical terms how this all transpired.

The Wilson 1917 war powers had been relinquished by thePresident at the close of hostilities. They noted Wilson’s WarPowers Act was designed only for wartime. With Rooseveltthe concept of “emergency” was expanded to include theGreat Depression. From the Senate Report:

Beginning with F.D.R., then, extensive use ofdelegated powers exercised under an aura ofcrisis has become a dominant aspect of thepresidency.

Over the course of at least the last 40 years,then, Presidents have had available anenormous - seemingly expanding and never-ending - range of emergency powers.

Because Congress and the public areunaware of the extent of emergency powers,there has never been any notablecongressional or public objection made to thisstate of affairs. Nor have the courts imposedsignificant limitations.

What these examples suggest and what themagnitude of emergency powers affirm is thatmost of these laws do not provide forcongressional oversight or termination. Thereare two reasons which can be adduced as towhy this is so. First, few, if any, foresaw thatthe temporary states of emergency declaredin 1938, 1939, 1941, 1950, 1970, and 1971would become what are now regardedcollectively as virtually permanent states ofemergency...Second the variousadministrations who drafted these laws fora variety of reasons were understandablynot concerned about providing for

222

congressional review, oversight, ortermination of these delegated power'swhich gave the President enormouspowers and flexibility to use those powers.

Now the 1973 Senate Report says the basic reason for thiscontinued state of emergency was the Cold War, “In the viewof the Special Committee, an emergency does not now exist.Congress, therefore, should act in the near future toterminate officially the states of national emergency now ineffect.”

But then they gave all sorts of reasons why access to suchemergency powers should exist. But this time they specifiedthat Congress had to have oversight and procedures forterminating those powers. But they also left it to futureSenators to accomplish this task. To my knowledge thesubject has not been dealt with and we are still operatingunder Emergency Decree since before World War!

So predominate proof indicates the Federal Government is acorporation. Well what does the US CODE say? TITLE 28PART VI CHAPTER 176 SUBCHAPTER A > § 3002 states:

(15) “United States” means—

(A) a Federal corporation;

(B) an agency, department, commis-sion, board, or other entity of the UnitedStates; or

(C) an instrumentality of the UnitedStates.

So we have a corporation running things and have beenunder Emergency Decree for over 65 years. So what if thatentails you get a driver license or be required to have aSocial Security Number to work in the United States (bothstarted in 1933). Otherwise all is well, right? Well I guess soif you are feeling economically secure. For the rest of us weare in a state of constant fear.

After the gold was confiscated and given to the bankersfollowing the 1933 bankruptcy, the only way to do businesswas to go to the banks controlling the money and get a loan.A car company may have cars to use as collateral. In 1933

223

State Governments used the citizens of the state ascollateral. 48 governors pledged the “full faith and credit” oftheir state that included their citizens as collateral for FederalReserve System loans.

To track the collateral assets, birth certificates are used.Doctors who are allowed to operate in “relative freedom” byhaving a license, are required to sign a birth certificate. Thatoriginal certificate is sent to the Secretary of State withjurisdiction. The State sends a certified copy to the U.S.Department of Commerce that makes another certified copy.That second copy goes to the International Monetary Fundin Brussels, Belgium. The birth certificates are then used ascollateral by the UNITED STATES to secure loans from theIMF.

In addition, the birth certificates within the financialcommunity are considered “equity securities” that mature onthe 18th birthday of the person who’s name appears on thecertificate. The red numbers printed in red at the bottom ofevery birth certificate are a security stock exchange number.The birth certificate is printed on security paper with thestatement that it is not to be accepted if not on full colorsecurity paper. Oh, yes, it is a document not to prove youwere born, but to prove you are an asset of finance.

Perhaps you do not care about this issue. Does not seem toapply to your life. Well in allowing your child to be registeredwith the State through executing a birth certificate, you haveessentially given your child over to the State. That is thesource of a State’s right to take your child away from you.They own the child. The birth certificated child has becomean asset of a trust and his/her social security number allowsfor the tracking of the asset within the trust. Puts a new spinon “Human Resources”, doesn’t it?

So how does the Federal Reserve System play into thisstrange scenario? Sorry about the history and financiallessons. But without understanding these subjects, the fulldepth of the delusion we have been subject to, cannot becomprehended. Remember the FED sits atop the 147 super-corporations controlling 1,318 corporations that control 80%of the world’s wealth.

224

The FED

The photograph is of the UNITEDSTATES TREASURY. That is whereour story starts in 1913. A series offinancial panics terrified the sittingCongress into passing The FederalReserve Act (12/23/1913) signed intolaw by President Wilson. While the

TREASURY would continue to collect Federal Taxes andprint currency, the actual management of the economywould fall to the newly established central bank called theFederal Reserve.

Manipulation of the flow of money and regulating bankingactivities would stabilize the economy. This would beaccomplished by a Central Bank managing the U.S.Financial System. The ultimate problem with the plan is thatthis Central Bank is a totally independent company. FormerFederal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan put it this way,“Well, first of all, the Federal Reserve is an independentagency. And that means basically that, uh, there is no otheragency of government which can overrule actions that wetake.”

So the “FED” can do anything it wants to. Better think aboutthat one. The FED can do anything it wants to like secretlylending out 16.1 trillion dollars to banks worldwide, between2007 to 2010. This figure comes from the government’sfirst-ever audit of the central bank in 2011. As SenatorBernie Sanders put it, "As a result of this audit, we now knowthat the Federal Reserve provided more than $16 trillion intotal financial assistance to some of the largest financialinstitutions and corporations in the United States andthroughout the world," said Sanders. "This is a clear case ofsocialism for the rich and rugged, you're-on-your-ownindividualism for everyone else."

225

Does it surprise me that nothing seems to have been donewith this information, except to report the results. Seemsnobody cares. Ah, supposed Vested Interest it at work?

Back to the system: To manage and regulate the vastlandscape of financial institutions, the Federal ReserveSystem utilizes 12 District Banks overseeing designatedgeographic areas. Within their specific districts, each DistrictBank is responsible for member banks located in its district.

These 12 banks oversee the FED Member Banks. Thebiggest financial institutions (Holding Companies) includethose “Too Big To Fail”. Any Federally Charted privatelyowned bank must be a FED Member Bank. And uponfulfilling certain requirements, State Chartered Banks can be

member banks.

Just take a moment and look at thesebuildings. Damn impressive, I wouldsay. But even in this small, old bankwe take on the same quiet, somber

226

demeanor upon entering the building. We virtually whisper ina bank. Where do we also take on this humble andrespectful attitude? Well a church, of course.

And that is not the only similarity between a religiouscathedral and a financial cathedral. Both require faith tomaintain their continued existence. There is not a religion inexistence that can survive without the faith of thecongregation. And in the case of the Federal ReserveSystem, should its congregation loose faith, the systemwould also crumble. Faith in this case is that a dollar is worthsomething and the bank will give you your deposits upondemand.

In fact, only a fraction of the money deposited ina bank is actually maintained in the vaults. Acertain percentage of deposited money is kept,but the vast amount is “spent” or loaned out inexchange for interest on the loan. This is called“fractional-reserve banking” and is the worldstandard operation for banks. Its successdepends upon the customers believing that atany given minute, the amount of money beingheld in reserve is sufficient to allow the customerto access THEIR money. If everyone asked for

their money back at the same time (a bank run), there wouldnot be sufficient cash on hand.

Should a bank run happen to a FED Member Bank, the FEDDistrict Bank would attempt to cover the on hand shortage. Ifthe District Bank level could not cover the loss, the CentralBank would have the U.S. Treasury print some more paperto fill the financial hole. After all, it is only paper. It is not likethe Central Bank had to back the paper with anything otherthan the faith of the congregation.

The concept paper currency wouldindicate a certain amount of goldand/or silver could be exchangedfor the paper currency has longbeen gone. Executive Order 6102signed on April 5, 1933 by U.S.President Franklin D. Rooseveltforbid "the Hoarding of Gold Coin,

227

Gold Bullion, and Gold Certificates within the continentalUnited States". The order actually criminalized possession ofmonetary gold by any individual, partnership, association orcorporation. Just under a year later,The United States GoldReserve Act ordered all gold and gold backed certificatesheld by the Federal Reserve be surrendered to the U.S.TREASURY. The gold was sent to Fort Knox and otherlocations.

From then on a U.S. dollar wasprinted paper with an intrinsic valueequivalent to Monopoly Money. Theonly thing making the FED work isthat everyone went on playing the

game and following the rules. Everyone continued pretend-ing a dollar was worth something. Faith is an amazing andpowerful pillar of “reality”.

Here is another view ofreality. This chart ofpurchasing power of thedollar demonstrateshow the American dollarhas continued to de-cline. Note specificallythe continuing fall after1950. The continual fallin value of the dollar has

been ongoing since the FED came into existence. Theeconomy was not going into financial panic but the dollarwas on a continuing decline in value.

Then in 1956 something was added to the printed papercalled U.S. Currency. "In God we trust" was adopted as theofficial motto of the United States and since 1957 has beenadded to all U.S. paper currency. The new motto invokingGod replaced the unofficial motto of the American Republic,since the adoption of the Great Seal of the United States in1782. The old motto was “E pluribus unum”, Latin for "Out ofmany, one".

Why this change was made is really conjecture. But itcertainly fit, didn’t it? The funny money was backed by God.Have faith. It works. Do not worry. Continue to whisper in the

228

lobbies of the financial cathedrals. God is there with you. Itsays so on the paper everyone wants. But the dollar’s valuecontinues to decline. Faith in the dollar worldwide haswaned.

1764

How did we get to this place of a financial system basedupon faith? It started with a law passed in 1764 by theEnglish Parliament. For Americans it is the most importantlaw ever passed. The law in part states,

“...no act, order, resolution, or vote ofassembly, in any of his Majesty’s colonies orplantations in America, shall be made, forcreating or issuing any paper bills, or bills ofcredit of any kind or denominationwhatsoever...”

The law prevented the American colonies from printing theirown money to use as legal tender for all debts, public andprivate. Take out a dollar bill and look at the left top. In thesmall print you will see the following statement, “THIS NOTEIS LEGAL TENDER FOR ALL DEBTS, PUBLIC AND PRI-VATE.” The American Revolution was waged for the soleright to print that statement on paper.

Without the right to print their own currency, the Americanshad to use gold or silver coins or bartered items to conductany kind of commerce. And this might have been okayexcept the English government was demanding the paymentof a variety of taxes. Without gold or silver the only way topay for such taxes was by using the only accepted LegalTender, which was the currency printed by the Central Bankof England. To pay the taxes a Colonist had to borrowEnglish money.

By restricting the Americans ability to conduct daily busi-ness, the economy began to stagger. The relatively smallsupply of gold and silver coins available soon disappeared topay taxes. Really stupid. The Americans had no option otherthan revolt. The result was the American Revolution. Thenew Republic was built upon a Constitution giving Congressthe power to coin money. Our nation was not born becauseof a tax on tea. It was born because of the currency

229

demanded to pay the tax.

Money

The first American paper currency had been issued in 1690by the government of the Massachusetts Bay Colony.Everything was just fine until that stupid 1764 English law. Ittook over a decade for the American economy to get so badthat a revolt was demanded. Those in revolt established agovernment that would replace the English Parliament andcalled it the Continental Congress. To finance its war, theContinental Congress began printing the ContinentalCurrency in 1775. But without gold or silver or the faith of thepeople to back this tender it soon failed.

The only thing working was coins containing differentamounts of gold or silver. If you had 100% of the preciousmetals in a coin, there would be no standard price oraccepted value of a given coin because of the fluctuations inmarket value of the gold or silver. Over time the amount ofprecious metals in coins has been continually decreased.But the people have grown to have “faith” that a given coinwas worth a predetermined amount. But coins areproblematic when large amounts of money is needed. Apaper note stating it could be exchanged for a specificamount of gold or silver was the only way large financialtransactions could occur.

The Republic’s Constitution or “Law of the Land” did not getadopted until 1789 or six years after Independence fromEngland. Within three years the United States Mint wasestablished and the first coins began to be minted containinga set percentage of gold or silver in each coin. The FirstBank of the United States had already been designated in1791 and Congress authorized it to issue paper bank notes.By establishing a standard paper monetary system tradewould be simplified.

That of course was in theory. In fact anyone could issue apiece of paper claiming it could be exchanged for gold orsilver upon demand. With little regulation, private banksproliferated. By 1836 there was an estimated 1600 banksoperating with over 30,000 varieties of paper legal tender.

A small local type economy can operate rather well with a

230

bank holding gold and silver reserves that can be claimed byanyone holding one of its paper notes. Trade is simplified.The problem begins when the bank realizes no one isclaiming the gold and silver. There is no longer any reasonto ensure the total of the issued paper notes equals theamount of gold/silver kept in the bank. Faith alone is backingthe paper money.

Still not a problem. The bank just has to keep a sufficientamount of gold/silver on hand in case anyone actually wantsto claim it. But what happens if everyone wants to exchangethe paper for metal? Well that would be a run on the bankand the bank would fail.

The Federal Reserve Act

And there were large bank failures due to financial panics in1863 and 1907. By 1913 the U.S. Congress created theFederal Reserve System to control the amount of money incirculation and define credit rules for economic growth andstability. The paper money produced is called FederalReserve Notes, which have that statement in small print,“THIS NOTE IS LEGAL TENDER FOR ALL DEBTS, PUBLICAND PRIVATE.”

Since its original creation many changes have been made inthe Federal Reserve System (also called the FederalReserve or just the Fed). The Federal Reserve Board iscomprised of seven individuals chosen by the AmericanPresident and confirmed by Congress. While the Boardoversees daily business, the group that decides monetarypolicy is a separate committee called the Federal OpenMarket Committee or the FOMC. This group is comprised ofthe seven Board members and the Presidents of each of thetwelve regional banks.

While Congress has some oversight powers over the Fed,the FED acts as a private entity regarding virtually all of itspolicies and operations. Thus the FED is both a public andprivate entity.

The FED is also the bank for all other banks by becomingthe lender of last resort. And when the FED lends money itmakes interest on that money. The FED determines whatinterest to charge based upon economic health. Higher

231

interest rates come when there are inflationary pressures.Low interest rates are used when the economy is weak. Thenet profit on interest made by the FED is transferred to theU.S. Treasury. So the FED is a profit making entity just asany commercial bank.

Let us take a look at the larger picture. You deposit 3 dollars.The bank lends out 2 dollars based upon your deposit. Sothe total money supply has actually been increased by 2dollars: your 3 dollar deposit is still recorded and another 2dollars have been entered into circulation by the loan of 2dollars. Then they add the interest on the 2 dollar loan at,let’s say 25 cents per dollar. Thus your 3 dollars hasmagically been transformed into a total of $5.50.

If too much money ends up being magically created, theFED will increase the amount of interest charged. At higherinterest maybe no one will want a $2 loan based upon your$3 deposit. If the economy is going really well and manypeople need $2 loans in the booming economy, the FED willdecrease the interest making it more affordable but alsoincreasing the amount of money put into circulation basedupon increasing loans. The more money in circulation theless each dollar is worth. In the worst of cases you havehyperinflation where, as in Germany just before World WarII, a wheel barrel full of money would buy a loaf of bread.

The fact is this financial system is designed to increase debt.For every dollar loaned there is interest created that is notbased upon the actual money in circulation. This is calledmonetizing debt. Debt creates money.

More Powerful Than a Standing Army

Way back in 1941 during a hearing before the Congress’sHouse Committee on Banking and Currency, MarrinerEccles was testifying as the then Governor of the FederalReserve Board. He was asked where the FED got themoney to buy government bonds. Here is how it went:

M. Eccles: “We created it.” Eccles replied.

W. Patman: “Out of what?”

M. Eccles: “Out of the right to issue credit money.”

W. Patman: “And there is nothing behind it, is there,

232

except our Government’s credit?”

M. Eccles: “That is what our money system is...ifthere were no debts in our money system,there wouldn’t be any money.

Kind of scary, isn’t it? Money out of nothing except faith inthe U.S. Government’s credit worthiness. As I write this inJune 2011, the U.S. Congress is debating whether or not toraise the U.S. Government’s debt ceiling. If the U.S. cannotincrease the debt, it cannot pay its bills and its credit is shot.The house of paper will come crashing down worldwide.Faith is said to be able to move mountains. It appears Faithcan also build worldwide financial systems.

Remember how we began this discussion with the stupidEnglish law requiring the American colonies to go into debtwith the Central Bank of England in order to pay taxes? Oneof the Founding Fathers forced into revolution by the lawwas Thomas Jefferson. He once said,

And I sincerely believe...that bankingestablishments are more dangerous thanstanding armies; and that the principle ofspending money to be paid by posterity,under the name of funding, is but swindlingfuturity on a large scale.

Jefferson and the others who fought for independence havebeen betrayed. America is not independent. The FED ownsit. The American people are not free. They own their wellbeing, if not their souls, to the Fed.

But the FED was established to bring stability to the econ-omy. Well how has it gone? The average recession or outright panic before the FED was every 15 years. After theFED was in charge, an average of every 7 years there hasbeen a recession, panic, crisis and/or economic depression.But the FED has impacted upon the duration of each of theevents. Before the FED the average duration of a crisis was48 months. After the FED the duration has averaged 21months. That is a good thing. Or is it?

The Agriculture Depression

Let us take a look back and see what the consequence were

233

of a couple of these bad economic events. A year after theFED was established in 1914 thru 1919 the FED increasedthe money supply by lowering interests during the timeperiod of the First World War. Small banks and individualstook out loans at the low interest and the U.S. economygrew. Even the farmers were doing exceptionally well. Farmmortgages had been paid off and the U.S. governmentpromoted expansion of farm lands. The farmers obliged bytaking out loans to buy more farm land.

Then on the 18th of May 1920 the Secret Society of theFederal Reserve Board met in a secret meeting that was notmade public although it lasted all day. In the 1923 SenateDocument 310 the effect of that meeting was summarizedas, “...there resulted a violent contraction of credit.”

The effect was hardship all around except for the big FEDBanks and the big Member Banks. This is known as theAgriculture Depression 1920-1921. And while the bankfailures were not as numerous as those during the GreatDepression a decade later, banks outside the FederalReserve System collapsed along with many farmers andsmall business. The FED banks were given loans by theFED to survive and actually prosper. The money for thoseloans were printed by the U.S. Treasury and issued by theFED, which actually means the U.S. tax payer bailed out theFED banks (sound familiar?).

The Roaring Twenties

The Agriculture Depression ended when the FED loweredinterest rates and thus promoting loans resulting in moremoney in circulation. This era of credit expansion is calledthe “Roaring Twenties”. Individuals and banks took onnumerous loans during this economic good time. During thedecade of the 1920's consumers took out loans fo buy allsorts of goods from cars to radios. This in turn pushed newtechnology and new products which also required loans bysmall and growing bigger manufacturing and technologycompanies.

With such easy money and growing manufacturing andtechnology sectors, the Stock Market grew more lucrative.The escalating Stock Market brought in more brokers and

234

more innovative ways of enticing the consumer to play thegame.

The brokers would let you play if you put down a fraction of astock’s value and lend you the rest to buy stocks. To coverthemselves, broker loans could be called in at any time andyou had 24 hours to pay off the loan. If this happened, mostsimply sold the stock. By the end of the decade a bubble ofspeculation and tenuous loans had created a nation ofconsumers flying high.

The Great Depression

At the end of the summer 1929 some of the richest people inAmerica, such as J.D. Rockefeller, Bernard Baruch, J.P.Morgan, Joseph P. Kennedy, Henry Morganthau, andDouglas Dillon to name just a few, had the knowledge eitherby divine inspiration or insider trading to begin quietly sellingtheir stocks. Earlier in the year Montagu Norman, Governorof the Bank of England, had secretly gone to the FED for ameeting. He is quoted as saying of that meeting, “In the nextfew months there is going to be a shake-out.”

That “shake-out” began in earnest on October 24th, 1929.The quiet selling of stocks by the rich had taken its toll.Financiers who had loaned money for stock buys to thebrokers and consumers began demanding the loans becalled in. To pay the loans more stocks were sold and bankcustomers turned to their deposits to pay for the stock loans.

A massive run on the banks put thousands of them injeopardy. The FED could have stepped in and loweredinterest and issued more money as loans to the threatenedbanks. By law the FED was mandated to maintain an “elasticcurrency”. Instead the FED went on to decrease the amountof money in circulation by 1/3rd from 1929-1933.

Consumers lost all their savings and thousands of bankscollapsed. Some of those banks were bought up by the largebanks at a massive discount. Not satisfied in destroying somany banks and consumers, the powers behind this tragedydecided to completely rob the American people.

At that time, the Gold Standard was in place and the dollarcould still be exchanged for gold. The law required that therebe a 40% gold backing be kept at Fort Knox behind the total

235

amount of money in circulation. If too many people begandemanding gold for dollars, the U.S. Treasury would belimited on how much money it could print. This was a way tocontrol inflation.

By April 1933 people were three and a half years intodepression and had little faith remaining. That is when FDRissued the emergency decree and stole the AmericanPeoples gold.

President James Garfield who was assassinated in 1881after only six months as President of the U.S. seemed tounderstand the problem. He is quoted as saying, “Whoevercontrols the volume of money in any country is absolutemaster of all industry and commerce.” If Garfield wascorrect, the FED became the absolute master in 1933. WithFDR’s destruction of the Gold Standard, there was and is nopractical restraint upon the Fed.

Now earlier I focused upon the ups and downs of interest tocontrol the amount of money in circulation. This was an oversimplification. The FED actually has a much more effectiveway of adding money into the economy. When the U.S.government needs more money to wage a war or something,the Treasury issues bonds that are then auctioned off bybond dealers. When the FED needs to expand the amount ofmoney in circulation it buys up bonds. It gets the paper andcoin to do this from the Treasury and its U.S. Bureau of theMint and Bureau of Engraving and Printing.

Is that crazy or what? Need money - print a bond and thenhave the FED buy up the bond with money that you printed.WTF!

Okay, getting back to increasing money in circulation. TheFED buys the bonds and then uses those bonds as if theywere deposits. Then they loan out money to the other banksat an interest. Add to this the concept of interest and itscontrol over how much loaning is accomplished and youhave the makings of a control over money in circulation.

And to think that when it all started to come apart in theRecession starting in 2007, U.S. taxpayer bailed the banksout because they were “too big to fail”! Why did we allow it tocome down to this that the Government of the United States

236

was allowed to be silently taken over by the Government ofU.S. Banks and Industry? It is because the Super Con-sciousness of humanity is dominated by greed resulting fromsystematic fear mongering by six corporations and a slew ofbankers and politicians.

So maybe the Black Nobles are the International BankingCabala, the Media and Industrialists. They certainly fit thebill. But as evil as they are, they just do not seem evilenough. It also began looking like there might be relativelydifferent groups comprising the Black Nobles.

By 2010 the Internet was exploding as a source of research.Somewhere along the line, I fell down a rabbit hole.

237

4 - Down the Rabbit Hole

I was led to contact a coworker from the Army. It wasSeptember 2001 and the last time we spoke was back in1976. Todd had stayed in the Army as a civilian and wasworking at the Pentagon. We spoke for about 25 minutes.

During the conversation he mentioned he had just moved hisoffice for the third time, due to construction being done onthe building. Todd said this had been ongoing for threeyears. They were reconstructing the building by sections, tomake it able to withstand a missile attack.

Three days later it was September 11, 2001. Realizing thecrazy flight path taken by the Pentagon plane had ended uphitting the very wall under construction was like a smokinggun. Whoever planned the attack was intent on hitting thePentagon, not on creating the greatest degree of destructionpossible. I had information about the Pentagon plane attackthrough a very contrived source. I again felt I was being ledto the locks that would unlock the secrets.

My whole life became focused on how this horrendous eventcould have transpired. During the next nine years I res-earched the researchers.

THE 9/11 CRUSADE

In June 2010 Tracy led me to realize my book on Kennedyand Jesus had been taken off the Internet. This pissed meoff and I started writing what has become Book Two of thisbook.

But then I was explaining what was wrong with the U.S.Government’s explanation for why the Twin Towers fell to acoworker. As most others, this person found a reason toleave the room. I asked myself, “Wonder what would happenif you were on a car trip with someone who was a 9/11

238

Conspiracy buff and you were not?” Six months later Ipublished a novel.

Everything went right. There was nothing happening at workand I got paid while I wrote. It had been nine years sinceSeptember 11, 2001 and I already had compiled a vastamount of research. All I needed were characters and a plot.That oh so helpful voice in the head provided both.

But even more astounding were the details of the attack thatcame into focus. As had happened throughout my life,chance encounters with a piece of information led to anotherpiece and another and finally I knew how the entire attackscenario played out.

Within the concept of a novel I was able to get into theheads of those who actually orchestrated it. Most people arejust very good at the core. Most people could not accept theconcept that the 9/11 attacks were designed to put theAmerican people into such a state of fear they would giveover huge amounts of their freedoms and smile while saying,“Thank you for making me safe.” I had to make people doingevil things understandable, before the America people couldgrasp the fact that basically good people could be led to dounbelievable evil acts.

But before I tell you what really happened, let us analyzewhat the official explanation is regarding the falling towersthat concluded: Each tower was hit by a commercial aircraftfull of fuel for a trip to California. The fuel caused structuralfailures that resulted in the entire collapse of both 110 storytowers.

We all saw it happen and the National Commission onTerrorist Attacks Upon the United States, the government’shand-picked group to investigate the event, told us what wesaw. There was something relieving to have The 9/11Commission Report come out 442 days later. As horrendousas the event was we could let it go. We now knew what wehad lived through. Problem is the event of collapsing floors isnot only a fabrication, it is an impossibility.

The Big Lie

(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Big_Lie):

239

The Big Lie is a propaganda technique.The expression was coined by AdolfHitler, in the dedication of his 1925 bookMein Kampf. The term refers a lie so"colossal" no one would believe anyone"could have the impudence to distort the

truth so infamously."

Read that a few more times. It exactly describes the epic lieperpetrated on the world regarding 9/11.

Think of each tower asbeing a silo within a biggersilo. The two silos were tiedtogether by steel beamscalled “trusses”. The floorson top of the trussescomprised an acre of officespace. Aircraft fires weresuppose to have melted

steel, causing trusses in the impact area to fail resulting inthe floor to begin falling. All of the floors above thiscollapsing floor went with it. This combined weight causedthe floor beneath the impact area to fail. And in a cascadingeffect, all the lower floors also collapsed due to the fallingupper floors. That is the official version.

Page 305 of The 9/11 CommissionReport states, "At 9:58:59, the SouthTower collapsed in ten seconds....” TheSouth Tower was impacted betweenfloors 77-85. So let us just think aboutthe collapse of 77 floors or 77 hits. Clapyour hands 77 times in 10 seconds. Ifyou cannot find anyone who can

accomplish this task, then the official U.S. explanation forthe collapse of the Twin Towers is impossible.

Our government told us such a colossal lie we had tobelieve, because our imaginations could not possiblycomprehend someone distorting the truth about such a worldchanging event, watched by billions over and over again. Butthey did.

Adolf Hitler

240

Someone banked on the American people being sotraumatized by the events of 9/11 that an epic lie could betold and believed by those who desperately needed anexplanation, no matter how impossible. It worked.

Already America is being seen as the world’s aggressor. TheUnited States treasure has been thrown into the fire ofmultiple wars. All this was possible because of all the liesbegun on September 11, 2001. We were suckered by apropaganda technique devised by Adolf Hitler. And the lieswere repeated over and over again by Mass Media -including the History Channel.

So what did happen?

American Airlines AA11 took off from Boston’s Logan Airporton a flight to California. Twenty-one minutes into the flightthe aircraft was detected going off course by ground basedradar. Not only was there no response to radio calls, AA11had stopped transmitting its transponder signal. AA11 wasno longer sending its identification signal providing informa-tion on location and speed. Ground controllers guiding theflight paths of all aircraft were not able to accurately track theBoston airliner. All the ground was seeing was the radarreturn signal providing an inaccurate location. AA11 wasnow a danger to all other aircraft in the area.

At 8:20, when AA11 began to go offcourse, the airliner started veeringnorth of its scheduled flight path. Theplane was located between Albanyand Lake George, New York when itsuddenly took a 100-degree turn tothe south. AA11was headed directlytoward New York City. For the next

26 minutes the aircraft flew south, above the Hudson River,following the river until the north side of the North Tower ofthe World Trade Center was visible. AA11 flew directly intothe center of the glass wall and disappeared forever.

The impact came at 8:46:26. The North Tower had been hitbetween the 94th and 98th floors. AA11 had been flying anestimated speed of 490 miles per hour when it collided withthe tower. A vibration ran through the building into the

AA11 flight path

241

ground and was intercepted by seismographs at a number oflocations. It was equivalent to a magnitude 0.9 earthquakeand too small to be felt on the streets of New York.

The second airliner to take off from thesame runway as AA11 was UnitedAirlines Flight 175. It had also taken offfor California, fifteen minutes afterAA11. All communications were alsolost with this aircraft. United 175 flewsoutheasterly along the east edge ofPennsylvania. As it crossed into New

Jersey airspace, United 175 reversed course, turning backtoward New York on a northeasterly heading.

It then began descending at 10,000 feet per minute towardthe city, again endangering numerous other aircraft. Thelast radar reading on United 175 showed the plane to be atan altitude of 18,000 feet and descending in a power dive. Itwas United 175 that fly into view on millions of televisionsand impact the South Tower between the 77th and 85thfloors at a speed of over 500 MPH.

Now stop and think about this scenario. How is it possible formen who had never even passed pilot school in a small, oneengine plane to have accomplished either of this flights?Well guys, that was the second colossal, impossible lie.

Don’t believe me? Go visit http://pilotsfor911truth.org/ whereprofessional pilots will explain why none of the three flightpaths could likely have been executed by even trained pilots.

So if there were not terrorists flying those planes, who orrather what was?

Waypoints, GPS, WAAS

An attack against a military target might not be enough toinfuriate the American public. There had been dozens ofterrorist attacks against American military forces that madevery little impact upon the American psyche. It was then theTwin Towers became targets, and that was primarilybecause the towers were navigational “waypoints”.

Waypoints have been around ever since mankind begannavigating. Early hunters followed routes marked by trees,

United 175 flight path

242

rocks, water or a variety of natural objects. Early pilotsfollowed roads or rivers and water towers with names oftowns painted on them were real favorites. With the adventof radio signals, waypoints took on new dimensions.

It began in World War II. Aircraft receiverswould pick up radio signals from groundbased transmitters. The receivers analyzedthe signals and determined if the plane wasflying toward or away from a given trans-mitter. As electronic systems improved,speed and location of the plane becamedeterminable. By the end of the TwentiethCentury, radio navigation systems were allover the world and the primary way ofnavigation for both air and sea.

With the advent of satellites, GlobalPositioning Systems or GPS becamea reality. The U.S. Department ofDefense began development of GPSin 1973 to enhance both air and seanavigation. Instead of land basedtransmitters, a 24 satellite systemwould be created. Congress agreedto fund the massive project because

of Cold War military navigation by submarines and aircraftwith missiles and the missiles themselves.

The first GPS satellite was launched in 1989 and the twenty-fourth in 1994. By September 2001 GPS navigation wasproviding civilian aircraft precision of 65 feet (20 meters).

By 9/11, 2012 the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) hadaugmented the upgraded GPS system by adding the Wide

Area Augmentat ion System(WAAS). WAAS uses two types ofground-based stations. One is areference station monitoring GPSsignals and the second type aremaster stations. Measurementsfrom reference stations are for-warded to a master station thatanalyses small variations in GPS

If radio signal wasgetting stronger,plane was flyingtoward it.

243

satellite signals due to atmospheric and other reasons. Thatanalysis results in a correction message being sent togeostationary, orbiting WAAS satellites. These satellitesthen broadcast the corrected signal to obtain even moreaccuracy.

By December 1999 WAAS signals were being transmittedfrom WAAS satellites for testing purposes. By September2001, aircraft equipped with a WAAS receiver could hit atarget within 6 feet horizontally by 10 feet vertically. Each ofthe Twin Towers was 208 feet wide.

Highway In the Sky

The “Highway In the Sky” had also beendeveloped during the 1990's. Using theconcept of waypoints merged with GPS andWAAS technology, aircraft began flyinginside virtual tunnels. These virtual routesnever vary more than half the wingspan ofa Boeing 737.

Waypoints can be “fly-over” or “fly-by” andare simply coordinates of three dimen-sions. It was the old concept of a watertower marking the route. In 2001 it took a larger marker suchas an airport or the highly visible Twin Towers that occupiedwaypoint coordinates. All that was needed on 9/11was acommand making the tower’s waypoint coordinate a termi-nation instead of a fly-by/fly-over.

Just a month after 9/11, Cubic Defense Systems, Inc. ap-plied for a patent on an anti-hijacking system capable ofdeactivating the onboard flight controls and remotely takingover control of a hijacked aircraft. It would simply takeactivation of a panic button by the flight crew.

A virtual panic button was already an integral part of theaircraft. In case of a hijacking, pilots were trained to punchin four numbers that would add to the transponder’s code awarning on the ground based radar screen. Next to theradar blip on the screens would be “HJCK”. On 9/11/2001none of the Flight Control Centers received the hijack signalfrom any of the four hijacked planes.

I believe the flight crews did punch in the codes, but by then

244

the code was linked to the anti-hijack system that had beensecretly installed in their aircraft. Pilots of the Boston planesand the one that hit the Pentagon probably did sent the codeonly to realize they had lost complete control over theiraircraft. The Pentagon plane American Airlines Flight 77 alsowent through a flight path that was so outrageous manythink it was a missile flying and not AA77. Not believable thata novice pilot could have accomplished it.

It appears the take over of automatic control of the planeUnited 93 that crashed in Pennsylvania did not occur. Myinterpretation of the data is the terrorist patsies did actuallytry to fly the Pennsylvania plane.

If I am correct, the actual timing of the planned event wouldbe dictated by satellite positions. The hijacking attacksrequired absolute electronic precision flying. To acquire thatlevel of perfection the GPS/WAAS satellites would providethe required navigational control. The more satellites themore accuracy.

The Attack

They would have planned backwards from the satellitecoverage. On September 11th they had a window in NewYork where fourteen to fifteen satellites would be visibleproviding a maximum coverage for navigation. They thenwould have determined which long-range flights coming outof Boston would be taking off in time to make it to New Yorkto fit into the window. That window was only fifteen minutes.

245

Initially they probably would have settled for any aircraftflying near or toward New York City. But if they realized theycould get maximum effect if the aircraft were fully loadedwith fuel. Only an aircraft flying to California would fit thatdescription. Luckily they had two California bound aircraftscheduled to take off from Boston that could make the fifteenminute window in New York City. One was American AirlinesFlight 11 and the other was United Flight 175.

They would have planned for maximum satellite coveragebecause it was something they could count on. Weatherwas another story. Clouds could produce navigationalerrors. While fewer satellites could deliver acceptablenavigational parameters in a cloudy atmosphere for aircraftwith pilots or with targets that were much less narrowlydefined, the goal was to plow two aircraft into the center ofeach of the Twin Towers without a pilot.

So what we have is the planes navigational and com-munication systems were replaced by an automatedprogram when the hijack warning code was punched in. Thatsystem was using the GPS/WAAS Highway In the Skysystem to dictate the flight path. Instead of the Twin Towersbeing Fly-By waypoints they became termination points.

While no pilot could have executed the flight patterns thatallowed United 175 to hit the second tower, the automatedsystem had only a slight problem. Instead of striking thetower in the center, it almost missed and at the last momentadjusted enough to take out the corner section of the SouthTower.

When the hijack code was put in by a pilot, a signal wasbroadcasted that may have activated something onboard orperhaps it was received by whoever was orchestrating theterror. It was like a knock on a door, followed by the doorbeing opened. An automatic reply sent from the bad guyscould have started up an entirely new set of electronicparameters through the open door.

Let us look at the first Boston plane after the hijacking codewas punched in by the pilot. AA11 could no longer com-municate normally nor be controlled manually and theautomatic flight system data was replaced with new

246

information.

The aircraft was automatically turned to intersect an elec-tronic virtual tunnel system. AA11 was on a preselectedroute being controlled by the automatic flight system thatwas continually connected to the GPS/WAAS satellitesproviding exact navigational data. The aircraft was flyingitself.

They did not have to do much to the weaponized aircraft atall. Since 1998 all Boeing 757 and 767 aircraft owned byAmerican Airlines and United Airlines were upgraded withthe Pegasus. The Pegasus Flight Management System wasdesigned to fly virtual tunnels using the waypoint routeconcept. The Twin Towers were located on one of thosewaypoints. The Rockwell-Collins Multi-Mode Receivers hadbeen retrofitted beginning in 1996, and that gave the aircraftaccess to both the GPS and WAAS satellite signals fornavigation.

The only change required to electronically hijack the aircraftwas to install an electronic module capable of connectingwith the outside and then overriding the programed flightsystems with new information. Activation of that module wastied to the transponder system and would be activated uponentry of the hijack code.

Instead of flying a direct westward flight path across NewYork state, AA11 flew a more northerly westward flight pathtoward Albany, New York. At that point it made an abrupt100 degree turn to enter the southbound virtual tunnel thatended at waypoint Twin Towers. After the turn just north-west of Albany, it was a straight shot.

The second Boston plane United 175's flight was way morecomplex. The standard flight took United 175 through avirtual tunnel moving away from Boston southwesterly. Itwould pass over south central Massachusetts, thenorthwestern corner of Connecticut, over south New YorkState and north New Jersey. Just past Newark in north NewJersey, United 175 would normally pick up the westwardvirtual tunnel that it would take to California. However, on9/11, at the juncture of the two virtual tunnels just southwestof Newark, United 175 left its designated flight path.

247

Having already flown southwest of New York City andNewark, the aircraft reversed course to attack the TwinTowers from the south. The aircraft made a 90 degree turnto the southeast flying over the far east edge ofPennsylvania. As it crossed from Pennsylvania back intoNew Jersey, the plane made another 90 degree turn andhead directly for New York and waypoint Twin Towers.

The final moments of each airliner’s flight path werecontrolled beyond just the waypoint location. AA11 was tohit the North Tower. United 175 was to hit the South Tower.This was to be truly precision bombing. And it was.

Dynamite

When the second plane flew into the South Tower I knew Iwas witnessing a Black Noble operation. The suddenemotional reaction to the second attack catapulted my mindto a heightened level. I had telepathically connected tosomeone’s mind that understood what was happening andwhat was planned.

The first time this “spontaneous telepathic link / remoteviewing occurred while I was taking a nap. My best friendhad a car accident and I abruptly awoke having had this“dream” of the accident. I never said anything when shecalled to tell me about the accident.

The second time this had happened to mewas in 1986 when the Shuttle Challengerblew up. I had not been following the newsof the flight nor that it was taking the firstcivilian teacher into space.

The moment I saw it explode on television,my mind was inside the spacecraft. I waslooking at an Asian looking face behind the

clear facemask of the space suit, which turned out to beEllison Onizuka. He was staring at a woman astronaut andthinking, “Why now. Why with Christa with us.”

Then I was looking at the pilot who was looking out a shat-tered windshield and screaming, “We are still flying!!!”

I then found myself outside the cockpit which had survivedthe explosion intact. I watched it crash into the sea. This

248

spontaneous remote viewing event has been collaborated,but I told people what I saw long before NASA admitted theirastronauts had not died instantaneously in the explosion andthe cockpit had hit the water intact.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Space_Shuttle_Challenger_disaster

While not leaving my body on 9/11, I made a spontaneoustelepathic link with some unknown mind focusing on theevents transpiring in New York City. I did not fight theimages. That mind was contemplating destruction of thetowers. By the time the South Tower fell, I had envisioned ithappen twice before. It was like the mind I was connected towas thinking to destroy and then hesitated. I visually saw ithappen as I watched it on the TV only to have the buildingstill standing a moment later. The third time there was nohesitation and the building falling had turned into a realevent.

I was so aware of what was about to happen that I saw thebursts of white smoke right under the area of the tower thatwas on fire. It was white smoke and that is only seen whendynamite explodes in concrete. I started yelling, “Look at thesmoke. That has to be dynamite!” A moment later thebuilding began falling.

Dr. Judy Wood and DEW

So in the novel I had planting of the dynamite as an integralpart of the story. Then I ended up studying Dr. Judy Wood’stheory of what caused the destruction of the towers and myworld went into weird overdrive. (http://www.drjudywood.com/)

It was the melted cars that sold me. At least a hundred cars,some a mile away, were simply melted. Engine blocks anddoor handles melted while the rest of the car looksuntouched. And the fact that no doors, telephones, and onlyone filing cabinet in two towers were uncovered in therubble. The only thing found was plastic. Why was metaldestroyed while paper and plastic survived? And the rubblepile itself was a fraction of what it should have been.

Dr. Wood provides a comprehensive case that both towerswere destroyed by a “Direct Energy Weapon”. The fact theycame down in 10 seconds is because the molecules withinthe structures began vibrating to a point where the structures

249

defined by the molecules disintegrated. The molecularcohesion of matter had been shattered.

Had I been wrong about the secret demolition systeminstalled in the towers? Or was there a second player thatday? In the novel THE 9/11 CRUSADE there was a secondplayer. But that is only fiction. Or is it?

What I can say for sure is that most Americans have nevercontemplated the explanation they were given. As thecontrolled Mass Media never told them about much of whatyou have just read and oh so much more, the Americanpeople do not know what they do not know.

Most Americans do not know how many freedoms were lostor weakened by the Patriot Act that was a result of 9/11. Andmost Americans do not have a clue that the whole, tragicevent may have been designed, at least in part, to enragethe American people to wage unprovoked war against Iraq.

Operation Iraqi Freedom

March 2013 marked the 10th anniversary of the beginning ofthe Iraq War. It is hard to forget the images on that first nightof “Shock and Awe”. And awe it was. For some it was awewith varying degrees of terror. At the opposite end werethose who found a sense of pride welling up that theircountry was so powerful.

But do you remember the time before and the events that setus on a collision course with Shock and Awe and a decadeof death and loss of treasure? Sort of? Yes, and all of thedetails? Ah, not so much?

I thought I knew. But when I took a look back I found myselfembarrassed. It was pathetically easy for lies to lead us towar. Funny thing is, I knew they were lies. But even I whohas been a “Conspiracy Nut” for 50 years thought there mustbe SOMETHING critical behind the Leaders rushing to war.From the Presidential group to the Congress someoneMUST know something I did not know, because it was aState Secret.

And when the months moved into years, and no weapons ofmassive destruction were found, I found myself hopingSOMETHING would be found. Something that could justify

250

the pillaging of American lives and money and murder ofIraqi civilians.

I got though those ten years like many other Americans. Ihonored the troops, did not think about the Iraqi civilians,and said, “Well, what can I do?” And the answer came to mein the form of the Internet. I could learn what the heck wasreally going on, with others also searching for answers.

Then Rachael Maddow had a special called “Hubris: Sellingthe Iraq War” that aired on MSNBC last month. Afterwatching her pick apart the lies and deceit that led us to war,I researched the details. Not because I doubted her analysis,but in a desperate attempt to figure out how those lies hadworked.

Let us take a look back at those lies.

The Four Lies

Lie number 1: They made a connection to 9/11 and Iraqbased upon a supposed meeting between alleged hijackerpilot Mohamed Atta and the Iraqi Consulate in Prague whowas claimed to be an Iraqi intelligence agent. This claimcame from a source that was considered untrustworthy. Allother evidence indicated that Hussein was actually fearful ofAl-Qaeda.

Lie number 2: They claimed Iraq had purchased aluminumtubing for use in creating nuclear weapons - but that chargewas completely proven false as the aluminum tubes weresimply too thick to be used in developing an uraniumcentrifuge.

Lie number 3: In spite of documents showing Iraq wasbuying uranium ore from Niger were proven forgeries, Bushused the State of the Union Address to tell the world thatHussein was buying this yellow brick to pursue plans fornuclear weapons.

Lie number 4: Hussein already had since the late 1990'sseveral mobile biological weapons labs. But this informationcame from an Iraqi emigrant living in Germany who wasknown as being so unreliable his codename was Curveball.

Now those are the primary lies. But just as arrogant was thefact that, in spite of the UN refusing to sanction a preemptive

251

war, the U.S. was joined by the United Kingdom, Australiaand Poland to physically invade Iraq. WHY?

Why did the U.S. Congress vote in the Iraq War Resolutionin October 2002? There were the four lies. Added to thatwas Hussein’s brutality against his own people. And we hadfriends in the area who were threatened by attacks fromHussein - he was no fool and he had the crap kicked out ofhim after he attacked Kuwait in 1990. And Hussein hadcontinued jerking around the U.N. Weapon Inspectors. 133no votes in the House and 23 no votes in the Senate.Everyone else voted to attack a people that had donenothing what so ever to us.

The 1998 Iraq Liberation Act

And then I found something astounding. Congress hadalready agreed that Hussein needed to be overthrown andhad given $97 million to organizations that were inopposition to Hussein. It was way back in October 1998when Bill Clinton was still President. It was called the IraqLiberation Act and its stated goal was to support a transitionto democracy in Iraq. WHAT?

You remember anything about this? No? Me neither. Butremember this was before September 11, 2001 when ourreality got shaken to the core.

And you know why they passed that act? They were led tobelieve Hussein had stockpiles of chemical and biologicalweapons along with some Scud-type missiles and thecapacity to produce many more weapons. Hussein hadjerked around the UN inspectors and had failed to complywith agreed to obligations following the Gulf War whenKuwait was invaded. Does the fear sound familiar?

But Bill Clinton (not having the 9/11 excuse) came up with areal kicker. He basically challenged Congress to stand up tothe bully Saddam. Clinton said that if we did not stop himnow Hussein would think the International Community hadlost its will. Clinton promised that Hussein would continue tobuild a huge arsenal of weapon capability and said heguaranteed Hussein would use the arsenal. There were only38 people in Congress who voted against this Act.

But in fairness to Congress, they were willing to commit to a

252

plan to take down Hussein by supporting others, but theyclearly stated in the act that it was NOT authorizing the useof U.S. Military forces. When Bush got into the argument forwar, he and others continually cited the 1998 Iraq LiberationAct as reason for a preemptive war. Hussein had, after all,been warned but continued to do bad things. Ah those badthings? The four lies. Five months later we had Shock andAwe.

What Is the Real Reason for the Iraq War?

So what were the REAL reasons for attacking and occupyingIraq for 10 years? I could make an excellent case for controlof oil. Or that it was a great economic boom for somecompanies. War makes corporations tons of money. Nobodywins a war except corporations. Every war has proven this.So a war against Iraq was good business.

My personal favorite was that George Bush was on aChristian Crusade. There are extremists in all religions,including Christianity. Some Christians want to see Jesusreturn and supposedly that will not happen until there is amajor confrontation throughout the Middle East to bring onArmageddon. Bush, the Evangelist, thought he was hurryingit all along by going to war with Iraq.

Bush even tried to convince the French President Chirac tojoin him on his crusade against Iraq by citing Bible verses.Bush wove some story about how Gog and Magog of Biblicalfame needed to be defeated before some New Age beganand the Iraq War was willed by God. It confused the Frenchso bad they contacted a professor at the University ofLausanne in Switzerland for clarity. Even the professor wasconfused.

Stargate

But while I was researching all this, I kept gettingan image of a huge round object lying on a desertfloor. I finally gave into the image. To me it lookedlike a Stargate made famous by the TV show. I

Goggled “Stargate, Iraq war” and was provided with 274,000entries! The one I chose first was at thelivingmoon.com,which then led me to the Exopolitics Organizaton.http://www.exopolitics.org/Study-Paper2.htm.

253

“Expolitics” refers to policy derived from governmentsreacting to knowing about ET involvement in Earth. Thispolicy is always clandestine. This paper analyses Iraq policywithin the concept of it being dictated by expolitics. If youwatch Ancient Aliens, the paper points to the same factsused to prove beings from another planet came to Earth andwere here for a very long time.

And while reading the paper I came upon the name WilliamHenry and was absolutely thrilled. I have been a fan ofHenry who does internet radio interviews on UnknownCountry. Henry has concluded that a technological devicewhich was brought to Earth during Sumerian times waslocated in the desert of Southern Iraq.

The Expolitics article says circumstantial evidence supportsHenry’s theory that the real reason for the war was to securean ancient alien technology. The massive data presented byHistory Channel’s Ancient Aliens built on the work ofnumerous researchers absolutely demonstrates our ancientrelatives interacted with at least one ancient civilization fromanother place in the Universe.

But the really interesting “circumstantial evidence” given wasthe excavations in 2002 by a German archeological team.Expolitics saw these activities as suspicious, as the sitebeing excavated was a likely site for a Sumerian Stargate.

Now this concept of going to war with Iraq toprevent Iraq and German forces from acquiring afuturistic device from our ancient past is trulystunning. But if it did happen, it may be the reason

the U.S. just cannot seem to let Iran be. Anytime the MiddleEast seems to cool down, Iran shows up on the U.S. radarand we are again subjected to fear inducing stories aboutIran.

Iran

Another stargate in Iran? Evidence suggesting this isindicated by the U.S. history with Iran. The history is just toopeculiar.

In 1953 the CIA and British Intelligence orchestrated theoverthrow of a very successful Iranian democratic govern-ment. It was replaced by the existing monarchy of the Shaw.

254

WHY?

Most history will suggest the 1953 takeover was a directconsequence of the Iranian governments nationalization ofoil operations of a British oil company now called BP.

However that happened in 1951 and the U.S. actually bene-fitted from this nationalization. There was nothing of strategicinterest to the U.S. in changing the democratic government.

The oil nationalization was a direct results of the Britishrefusing to play fair with the democratic government of Iran.The Parliament and Prime Minister had attempted gettingthe Brits to open the books on the oil revenues to make sureIran was getting the share promised them and BP said no.So the Iranians said, okay fine then we will simplerenegotiate the terms to more favorable concessionairearrangements. When the Brits refused to renegotiate theIranians nationalized the oil assets.

Nothing really happened until 1953, under the EisenhowerAdministration, where John Foster Dulles was the Secretaryof State and his younger brother Allen was head of the CIA .And that family is very, very dirty. How dirty we have yet touncover. But we do know they hung out with some of thevery people who originally set up Black Operations. Was thisreally an overthrow of a democratic nation in the name ofoil? Or was it to gain control of Iran to find some treasure?

Since the 1979 overthrow of the Shah it has becomeincreasingly impossible to search for anything within Iran.Now it is impossible. The only way in would be to take thesame path taken in Iraq.

There is no mistaking the war posturing going on againstIran, in Washington in early 2013. Reports exist of attemptsto stage “false-flags” to create a confrontation significantenough to attack Iran. Is ancient Alien technology the realreason for a U.S. bent on occupying nations in the MiddleEast? It makes much more sense than the lies given aboutIraq and the apparent refusal for a sane and open diplomaticpolicy toward Iran. Oh, and yes try Goggling and you canresearch those sites talking about Iranian stargates.

It is easier for me to accept the existence of a stargate thanfor most of you. Not only have I seen every episode of the

255

History Channel’s Ancient Aliens, I have read DARK MIS-SION by Richard Hoagland and Mike Bara.

DARK MISSION

According to documentation presented in DARK MISSION,NASA photographed ruins on the moon with unmannedmissions in the mid-1960's. The Apollo missions confirmedthat ancient ruins were on the moon. Hoagland postulatesthat NASA saw the remains during unmanned missions.With Apollo the Astronauts saw them and brought home highquality photographs and samples of artifacts kept secret forover 60 years.

Bet you did not see that coming! While I had enormousrespect for Hoagland, I initially dismissed his stories aboutancient civilizations that had left large ruins on the moon.Then I read the book. There are ancient artifacts on themoon, no doubt about it.

You owe it to yourself to see the proof presented in DARKMISSION. Their photographic documentation must be seen.The one photo that can indicate the magnitude of what wasleft on the Moon by a very ancient civilization or civilizationsis Apollo 15 frame AS15-88-12013.

This was taken as Apollo 15 had accomplished its missionand was on its way back to Earth. Look closely at the borderbetween the Moon and the darkness of space. That fuzzylooking border looks virtually like what is seen in the photo

below from lasp.colorado.edu.

But while this second photo isdepicting the thin atmosphere ofEarth, the Moon does not have anyatmosphere. What is seen in theApollo 15 photograph is scattering of

256

diffused, reflected sunlight off a gigantic glass dome built byan an-cient civilization.

DARK MISSION provides sufficient evidence for me tobelieve there is a damaged but still standing dome made ofglass, which in the vacuum of space is a strong as steel.Under the dome is likely a massive treasure of technology.There is certainly sufficient structures standing to believesecrets from a vastly superior civilization can be captured.

DARK MISSION says the early unmanned spacecraft thathad first photographed the moon clearly showed NASA theMoon was worth the trip. The fact the Apollo missions did notfly with the state of the art color cameras to broadcastworldwide images of these awesome events, but used veryinferior black and white cameras, was to limit the ability ofanyone to see something NASA wanted kept secret. Againthe details presented in the book are compelling.

Mars

I initially doubted the validity of Hoagland’s theory of ancientartifacts on the moon, even though I was an avid fan of hissimilar pronouncements of ruins on Mars. I had studyHoagland’s first book THE MONUMENTS OF MARS: ACITY ON THE EDGE OF FOREVER and his theories ofhyperdimensional physics we experiment with, during theMagical Decade of the 1990's. But then I read the bookDARK MISSION and was totally awed by what it revealed.

The reason I read DARK MISSION was because Mars hadagain come to my attention with Hoagland bringing themessage: something was wrong with the color in the NASAphotographs. Mars is not red. It in fact looks very similar tothe Arizona desert including a blue sky!

See: http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/marte/esp_marte_56.htm

Why would NASA skew all the photos toward red? Well, toprevent anyone from seeing visible signs of life on Mars, thatis the tell-tale green of life.

Why would NASA conspire to keep evidence of other life inthe Universe a secret? Because early in the game a 1960'sstudy conducted by the Brookings Institute and NASA saidsuch knowledge would destroy the fabric of Earth society. At

257

least that was the excuse. More likely NASA was working forthe goal of POO.

Masons and NASA

DARK MISSION was a product of people with tons of highlevel contacts that this researcher never had. And with thatbehind them, Hoagland and friends were able to track theSecret Societies dominating NASA since its inception. Yes,the Freemasons have reappeared in control of NASA!

After Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin landed on the Moon,Aldrin conducted a well known communion ceremony. DARKMISSION reveals that ceremony was a Masonic ceremonyspecifically conducted at a moment in time correspondingwith certain celestial alignments. The data supporting thisclaim of NASA doing the bidding of Secret Societies isvirtually overwhelming.

To keep things simple, I am only going to refer to Masonsand not try to break down the list of Secret Societies noted inDARK MISSION. Just be aware that Freemasonry is just thepublic layer of this strange world of Secret Societies.

So let us look at why the Masons would want to keep thesecrets of Ancient Aliens. Of course it is POO. Other peoplebelieve they are the only ones in the Universe and there issome kind of life after death that is only a good thing if youobey the rules of the Ruling Class of religious leaders.Religions kept people in control. Knowledge of AncientAliens and perhaps life on Mars would destroy the religions.Powerful Masons are also bankers and industrialists andpoliticians and they would want to keep anything of valuediscovered secret for their own greedy purposes.

President Kennedy had other ideas.

JFK, Khrushchev and the Moon

NASA’s Ranger Program sent 3 spacecraft to the Moon onJanuary 26, April 23 and October 18, 1962. It is claimedeach failed to send back any video from TV cameras onboard. Two supposedly missed the moon and one had asystem failure, although it did impact the moon. Informationin the last few years indicates this may be another set of liesto keep the Moon’s secrets.

258

The President had already called for a Moon Landing onMay 21st, 1961. The month before the Soviets had sentCosmonaut Yuri Gagarin into Earth Orbit which put themahead of the U.S. in the Space Race, which had begun inOctober 1957 with the first satellite put into Earth orbitSputnik.

Sergei Khrushchev, son of the Soviet Premier, related thesome very enlightening information during a PBS interview.According to Sergei, his father was approached twice byPresident Kennedy to join in a joint venture to the moon. InJune 1961 Kennedy, at the Vienna Summit, directly askedthe Premier. Then in August 1963 Kenney again askedduring a meeting with the Soviet Ambassador Dobrinyin.

Initially the Soviet Premier rejected the idea. Khrushchevthought the Americans would realize how weak the SovietUnion really was and did not have trust in the Americans,especially after the Bay of Pigs aggression in Cuba.Kennedy made a public plea of space cooperation at theUnited Nations a month later in September. Sergei said thatin October or early November of 1963 his father told him hewas considering Kennedy’s proposal for space collaboration.But the President was assassinated on November 22.

Sergei said his father thought the space race was tooexpensive and the Americans too capable of paying foradvanced technology. And the Premier hoped such a boldpolitical move would bring understanding between the twocountries.

If my theory of Khrushchev, Kennedy and the Pope comingtogether to work for peace, this would seem to indicate atleast the Premier and President were coming together insome mutually beneficial way. DARK MISSION’s linkbetween NASA and the Freemasons might have beendiscovered by Kennedy. The President’s desire to cooperatewith Soviet scientists was well known by NASA DirectorJames Webb. It was also well known that the U.S. Congresswas totally opposed to such a move. It was certainly not apolitically correct move for a President who would be facingreelection.

But did Kennedy know of ancient artifacts on the moon?

259

Were the Ranger missions in 1962 actually able to sendvideo evidence of it and was the President aware of it? Wasprotecting potential technological treasures from the Sovietssomething Kennedy had no knowledge of, and he justwanted the worldly nuclear confrontational attitudes tochange?

I cannot answer these questions. The data is just not there.Although documents showing Kennedy had directed the CIAto give him everything they had on UFO’s does seem to beligitiment. There is a less authenticated, partially burneddocument from the CIA released by UFO hunter TimothyCooper in 1999. Cooper claimed it came from an unnamedCIA informant who had saved the document among othersfrom a fireplace where documents of his recently deceasedcoworker were being destroyed.

In that document Kennedy’s interest in the UFO informationis confirmed. But it also has been pointed out as a reason forthe Assassination. Allegedly the CIA Director in regard toUFO information wrote: “Lancer [JFK] has made some in-quiries regarding our activities, which we cannot allow.”

What was it the CIA was so concerned about protecting thatthey could not allow the President of the United Statesknowing? President Jimmy Carter was also not allowedaccess to information on UFO activities when he requestedto be briefed. For me the answer to that question came froma very far away object.

Comet Elenin

Richard Hoagland also plays a critical role in this story. I hadfound Richard on Facebook and joined his group. FacebookGroups allow people to see writings (called postings) fromtheir favorite celebrities. And in Richard’s case, he spent alot of time directly communicating with his fans.

Russian amateur astronomer Leonid Elenin discovered thecomet in December 2010, and thus its name. Comets es-sentially revolve around the Sun in orbits much larger thanthose of the planets. Elenin’s orbit took 12 thousand years toaccomplish.

By the middle of the Summer of 2011 Hoagland’s group hadbegun talking about it. Every day there was something new,

260

exciting and kind of scary. The Mayan Calendar was, afterall, ending.

My introduction to the concept of the Mayan Calendar hadcome some 30 years before. The complicated triple levelsystem was an incredibly accurate daily, weekly, and yearlycalendar. But it also was a seemingly very accurate way ofunderstanding cycles of time and that those cycles wereunending.

But what caused all the Dooms Day fuss was the calendarcould also rather accurately predict a theme for a givencycle. If a cycle was one of strife, wars would wage. If onewas of learning and upliftment, peace would prevail. Andthese themes were detailed enough to not be considered“vague”.

When it was determined by consensus that the calendarwould end on December 25th 2012, I thought this a veryinteresting piece of information, but did not think it indicatedthe world was about to end. But then it was discovered thatthe date also would have the Earth, Sun and the Center ofthe Milky Way Galaxy all in alignment. That I found ratherstartling. It seemed to indicate the Mayan knew somethingvery profound, as I do not believe in coincidence.

This all was happening around the same time Elenin wasapproaching the Sun. Predictions of the flight path indicatedit would cross Earth’s Orbital Path in a rather close approachin October 2011, after having gone around the sun andbeginning its 6 thousand year trip back to the farthest out inits orbit.

The March Japanese earthquake and tsunami had an impacton how Elenin was being viewed. Researchers had begunshowing data indicating bad things happened on earth in theform of geological events, whenever Elenin aligned with theEarth, Sun and/or Moon. Before the Japanese disaster,there were predictions that the comet’s alignment with othercelestial bodies would occur on March 15, 20011. So theywere off by 4 days. Close enough for some people to showthe comet was not what it seemed to be.

There was so much chatter about Elenin even MainstreamMedia was getting involved. So in early August NASA

261

rotated one of their two satellites revolving around the Sun.The Stereo-B spacecraft took a photo of the comet. Thecomet had a deep blue color. Well that started up a focus onthe Native American Hopi End of Time prophecies thatindicated a “blue star” would be one of the signs the end ofthe current world was near.

The Hopi legends says, “When the Blue Star Kachina makesits appearance in the heavens, the Fifth World will emerge.Okay the fact the Fourth World was ending only made for anew world to begin. Nothing much to fear. Change is aconstant.

But would the change be one of a stable transition or wasthere going to be destruction and insanity?

Through it all Hoagland’s group watched the comet getcloser. Then in August a solar flare was photographed thatactually hit the comet. NASA would later claim Elenin wasbroken up by the solar blast. Richard saw something elsehappen.

While more obvious in thecolor photograph, Richardbelieves that around thewhite circular nucleus ofthe comet, the photo-graph captures a shapethat can easily be seenas a 3-D tetrahedronforce field. The force fieldwas viewable as it inter-acted with the stream ofthe solar explosion and

its charged protons and electrons.

I had to agree that my novice eyes were seeing the samething. And it made sense that such a tetrahedron could bethe shape of a force field, based upon hyperdimensionalphysics Hoagland had championed for decades. And myselfand others had seen how powerful pyramids can be.

262

Another week went by and the latest posted video washeadlined with “Elenin course changed from unknownsource!” I clicked on a video and there was someone point-ing out what could be seen in the NASA Stereo-B spacecraftvideo.

Jupiter was to the right of the comet and almost out of sight.But visible was a movement of light that seemed to be somekind of circular shockwave coming from the direction of theplanet.

On the next frame is a massive explosion at the edge of thecircular shockwave. In the third frame the shockwave im-pacts with Comet Elenin.

263

It was the instant of seeing the explosion in the video. I wassuddenly outside a craft in deep space. I was about 3 feetfrom the very small cockpit on the left side of the pilot. Thepilot had a darkened facemask attached to the helmet. Amoment later there was a flash and the vision was gone.

This spontaneous remote viewing brought on by a shockingevent is as real as anything I have ever experienced. Yes Icould be imagining, but it certainly does not feel like that.What it felt like was I was watching a man in a craft in deepspace firing at Elenin. And it felt like he was American.

I sat back and swore, thinking, “Guess there is a SecretSpace Fleet.” When Elenin finally went by Earth on its wayback to deep space it was in pieces. Was it just a comet?Was it a spacecraft? Was it a message in a bottle sent bysomeone technologically advanced from our deep historylike Atlantis? Another mystery added to the list. But what andwho destroyed whatever it was?

The Space Fleet and Breakaway Civilization

When you have been researching as long as I have, youinevitably hear about the secret Space Fleet. Its head-quarters is linked to the infamous Area 51. Supposedly theycan navigate the solar system as well as Star Trek’sEnterprise.

If spaceflights to the Moon continued in secret and tech-nology was recovered, what would happen? Well, what

264

would happen if they had told the truth?

Remember my story of putting the copper pipe into theground and then a geometric form above it, causing a rashof lightening strikes? Well that is an example of Free Energy.Tesla blew the Colorado Electric Grid demonstrating thesame power on a grander scale.

When we were playing with energy devices we created onethat would make a quartz crystal anti-gravitational for a fewseconds. Peter was holding the crystal against the copperwire when Luke Dog walked up to him. Peter unthinkinglyreached out and touched the dog. Luke yelped like he hadbeen hurt or surprised and he ran away. Luke would nevergo to Peter after that. It was a sad thing because Luke reallyloved Peter. It is just another demonstration that these “free”energies are real - at least to a dog.

But a dog does not have to be the proof. Just Goggle “freeenergy devices that actually work”. Free Energy is real and itwould take little to bring electricity worldwide for only thecost of a small device to convert Earth Energy into usablehousehold electric current. Cars can be run on water, butwater powered cars are not allowed to be successful. Goahead and Google it.

If we know this, can you imagine what we might know fromstuff left on the Moon, in a vacuum and probably wellpreserved? Tesla’s development of Free Energy wasstopped by his money backer J.P. Morgan when the bankerrealized he would not be able to meter it for money. Thebankers and Big Oil would loose control. The illusion ofmoney would be shattered as the structures of societytwisted and turned. Everything would change.

That to me would be a very good thing.

But beyond the treasure trove on the Moon, there are storiesthat the connection between Alien technology and Americais much more direct.

It seems to have started with the recovery of the crashedsaucer shaped vehicles in Roswell New Mexico in 1947. Andmaybe there really was one alien who survived. But there islittle dispute that President Eisenhower met three times withrepresentatives of an alien race in February of 1954 at

265

Holloman Air Force Base in New Mexico.

The story goes that Eisenhower was offered much from theNordic looking ET representatives. But in turn the worldwould have to disarm and agree to essentially be subser-vient to the needs of the environment.

The next thing to happen is that a second group of ETvisitors offered the same things but with the understandingthe payment would be to allow these other visitors to operatewithout constraints. We would not have to change our way ofdoing business.

Whether a technological treasure from the Moon or an actualpartnership, this certainly would explain how technologicaladvancements in the 20th Century were unbelievably fastand futuristic. Solid state, fiber optics, microchips, laser,computers, etcetera. It happened so fast because we werebeing shown how to build from an advanced civilization.

But for a space fleet to exist, certainly new types of propul-sion would be required. And that would threaten the controlof the Petroleum Industry over the world. That would not goalong with the Black Nobles plan of POO.

And if Big Oil lost control along with religious leaders, itwould be likely new ways of healing given by the ET friendswould threaten the control waged by the American MedicalAssociation and friends. POO would be endangered.

But what of those who comprise this “Breakaway Civilization”as coined by Richard Dolan. When I was in the IntelligenceCommunity, it was a known fact that what the public got interms of technology was a good 50 years behind what wasbeing worked on by the secret scientific community. I cannotimagine how far ahead a group could be working with alientechnicians.

HAARP

I did not have to imagine. Every time I turned around I washearing about the High Frequency Active Auroal ResearchProgram known as HAARP. This is a massive subject and Irecommend you go to sincedutch.wordpress.com or look up“Dutch Since”.

The basic concept is a collection of transmitters on the

266

ground send a signal off the upper atmosphere called theionosphere. The ionosphere heats up from the radio energy.The heating of some 30 mile diameter of the ionospherecauses it to go even higher. This in turn changes thelocalized pressure systems below. It is estimated even theJet Streams can be effected or even turned. The ability ofthe transmitter array to be steerable allows the ionospherearea being heated to be changed to actually alter thedirection of the Jet Stream or other weather phenomena.

The 1990 beginning of the HAARP Program was funded bythe Office of NAVAL Research (that dang Navy connectionagain). Numerous universities and colleges are involved, asis the Air Force Research Laboratory. Of course thesegroups all claim the program is only for research.

Other groups have linked HAARP to electromagnetic war-fare, earthquakes, mind control, death ray capabilities, andweather modification.

Dutch Since and many others have been able to identify aHAARP signal as it interferes with local weather radar. Timeand time again these courageous researchers predictedfuture weather phenomena. They would show You Tubevideos of radar signals and point out the telltale HAARPsignature, indicating HF radio signals were bouncing off theionosphere. They would predict heavy weather systemwould soon appear in the area. Time and time again theywere proven right. I finally gave in and accepted HAARP asa weather modifier.

Even President Kennedy knew weather control was in theworks. On September 25, 1961 the President addressed theUnited Nations and said, “We shall propose further coop-erative efforts between all nations in weather prediction andeventually weather control.” By 1999 the European Unioncalled HAARP a global concern and asked that moreresearch be conducted on risks to health and environment.

I also am highly suspicious that HAARP can also be used formany other scary things. Have they taken the psychicweapon Vincent Collins asked me to hunt downtelepathically and vastly expanded its potential destructivecapabilities? Both HAARP and the psychic weapon work

267

with energies. Alterations in the human electromagneticenergy bodies can cause mental dysfunction or even death.Is HAARP capable of this? I do not know but would notargue against this conspiracy.

Well how would HAARP cause earthquakes? An Oil Manwas surveying an area of California using powerful groundpenetrating radio waves. The radio waves would cause thegeographic structures below to start vibrating causing asound that could be detected and identified as being causedby a natural gas pocket or crude oil for instance.

Within minutes of subjecting the underground fault line, theline gave way and fairly extensive earthquake resulted. TheOil Man attributed the earthquake to the radio waves. Heobviously did not know this information was a high secret.

They were only using 30 watts of power and radiating it intothe ground. HAARP uses a billion watts directed at theatmosphere. If this much power was directed at theionosphere at an angle, it could be bounced off theatmosphere and be sent to the ground. The correctfrequency could cause the ground to vibrate until anattacked fault line shifted in an earthquake event.

So it is theoretically possible and there is too muchcircumstantial data suggesting HAARP signatures in theatmosphere right before massive earthquakes. Recentearthquakes, particularly in China and Chile, were precededby colorful disruptions in the atmosphere characteristic ofHAARP. Just Goggle “China earthquake and HAARP” toaccess videos and other information.

Bill Wood/Brockbrader

I love FaceBook because it has afforded me a staff ofresearchers. Every morning I take a look at the “Newsfeed”and see what others on the other side of Earth havediscovered while I slept. One day a link took me to ProjectCamelot and an interview with a guy who was going by thepseudonym “Bill Wood”.(http://projectcamelotproductions.com/interviews/bill_wood/bill_wood.html)

Bill Brockbrader was a member of Navy Seal Team 9, withthree teams of three men. Their mission was to infiltrateNorth Iraq and other Middle East positions, to get close

268

enough to see targets. The targets would be attacked byTomahawk missiles. While these missiles were programedto fly to designated coordinates and hit targets matching thephoto in its programming, there existed a high level of error.The Seal Teams provided final electronic guidance to themissiles from their ground positions increasing accuracy.

The only problem with this is that the attacks wereconducted from 1992-2000. As the U.S. was not at war withIraq during those years, this is State Sponsored Terrorism!The State is, of course, the United States.

According to Bill Brockbrader, in the 1995-1997 time framehe and others began questioning what they were doing. Thetargets they were destroying were not military facilities. Hecalled them “soft targets”, in that they did not have eithermilitary or strategic purposes. The targets were civilian innature and the apparent reason for the attacks was to pisspeople off and create terrorists. After all, without terroristshow could America fight a “War On Terror”?

They often shot two missiles at a target and in 1997 thesecond missile targeted against a small, two story buildingon the outskirts of a small town came in 5 minutes after thefirst missile. By that time rescue workers and other townspeople were at the site, trying to help the injured.WhenBrockbrader realized the actual target of the second“late” missile was the humans reacting to the first missilestrike, he sent the missile into a mountain and a harmlessdetonation.

While Brockbrader was put through the “ringer” in justifyinghis actions to his superiors, nothing came of it. Then amonth later Brockbrader was court-martialed for having sexwith a sixteen year old girl when he was 24 years old. Thisconsensual sex occurred in California two years earlierwhere it was actually legal in the state at the time.Brockbrader was given the option of serving 11 years inprison or plead guilty, keep silent and go back to work.Brockbrader went back to work.

By 2000 Brockbrader’s team had been befriended byindigenous people of North Iraq who believed the horror ofSaddam Hussein might be worse than what the Americans

269

were doing. In one of these villages, the Head Elder toldBrockbrader there was an imminent attack planned usingpilots. How the Elder knew this or what Brockbrader did withthe information is not stated. But the next time Brockbraderwent back to the village he found it destroyed by aTomahawk missile attack. The village had about 35 nomadictype people with no real structures and certainly no reasonto spend $1.3 million dollars on a missile attack. Brockbraderconfronted the Seal 9 team leader who had followed ordersand guided the Tomahawk into the village. In a fit ofemotional rage Brockbrader beat the man up so bad healmost died. Brockbrader said the man did not defendhimself, probably out of guilt for having killed those who hadprotected Americans.

This altercation ended Brockbrader’s military career. He wasput in a hospital’s psych ward for six months where he wasdrugged until reality was distorted, by stripping hisperception of reality, in an attempt to destroy his mind. At theend of his ten years of service for which he had contractedto serve, Brockbrader was released from the military, wentback home, got a college degree in electronic engineeringand eventually started his own company. He simply wantedto leave the military experience behind. Plus he had beentold that if he did not keep silent and just go away, he wouldbe given 8 years of prison. Oh, and he would have toregister as a sex offender either without or after prison.

When the attacks of 9/11 happened, Brockbrader did notbelieve the epic lie touted by the U.S. government. To him itwas more likely Tomahawk missiles or weaponized droneshad been used in the attacks, guided by teams like his thathad been doing the same thing for a decade. Havingwitnessed large numbers of buildings being destroyed he didnot fall for the concept of pancaking floors. Brockbrader alsoknew there was sufficient information pointing to the attacksthat should have given prior warning to the U.S. IntelligenceCommunity in time to stop the attacks.

Even then Brockbrader kept silent. He knew Iraq had nomass destruction capability and watched this be a reason toattack Saddam. He knew the Patriot Act was an attack onthe U.S. Constitution and he had taken an oath to defend

270

that document of law. The frequent visits by CIA handlers toremind Brockbrader of the precarious position he still was in,due to the access he had to above Top Secret information,contributed to his continued silence.

Gradually Brockbrader began using the Internet to further hisunderstanding of what was really going on. EventuallyBrockbrader was contacted by people who knew the detailsof his life but were wearing “White Hats” or as Brockbradercalled them “The Oath Keepers”. These were the peoplewho had not forgotten their oath to “...support and defendthe Constitution of the United States against all enemies,foreign and domestic.”

Soon after that Brockbrader told his CIA handlers to go awayand, “I am going to be a problem.”Brockbrader soon foundhimself harassed by local police and his neighbors andbusiness clients were visited by police and notified ofBrockbrader’s sexual predator status. It did not take long forBrockbrader’s business to be destroyed.

National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA)

Then President Obama, after saying he would veto the bill,signed the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) onthe last day of 2011. Brockbrader and his Oath Keepersgroup realized this was the last act to destroy even theillusion of the U.S. Constitution and Brockbrader went toKerry Cassidy of the Internet’s Project Camelot to beinterviewed on tape. After Cassidy prompted him to make adisclaimer (for legal purposes) that he intended to write anovel, Bill Brockbrader gave up the most important secretsever released.

Even Forbes magazine wrote out against the NDAA. Theypointed out the NDAA would give the military control overdomestic terror investigations, opening the door for indefinitedetention without trial of any American designated a terrorist.There was no requirement that the alleged terrorist beproven guilty. They concluded, “We will either uphold thefreedoms baked into our Constitutional Republic, or we willscrap the entire project in the name of security as we wage,endlessly, this futile, costly, and ultimately self-defeating Waron Terror.”

271

FEMA Camps

To Brockbrader and his group, this was the last straw. Thiswas what sent the Oath Keepers into the open. If Americawas to survive, everyone in the U.S. Congress andExecutive Branch who had approved this act must bearrested on charges of treason or at least impeached.Simple as that.

Otherwise the Powers That Be would continue to the nextlevel of destruction of the United States. Some disaster willbe orchestrated to panic the population into blind fear toallow all of the truth seekers to be arrested without chargesand thus without trial and detained in detention camps thatare already built and currently being put into operation(January 2012). The previous statement has numeroussources of proof but the one I like best is from KBR.

KBR’s paper entitled “Project Overview and AnticipatedProject Requirements” provides an overview of theservices it will supply to what are being called “FEMAcamps”. The paper sets up general requirements tosubcontractors for them to make proposals as to what theycan do to get in on the action. Here is the list of categories:Catering Services; Temporary Fencing and Barricades;Hand Washing Stations; Laundry Services; MedicalServices; Office Trailers / Administration Area; PotableWater; Power Generation; Fuel Delivery / Supply &Electrical Distribution; Refuse Collection; Shower andToilet Units; Tentage, Flooring, Electrical & HVAC/ECU;Waste Water Removal.

I do not see gas chamber or crematoriums on the list, but Ibet it is on some list! Well maybe crematoriums would fallunder the category of “Refuse Collection”. And the Nazis didtell their victims they were going to take showers that wereactually gas chambers. So maybe they are on the list afterall.

By the way, KBR says of itself, “KBR is a leading globalengineering, construction and services company supportingthe energy, petrochemicals, government services and civilinfrastructure ....” KBR is virtually synonymous withHalliburton, the company whose CEO was Dick Cheney

272

before he resigned to be George Bush’s Vice President.And, the law allowing for establishment of these camps isthe 111th Congress, 1st Session, H. R. 645 dated January22, 2009.

So to keep from being rounded up and put in one of theseKBR supplied and operated FEMA camps (without beingcharged and no release required),Brockbrader went publicwith Project Camelot. And this is where the story gets veryinteresting.

Brockbrader’s Secrets

All of what I have told you above is included in the first partof the video. By the way, they originally tried to video recordin a public mall in California. But they had to move becausehelicopters kept flying over and caused a sound problem.This mall is near where Cassidy lives and she had neverseen anything like it. Cassidy was actually worried thehelicopters could disrupt the video recording by use of anElectromagnetic Pulse. The majority of the recording wasdone in what looked like a hotel room.

The Oath Keepers want to create a petition to force theimpeachment, if not jail, of those treasonous governmentofficials who passed the Defense Authorization Act 2011.They also need to make every citizen aware of the BlackNobles next act of creating some awful disaster to createpanic. But to get the public to really understand what is reallygoing on, Brockbrader began releasing the greatest secretsnever told.

Brockbrader calmly states that if the public knew the secretsbeing kept from them by their own government, theindividual’s preconceived notions of reality would beshattered. Now some of these secrets are known by myselfand others who have researched available data. Cassidyand Brockbrader get into a few of these subjects that areprobably confusing to the uninitiated. Therefore, I am goingto cover these subjects beyond the new information given byBrockbrader. Background, if you will.

Project Camelot has been video interviewing individuals withstories to tell or books on subjects covering all the things youwill not see on or in the Mass Media. I have not counted but

273

they have hundreds of video projects. The basic concept isthat by going public via Project Camelot those people willless likely be “done away with”.

Robert Duncan O'Finioan is one of those individuals. He wasfirst interviewed in November 2006 at the age of 46. Duncanopenly admits he has huge gaps in his memory. What hedoes know is that his parents took him to a hardware storewhere he was tested on a puzzle that a strange woman usedto choose him. He was given a drink and that was his lastmemory until the age of nine. From 9-14 he lived a relativelynormal life, although “a lot of paranormal activity was goingon”. After the age of 14 his memory is lost again.

Somewhere around 1998 Duncan had an automobileaccident requiring an MRI of his neck. After that hismemories started to seep into his consciousness. Duncanbelieves the electromagnetic resonance of the MRI “didn’tmesh with the cranial implant”. The MRI machine actuallystarted burning during the procedure and Duncan wasexperiencing tremendous head pain. Before the fire, the MRIgot a picture of something dead center in the middle of hisbrain about the size of a grain of rice. Duncan believed itwas an implant no longer working.

What his newly found memories were telling Duncan wentbeyond science fiction. He had been put in a program tocreate “the super soldier” to be just that super - beyondnormal, faster, stronger, more endurance, pain tolerance,etc. This included paranormal abilities. Duncan goes on torelate amazing paranormal events from his life and testing ofhis superior physical capabilities.

Kerry Cassidy had Bill Brockbrader see the two videointerviews with Duncan. She wanted to know if Duncan andBill had gone through a similar program. And when sheasked him about Duncan, Bill told the biggest secret of themall.

Brockbrader said that he and Duncan were trained in whatwas comparable to Jedi Knight skills of the Star War movies!He said abilities way beyond the five senses were availableto anyone with a little bit of training and the belief they couldaccess advanced skills. Brockbrader stated that even

274

beyond super physical capabilities anyone can read otherindividual’s thoughts or prediction of future events. All youneed is that absolute belief that you can do these things(Cosmic Rule #1 We are what we think).

Brockbrader went on to say that Duncan had been told hissuper abilities came from the implant as well as the training.Thus, when the implant was “broken” Duncan believed he nolonger had access to those super abilities. This placeboeffect also led to more control over Duncan. Stop the pieceof metal from working and stop Duncan. As Brockbrader putit, “You can’t take beliefs away.” But obviously you candictate the basis for those beliefs. Brockbrader thinks thehospital drugs administered to him for six months after hismilitary discharge are currently used to destroy the beliefsystem of what can be done by screwing with the mind.

Then Cassidy turned the conversation to Area 51.Brockbrader explained that this extraordinary secret facilitywas established to keep secret the U.S. Space Fleet! Hebelieved that dozens if not hundreds of space flight capablevehicles were in the Fleet. Mars could be reached in a dayand they could go anywhere in the Solar System. Thereason for keeping this secret was to protect the fact therewere alternatives to petroleum and liquid fueled rockets.Brockbrader also said a good telescope could see things onthe Moon and Mars that are manmade. Free energy deviceswould revolutionize the current world economy and societyand the Black Knights would loose control. Thus, keep it allsecret.

Brockbrader then began talking about Project Looking Glassthat used a super computer vastly superior to anything theuninitiated would know about. This computer somehow usesstring theory to determine the possibilities of possiblefutures. By programing in what you want to do, the computerwould provide different possible future outcomes and thepercentage of that outcome becoming reality. Eventually itbecame obvious to the operators that they wereencountering a problem. As Brockbrader put it:

...some very smart people figured out thatsomething big was coming up. Somethingthat made it so all the possibilities of all the

275

future scenarios of any choice any possibilitythat was fed in and observed through theLooking Glass inevitably ended up in thesame future. And no decision and nopossibility changed past a certain point.That’s the big secret.

When Cassidy asked when that point was, Brockbraderreplied,

That coincides with December 21, 2012. Allpossible timelines lead to the same basichistory in the future....The elites of the gamefigured out the end of the game. Nothingcould be manipulated beyond that point.”

He also added, “That is what sends everybody who has allof the information, that knows every thing into a blind panic.”

In response to Cassidy’s wanting to know what this futureentailed, Brockbrader said

If I had to give it a name I would say it is theawakening process. It’s an evolution ofconsciousness that cannot, will not and nomatter what decisions or possibilities areinjected into the equation eventually it allresults down to us all learning the truth andbecoming aware of this massive dam of liesthat has been built to keep us knowingmassive volumes of information....Now at firstI thought it was end of the world. But now Isee it is the end of their world.

Brockbrader could not give details of what was to comebecause it is beyond anything we can understand with ourcurrent belief systems. The only thing he could point to washumanity would be like a butterfly emerging from a cocoon.

Cassidy then asked him, if the elite know of this future, whyare they continuing to try to protect themselves from it? Arethey trying to hedge their bets in case the end game is amassive global catastrophe? Why are they buildingunderground cities and trying to start a nuclear war to kill offthe vast majority of the population? Brockbrader responded,

276

They are insane. And beyond being insane,they have deluded themselves into believingthat they can somehow manage to get awaywith what they are trying to get away with.There is a distinct lack of reality in thatthinking.

Brockbrader is firm in his conviction that humanity is on thebrink of a new beginning and an awakening. He believes theBlack Nobles are delusional in thinking this can be stopped.They cannot seem to realize the game is up. ButBrockbrader is intent upon spreading his message to therest of us that the game is up. If we can move beyond ourfear of the Black Nobles and their version of reality toembrace this new reality, we can limit the trouble times andpains of rebirth. As he put it in his last words of the video,

There is a certain element of pain that we canreduce if...we strive to raise our conscious-ness as fast as is humanly possible and makethat transition a lot easier when it comes.”

Kozyrev's Mirrors

So I watched the Project Camelot video and was blownaway. While I have summarized what Bill Brockbrader’s said,you can only get the full impact be seeing the man athttp://projectcamelotproductions.com/interviews/bill_wood/bill_wood.html.

The next day the first thing I saw on the FaceBook newsfeedwas a link to a 43 minute video in Russian with very badEnglish subtitles. As the video had already started I gothooked. At the end of it, I knew enough to Google “Kozyrev'sMirrors”. This is the summarization of what that link came upwith. While much of what will be presented sounds really“out” there, it is based on decades of 20th Century researchby very well known and influential scientist, especiallyRussian scientists, and repeatable experiments.

Biosphere

The “Biosphere” encompasses Earth and everything thatlives or resides on it. In addition to humans, animals andplants, it also includes minerals to viruses. Everything isincluded in the Biosphere including the specific electro-magnetic forces in and around Earth. Obviously most of the

277

Biosphere has been investigated through centuries ofscientific research. In most cases there are repeatableexperiments that proved, without argument, the facts.

Subjects researched that science has either dismissed orembraced are in the area of consciousness, spirit, soul andreligion. The main problem with these subjects is that ofbeing able to get the same results within the same type ofexperimental parameters. While antidotal sources aremassive, how do you test for consciousness, spirit, soul orGod? While everyone has their own concepts of thesesubjects, science as a whole has not delivered a definitionacceptable by everyone.

In the 20th Century numerous individuals and groups tackledthe problem by devising a variety of experiments to provethe existence of what was considered paranormal (beyondthe range of normal experiences). What was discovered isthat there may not be anything paranormal about theparanormal. It may just be that science has simply notidentified the underlying science to the “paranormal”.

Anyone who says telepathy does not exist, I dismiss ashaving never studied the subject. If you study anyparanormal subject, you will no longer consider that it doesnot exist. The amount of verifiable data is overwhelming. Iam not going to take the time to present proof that there isnothing paranormal. I am going to take a look at what mightbe at the center of why “paranormal” activity is so abundant.

What becomes obvious is that paranormal activity seemsrooted in the concepts of time, place and space. ThirdDimensional place and space is relatively easy tocomprehend, as we have a collective agreement of whatconstitutes place and space (height, length, width, weight,molecular makeup, color, texture, speed, etcetera). Time is abit more volatile because there is no standard and is actuallya relationship between place and space and who is creatingthe calendar.

When Russian cosmonauts on long Earth revolving missionsreturned with their brains scrambled, the question becameone of what scrambled them? Was it a lack of gravity,cosmic rays, isolation, or something else? Turns out the

278

Russians determined it was something else. It was a changein the electromagnetic field. Brains are computers designedto work in a very specific E-M field, that is the E-M field ofthe Biosphere.

The E-M Environment

20th century Russian physicist Nikolai Kozyrev was a highlyinfluential scientist in Russia. He determined there exists anenergy field in addition to electric and magnetic energies.Kozyrev called this the Torsion Energy Field (TEF) andproved it worked faster than the speed of light, which wasthe limiting speed of E-M energies. He also believed thatTime became a finite entity within the TEF where past,present, and future exist simultaneously, as it is not limitedby the speed of light.

At the International Scientific Research Institute forCosmicAnthropo-Ecology in Novosibirsk, Russia scientistshave been having human beings experience what it is like tohave the E-M fields taken out of their existence. (see: http://www.scribd.com/doc/19489945/Kozyrev-Mirrors-and-Electromagnetic-Null-Zones)

The human would be inside big tubes shileding them from E-M fields. At the time of this report, the thirty years ofresearch had resulted in the following conclusions:

(1) our planet's electromagnetic field isactually the "veil" which filters time and placedown to our everyday Newtonian reality -enabling us to have the human experience oflinear time,

(2) in the absence of an electromagnetic field,we have access to an energy field of"instantaneous locality" that underlies ourreality,

(3) that the limiting effect of the electro-magnetic field on an individual is moderatedby the amount of solar electromagneticactivity occurring while that person was inutero,

The E-M field of the Biosphere locks relative time into thePresent within the human mind. When that E-M field was not

279

available, the human subjects had distinctly paranormalexperiences including “seeing” Past and Future andenhanced telepathic abilities. They likened the effects to thatof being in deep meditative states and concluded

(4) that once a person has accessed thesestates, his or her consciousness remains soenhanced.

Just imagine Cosmonauts forced to live for months in anenvironment equating to having taken an excellenthallucinogenic. Scrambled brains. At least on Earth afterleaving the experimental tubes, the humans would havevisual cues to 3-D reality and could separate what was “real”(collective consensus of what was real) and what hadhappened in their minds while in the tube. Instead of havingscrambled brains, they had enhanced consciousness. As Dr.Alexander V. Trofimov noted:

Now I will say something important. As weinvestigate brain activity — either with anelectro-encephalogram, or by assessing brainfunctions like intellect level, memory, andother functions, we realize that we currentlyuse only 5% of the capacity of our brainsthroughout our whole lives. And then, after wespend some time inside the apparatus — in aspace without magnetism — we repeat thesame tests, and we see a drastically differentpicture. We see that our mind's additionalreserves and abilities are activated. We seean increase in memory capacity, increasedIQ, and changing zones of electric activity ofthe brain.

So we can easily conclude that if the E-M field of theBiosphere changed, the operation of our minds would alsochange. According to Trofimov, “Currently, the Earth'smagnetic field has 49,000 nano-Teslas. It has beendecreasing by about 50-70 nano-Teslas per year.”

And the magnetic pole has also been moving. In 1905 theystarted taking measurements of the Magnetic Pole in

280

northern Canada that had first been located in 1831. Theyrealized the pole was moving toward the west at an averagespeed of 10 km per year. According to NASA, by 2003 thatmovement had accelerated to 40 km per year. As ofFebruary 2012 the magnetic pole has been movingnorthwest into the Arctic Ocean at more than 55 kilometersper year!

The very E-M field that we were conceived in is changing.Because of that change we are mentally changing. Are wechanging enough to undergo an awakening similar to abutterfly coming out of the cocoon, as Bill Brockbraderpromises?

The Source Field Investigations

David Wilcock’s book The Source Field Investigations iswithout a doubt one of the most important books everwritten. He has complied summations of experimentsproving what Bill Brockbrader claims. We are capable ofevolving into super beings. We already are, we just don’tknow it yet. As Wilcock put it:

In Russia, however, there has been aconsistent, focused effort to investigate theSource Field since at least the 1950's.... Overten thousand papers investigating the SourceField were published by 1996 alone, withmore than half of them from Russia. Theimplications of what they found are sostaggering that I suspect you will be stunnedby how much we already know about thisunseen force - which influences absolutelyeverything we see, hear, do and believe.

Hypnosis

Wilcock starts the book with a discussion of hypnotism.When I was about 8 years old, Mom and my Dad’s mothertook us kids to the drive-in to see a 1956 movie called TheSearch for Bridey Murphy. Obviously this was something thegrownups were interested in. But so was I.

It related the experiences of an amateur hypnotist namedMorey Bernstein who hypnotized a woman and took herback to a previous life in the first decades of the 1800's in

281

Ireland. Her name in that lifetime was Bridey Murphy. Themovie was based upon Bernstein’s book of the same title.While there have been many attacks on the story and thedetails, it did bring the concepts of hypnotism andreincarnation out into the open.

Today both of these subjects have been well studied. Beliefin their veracity really depends upon one’s experiences,memories, or study of the subjects.

Wilcock focuses on one event using hypnosis where thesubject was able to mentally go to his girl friend and see herwrite a letter. As the hypnotized subject read the letter, thehypnotist wrote down what he said. Later the comparisonproved the letter and the hypnotist’s notes were exact. Thisindicates we have the ability to consciously move beyondthe confines of our own bodies.

Another indication of this ability by using hypnotism wasdemonstrated when a hypnotized subject could identify anobject that was completely blocked by another person’sbody. It appears the hypnotized person could somehow seethrough an object. This puts into question any limits tohuman consciousness and our concepts of physical matter.

By the time I was an Army Officer involved in ElectronicWarfare in 1973, the dangers of hypnotism were accepted.Everyone stationed at Vint Hill Farms Army Base wererequired to attend a demonstration of hypnotism at the postmovie theater. It was demonstrated that a person could bequickly and unknowingly hypnotized. And once hypnotizedthat person would give up highly classified information. Thehypnotist would become a superior officer in the victim’shypnotized mind and classified information would be relatedwithout hesitation. The victim’s reality had changed.

The Secret Life of Plants

Cleve Backster had risked court martial for stealing secretsto demonstrate this “hypno-interrogation” in 1947. At the timehe worked for the U.S. Counter-Intelligence Corps, but ayear later he was a member of the CIA. In addition to hypno-interrogation Backster worked on the “truth serum” sodiumpentothal for drug-interrogation. Point to remember here isthat for well over 60 years US Government agencies have

282

been researching mind control. But we already know aboutMK-ULTRA.

Cleve Backster soon left the CIA to pursue the new field ofpolygraphs. In February 1966, Backster accidentallydiscovered an unbelievable thing. The only plant he hadever owned had just been given to him by his secretary, whohad bought it from a store having a going out of businesssale. On a very late night, Backster hooked the plant up tothe polygraph. This eventually ended up in his book TheSecret Life of Plants.

Wilcock focuses on what is called the “Backster Effect” thatis a repeatable experiment showing a polygraph hooked upwith a plant records energies emitted by the plant. If theplant is threatened by fire, the polygraph goes wild. This isjust one aspect in a plant that had been unknown. Plantsappear to have some sort of consciousness.

In the late 1960's, I was reading the newly published book byBackster and totally amazed. While reading at the dinningroom table there was a section involving an experiment withwatering. Only a few plants in a room full of plants werewatered. Yet all the plants seemed to not be drying out.There was a philodendron plant sitting in front of me. Ilooked at it and said, “Now how the hell do you do that?”

I honestly did not expect an answer. But immediately Iheard, “We convert the water into energy and transmit it tothe other plants.” At the same moment I “saw” an image ofthe energy transfer. I have never been the same.

The reason I am so sure of this is that the answer wasinstantaneous and I had no time to consider the questionand come up with an answer myself. And I just knew I hadnot originated the thought. A plant had just talked to me.Wow!

Backster’s book relates experiments on other critters tooincluding brine shrimp, insects and even chicken eggs. Thefinal conclusion here is that all living things are interwovenwith the environment and display “consciousness”.

In 1988 the Backster Effect was studied and demonstratedon human cells. Cells taken from the mouth of a subjectwere able to be monitored. It was determined that stress in

283

the subject caused a reaction in the cells even if separatedby hundreds of miles. Even if the cells were kept in ashielded room the effect was the same. Like the Kozyrevmirrors experiments proved, whatever the media is allowingfor information transfer between living things, it is notelectro-magnetic.

One extremely interesting aspect to Backster’s experimentswith plants concerns prayer. If you pray over your food andthank it for its life giving nutrients, the polygraph will notshow the sever reactions. As I have yet to see anyonepraying over their fast food, the fact we are a diseasednation is not difficult to understand. Oh the cow that madethe hamburger has probably stopped screaming, but thelettuce and tomato may still have something to say!

Free Energy

Wilcock follows the above discussion by jumping into theconcept of “Free Energy”. In its simplest definition, FreeEnergy devices tap into the mechanism by which plants cantransfer energy to other plants. Wilcock calls this the “SourceField”. Einstein’s generation called it the “Ether” orsometimes “Aether”. Star Wars movies call it the “Force”.These devices would make oil, gas, nuclear, and electricpower systems obsolete. Wilcock’s proof that they exist andare workable is contained in the following statement:

According to the Institute for New Energy, asof 1997, “the U.S. Patent Office has classifiedover 3,000 patent devices or applicationsunder the secrecy order, Title 35, U.S. Code(1952) Sections 181-188. The Federation ofAmerican Scientists revealed that by the endof Fiscal Year 2010, this number hadballooned to 5,135 inventions - and included“review and possible restriction” on any solarcell with greater than twenty percentefficiency, or any power system that is morethan seventy to eighty percent efficient atconverting energy.

Wilcock tells of Dr. Eugene Mallove who was “arguably theworld’s leading figure in alternative energy research....” The

284

night before Dr. Mallove was to demonstrate a Free Energydevice he was bludgeoned to death. Dr. Mallove was onlyone of uncounted others who have died or been scared offthe search for the ultimate source of energy.

Now all of this is contained in the First Chapter of Wilcock’sbook. The rest of the book delves further into the researchand experiments proving the existence of the Source Field. Italso attempts to describe what this mechanism is. I haveonly read the book once and admit I might have missed it,but I am still not sure I really know what the Source Field is.But, hey, no one can actually explain what magnetism andelectricity are. The best anyone can do is explain what theycan do.

Well, what then can the Source Field do or facilitate? Hereare a few things:

- telepathy (or consciousness transfer) at all levels,between all living things, including telepathic connectionwith past and future living things;

- unlimited energy via Free Energy devices;

- unlimited life experiences via reincarnation;

- unlimited knowledge as every thought and event isforever registered in the Source Field;

- unlimited power to change everything.

Unlimited power to change everything requires that you firstchange yourself. Cosmic Reality Rule #1: We are what wethink. On the other hand, maybe we do not have ultimatecontrol over what we think. Wilcock discusses the effects ofgroup meditations on love and peace and the correspondingnumber of bad things happening like terrorism and crime ingeneral or that good things happen. On page 92 he sums itup this way:

As of 1993, fifty different scientific studies hadrigorously proven that...the meditations hadcreated improvements in health and quality oflife, as well as decreases in accidents, crime,war and such factors.

In one study conducted three times with a meditating group

285

of about 7,000 people, acts of terrorism dropped by 72%worldwide! Problem is the change was only temporary. Butwhat it does indicate is that there is a shared human superconsciousness that can be dominated by a group thinkingthe same thing. And if it only took 7,000 people in a worldpopulation of some 6 billion to drastically drop terrorism,which is probably the worst bad that exists. This is at least ahopeful situation.

On the other hand, it only takes 7,000 people to control theworld. What if you had 7,000 people working continually forcenturies or more to foster fear and greed? Well you wouldhave today. You would have POO.

So we are here in 2013 and there is a growing movementtoward understanding the first two rules of Cosmic Reality: 1.Reality is what we think it is and 2. Majority wins. The BlackNobles are, by many reports, aware there is a greatawakening and they are losing their POO grip overmaintaining rule #3: Trying to keep everyone else fromknowing rules 1 and 2.

Mayan Calender

The Mayan civilization existed for 700 years between 200A.D. and 900 A.D. Their complicated three tier calenderallowed them to accurately track daily, yearly, and age longtime. The real question is on what basis the age longcalender was based.

As pointed out earlier, the entire solar system is movingwithin the galaxy. It takes 25,772 years to make that journey.The Mayan Long Count Calender is based upon this triparound the Galaxy. Somehow they determined a point in thepast when this 25,772 years started which would end whenthe Earth’s position relative to the galactic stars was thesame as when it started. That end date was December 21,2012. At that point a new age, or trip around the galaxy,would begin again. There was never a threat of destruction.

What was reality shaking was how the Mayans would knowthe new age would begin at a very unique point in thejourney. On 21 December 2012 the Earth, Sun, and BlackHole in the center of the galaxy all lined up. It is the perfectstart line! It is hard enough to figure how this alleged

286

primitive people could understand the galaxy trip of 25,772years, never mind the idea that the start and stop line wouldbe so incredibly significant.

Photon Belt

But more than just being a significant event, that same startline was within what has been called the Photon Belt. Theposition of the center of the galaxy is lined up with the SolarSystem. The center is also spewing a shower of dust andradiation resulting in the Proton Belt that the Solar Systemmust travel through. We are currently speeding through thisProton Belt and have been since at least February 2012.

The first scientific indication validating this Proton Belt andits anticipated affect on the solar system came withidentification that the half-life of minerals had changed. Halflife measurements indicates the length of time a givenmineral takes to loose half its weight to decay. It is such astable measurement, carbon testing to determine age isbased upon the half-life of carbon. But in 2011 I learnedscientists had detected changes in the half-life of minerals.

Then scientists started seeing DNA alterations in the GreatApes. All this makes sense. By entering the Photon Belt andchanges in the energetic makeup of this area of the galaxy,everything on Earth could be forced to change. And thatwould include human DNA. And this falls into predictionsfrom numerous sources predicting massive human evolutionfollowing entry into the Age of Aquarius, which also beganas we passed into the Photon Belt.

Peter told me something was happening to the sun back in2010. He works with plants and was seeing burning on themhe attributed to the sun getting hotter. At that time I washearing the sun was actually on the cooler side. But then Istarted to see the same type of buns on the leaves. Onevery healthy plant just seemed to burn up. All the similarplants also were showing signs of burning. But about a yearlater, newer plants that were starting to pop up did notexhibit the same weakness. I think the plants had alreadydone some genetic changes to counteract what I believe is achange in the energetic environment Earth now finds itself.

The dust in the Photon Belt is also being used by the sun as

287

fuel. As the sun gets hotter, it moves from a yellow sun to awhite sun. This is the exact opposite of what we have beentold is the age progression of the sun. If this is true, thechanges in this white sun will have massive affect on thedelicate atmosphere of Earth. Or will it?

Chemtrails

In the 1970's as a U.S. Army Intelligence Officer workingclosely with the National Security Agency (NSA), it was anexcepted rule that technology known was 50 years inadvance of what was known by the public. Seventy yearsago, 1950's secret technology was available allowing “black”scientific researchers to conclude that which we see now:the sun is going to get so hot it will change the entire SolarSystem.

Daniel has come out of the shadows and explained thescience being taught is the reverse of what is actual fact.Daniel is allegedly one of those working in the black sciencearena who began giving David Wilcock “inside” information,allowing Wilcock to go beyond conventional science andwrite THE SOURCE FIELD INVESTIGATIONS. Daniel hasnow come forward and provided explanations for subjectsthose of us in the “Conspiracy Arena” have been evidencingfor decades. It only took 12 pages.

The source of the change the Solar System is undergoing isa dust field in this part of the Universe. The dust in thissector is being used as fuel by the sun. All suns begin asfields of dust that condense into red supergiants. More dust(fuel) allows the emergence of orange giants which evolveinto yellow suns such as the sun we had. At this point oursun being fueled by the dust is evolving into a white sunwhich is not only hotter it is also bigger.

A major secret here is that cosmic changes, such as our sunevolving so quickly, do not take the length of time we havebeen taught to believe. As Daniel puts it, “Astronomicalevents move thousands of times faster than assumed byastronomers. The planet and solar system are no wherenear as old as claimed and mankind has been around to seethe sun “change” in the past.”

The “black” scientists knowing this secret of time knew they

288

had to do something or risk being fried. Leaving the planetwas beyond what THESE scientists believed possible. Sothey began preparing underground cities and finding ways toblock out the increase in solar heat. They decided to use theEarth’s atmosphere as a shield.

First time I heard about chemtrails was back at the turn ofthe century. Reports from France talked about large,unmarked planes dumping stuff into the atmosphere. Thestuff would look like the vapor trail from a jet, except thesetrails would not dissipate rapidly. In fact the trailscrisscrossed each other and were visible for hours. By 2011I was seeing them over my own house. Chemtrails are aconcoction of stuff to protect the atmosphere from thechanges undergoing by the sun.

Nanoparticles of aluminum reflect sunlight and this becamethe first ingredient in what we have come to call“Chemtrails”. But the aluminum would not protect from thebursts of x-rays that would be given off as the sun made thejump from yellow to white. That was when barium andstrontium were added to the chemtrail mix because acombination of the two would block x-rays, as they werealready used in Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) technology.Another aspect to the transforming sun are large blasts ofradiation and so they added iron to increase the magneticflux properties of the atmosphere to diminish the radiation.

Daniel says, “Now if you look at chemtrail fallout in snow, iceand rain… what do you find? Aluminum hydroxide, bariumoxide, strontium oxide and iron oxide. The same elementslisted on climate modification and geoengineering patents.What a coincidence.”

So now we have an explanation of chemtrails. According toDaniel, “The chemtrail sun screen is failing, though theyconstantly double efforts to reinforce it.” They had to go intodispersing larger amounts of chemicals by using the aircraftand saturation with numerous chemtrails that were finallyobserved.

Prior to this they were using the thousands of commercialaircraft flying around to make smaller dispersals that werenot detectable by observation. One airline maintenance man

289

told the story about the latrines. Only three men ever workedon the airline bathrooms, until one night when none of themwere there. This maintenance guy found all sorts of tubesand equipment that he traced to the wings where they fueleda nozzle of sorts. Chemtrail dispersal from the wings havebeen videotaped.

The side effects of this operation besides red rain (from theiron) that has fallen in different areas is droughts andsuperstorms. Droughts occur in heavily seeded chemtrailareas by the chemical concoction disrupting the ability ofwater vapor to naturally condense and fall as rain. Thus adrought occurs. Over time the atmosphere gets heavy withthe excess water vapor and when conditions changesufficiently and the rain starts falling you end up with hugeamounts of rain in the form of “superstorms”.

White Sun

It would seem rather obvious that anyone can test thishypothesis by simply looking at the sun. But this gets tricky.For every day of your life you have seen a yellow sun. Thesun is yellow, no debate. And your brain accepts this reality.

On my way home from work there is a 90 degree turn. GoingNorth suddenly becomes going East. One evening a flash oflight in the side view mirror caught my attention. Reflected inthe mirror was the sun and it was bright white. WTF!

I had been seeing the setting sun every day. I did not detecta change until a reflection showed up in the mirror. Whathad happened is the sun had changed but my brain thoughtthis impossible. So even though visual input depicted achange, I simply did not acknowledge this. Just look at TVHistory’s “Bleeped Up Brain” to understand how this ispossible.

By surprising my brain when the sun image was reflected inthe mirror, my brain had to take in the image and look at itdifferently, that is as it really was. It was a white sun. Now Ican go out and see a white sun, but it is so bright it is hard tolook at.

The sun is being seen as white by many and there is ascientific reason for it. Actually it could also be looking whiterbecause of atmospheric changes. Daniel could just be a nut

290

case or agent of disinformation wanting to fuel fire that thesun has changed and we are doomed. But you might justwant to take a look at the sun and see what you think.

And why does it matter if the sun has changed to white?Well don’t you think this is something Mainstream Mediashould be discussing? Are they afraid that, like the ETscenario, knowing the sun has changed will lead to socialdisruption?

But this is another example of how the human mind can betricked. Goodness, if we cannot see a color change in thesun, how much more reality are we missing?

Timelines

My understanding of Timelines is based upon the conceptthat Time is only a relationship between Place and Space.

The fact Time is not a constant is accepted due tonumerous, repeatable experiments confirming Time can bechanged by environmental changes.

Place is most easily thought of as a location. Patton,Kennedy and I share the same Soul within the same timeframes on a planet called Earth. But we have differentbodies which means we are occupying a different Space.

The beauty of the system is that while Spacecan remain constant, Place is alwayschanging. The graphic is about as simple as Ican get to demonstrate. Think of each blackdot as a specific location. The line throughthem indicates a time line. As long as youkeep walking on a straight path, you stay onthe same timeline.

But the Universe is anything but constant.Just the rotation of Earth creating night andday is caused by a rotation of 1,037 MPH.The yearly revolution around the sun isaccomplished at 66,666 MPH. The sun itselfis rotating around the black hole in the center

of the Milky Way Galaxy at the estimated speed of 420,000MPH. And of course with the expanding universe the galaxyis also traveling an estimated 2,237,000 MPH. All total in a

291

single moment we are all traveling some 2.7 million MPH.

And all this traveling takes us through differentconfigurations of space regarding all sorts of energies. Theamazing work done by Starfire Tor on timelines has shownthat just a burst of solar energy can change the timeline.

Starfire would tell her Face Book group that a solarflare would be hitting Earth with sufficient energy toalter the energetic configuration of the planet tocause distortions in the timeline. In most cases thechange was subtle and might not make much of adifference to most people. But in some cases itmeant the difference between life and death.

A timeline distortion had been predicted by Starfire.Someone in her Face Book group asked if people who weredead could all of a sudden be alive. The poster said she andher husband could remember a televised scene of a cryingMichael Douglas being interviewed outside the cemeterywhere his father Kirk had just been buried. Now they wereseeing Kirk was still alive. This resulted in numerous otherpeople, myself included, confirming this memory of Michaeloutside the cemetery.

We also discovered that we also remembered TV star DavidSoul committing suicide only to turn up alive. ErnestBorgnine died again in July 2012. Nelson Mandela wasremembered as dying in prison.

What really brought it home to me was the shooting ofCongresswoman Gabrielle Giffords. I had been nappingwhile CNN was on the TV. They were covering the Tucson,Arizona shooting nonstop.

Every time I looked at the TV it showed a photo of a dark,semi-long haired woman. Then they declared her dead andfifteen minutes later reversed that announcement. At thatpoint the photo they had been showing disappeared, neverto be seen again. Instead the cropped, light haired Giffordswas in the photos. In my opinion, on one timeline Giffordshad died. For some reason the timeline changed to onewhere she continued to live.

One undisputed sign of a timeline changed was the stonesin the walkway of my yard. One day an additional three two

292

foot square step stones were added to the walkway.Everyone who knew the yard knew those last three stoneshad not been there.

A friend’s fence gate suddenly had a warning sign that theproperty was protected by a dog. It looked weathered butboth myself and another friend knew we had never seen itbefore.

As I followed Starfire Tor, I started paying attention todetails. Sometimes it was just positioning of certain things.Sometimes it was stories a friend would be telling that noneof the rest of us could remember.

You can go look yourself. For me I believe that timelines arenot stable and can change with just a powerful thought. I ambetting they are much more unstable then we can detected.

Bill Brockbrader’s discussion of Looking Glass and its abilityto look into potential futures was not my first introduction tothe device. It was part of the dark research into secretscience where its existence was whispered from so manysources. I was inclined to think it existed. I had also heardthat beyond 2012 was unseeable by the device.

So when Bill Brockbrader was relating IN 2011 that by theend of 2012 there would only be two remaining timelines, itwas just confirming other information. Bill said the goodtimeline would win out and the future would be like abutterfly coming out of the cocoon.

Having become a fan of Bill’s I ended up in his Face Bookgroup. I considered him an American wistleblower and hero.And his group was attracting some very astute andawakened individuals. We had survived the end of the 2012Mayan calender. We were sharing our experiences withinthe group and growing in a multitude of ways. 2013 waspoised to bring us into a new state of awareness andeverything good.

Then Bill got arrested.

293

5 - What Now?

I think it was in February 2013 that Eva Moore, Bill’s wife,announced his arrest on the Face Book group page. It wasnot what we were expecting, although it had always been apossibility Bill would be attacked by the UNITED STATESCORPORATION. Remember we are no longer a Republic.With Emergency Decrees still in effect there is noConstitution in control. Any Federal Court trying Bill’s casewould be under Admiralty/Maritime Law.

Thing is, if Bill had not been arrested, we might still notunderstand how the Republic was stolen.

Super Soldier

Remember in Book 1 the discussion of Hitler’s fascinationwith creation of the Superman? Bill, Duncan O'Finioan, anddozens more have come out to relate memories ofexperiences as highly enhanced individuals. These “SuperSoldiers” have acquired sufficient numbers that the SuperSoldiers & Mind Control: Summit II was held in May 2013 inHenderson, Nevada. Eva Moore was one of the speakers.

I readily admit not being anything but a novice on thissubject. I seem to find any excuse not to delve into thisarena. Inevitably you end up at the far side of evil. Seems toget the perfect candidate for a Super Soldier requiresdestruction of a child’s psyche. What I will say, is what Billand Duncan related. Super Soldier can do things mostpeople would consider beyond human abilities from physicalattributes to enhanced telepathic and cognitive functions.

How much of these enhancements Bill still had left after thesix months of mind altering drug therapy, I do not know.What I do know is that belief is a critical part to thoseabilities. Duncan attributed them to an implant. Bill claimed itwas strictly a belief system with no implant required.

294

But a belief system is always fragile. It is one thing to bedaily demonstrating super capabilities in a war zone, withothers around you doing the same thing. To be taken out ofthat reinforcing environment and sent outside the communityinto an unaware society, certainly erodes the belief system.

At the time of his arrest, Bill was required to register as a sexoffender with local law enforcement anytime he moved. Myinterpretation of what happened is that Bill unknowinglycrossed a county border where he was arrested for notregistering with authorities. As one favorite way ofdiscrediting an individual is to implicate them in sexualperversion, I believe Bill was lured into a trap.

But the trap was set way back in 1998.

Military Court Martial 1998

The specific charges stem from a military court-martialfinding Bill guilty of rape. Yes, the accused victim was underaged but there was no rape. A loss of control on the part oftwo damaged young people, yes. This is what I know andwhat I feel in my heart. But anyone of you could just listen tothe negative attacks and dismiss Brockbrader all together.While understandable, this is exactly what the Black Nobleswant you to do. Let us take a deeper look.

Bill was Court Martialed because he was openly questioningU.S. tactics the Government wanted kept away from theAmerican People. Quite succinctly he told of how U.S.military on the ground and from ships using Tomahawkmissiles were targeting Iraq long before 9/11.

The rape charges were brought up over a short livedrelationship that had transpired two years before. The trial’sdefendant Bill was manipulated by the system to plead guiltyto the charges, as it was really his only way out. But this wasa known way of controlling Super Soldiers. Promote sexualcrimes and use the threat of incarceration as a controlmechanism.

Federal Court Case 2012

Bill was arrested for failure to register as a sex offender. Hewas finally brought to trial, but the central question of hiscase could not be discussed. Bill was in trouble because he

295

turned his back on all the mind and behavioral control hehad been subjected to. He had started breaking free in theface of great evil he and his Seal Teams had become partof. But he could not prove it.

One thing he said did get verification. Bill had describedsending a missile into a mountain. The second missile hadcome in after the first missile strike in time to attack thepeople who were trying to help the first victims. He made thisstatement as far back as June 2011. In August 2012, over ayear later, major news outlets were talking about drones“double striking” targets in Pakistan. This confirms the tacticof taking out first responders is part of the U.S. repertoire.Bill had told us that long before it was publicly known.

But Bill could not prove anything about his original whistleblowing statements. Worse yet, threat of being prosecutedfor perjury or violations of the State’s Secrets Act compelledBill to affirm his Court Martial confession of rape. I wouldjudge this an act of a coward. However, a good soldierretreats to fight another day. There was no way to win thatbattle and Bill was fighting a war with others like Eva and hisFace Book Group. Whatever avenue he took was one with aprison term attached. Bill opted for the lesser possible timeincarcerated preventing him from fighting the war, not just ano win battle.

During the legal maneuvering of the trial, Bill’s governmentappointed lawyers were, at a minimum, not competent. Whatcaused this ineffectiveness could be a number of things. Butit forced Bill to take charge of his own defense and representhimself.

This was the beginning of understanding how the Republichad been lost. As Bill put it:

It is my greatest regret that I failed to find thecourage to trust that I was the only personthat was going to appear on my behalf. Itrusted my belief in the country andconstitution that I fought for and I learned avaluable lesson about the truth of ourgovernment and its judicial system.

Bill was the one who uncovered the connection with the FED

296

and Admiralty/Maritime courts. He realized the only way tobreak out of the trap was to proclaim himself a “SovereignBeing”. The Federal Courts had no jurisdiction oversomeone who is a Sovereign Being. The courts wereextensions of the UNITED STATES CORPORATION andactually only legal in the District of Columbia, based uponthe Act of 1871. By making a declaration, an individual canbe freed of the corporate control.

There is actually a handbook for judges called TheAnti-government Movement Guidebook. It is 202 pages andguides judges in the tricky legal maneuvering to stop Bill andothers like him from claiming individual sovereignty whichwould cause his case to be dismissed.(http://www.tulanelink.com/pdf/anti-gov_movement_guidebook.pdf)

The full scope of the legal maneuvering is beyond what weare doing here. Bill was on the right path but lost the fight tohave his case dismissed. The legal system knew how todeal with these situations. In a maneuver that was more of aslight of hand, Bill was sentenced to 30 months in FederalPrison.

The Butterfly

Bill said the one timeline existing at the end of 2012 wouldbe one where butterflies would emerge from cocoons. Haveyou seen any butterflies? Ah, but have you seen somecocoons beginning to deteriorate?

I am not sure how many people had followed Bill’s numerousinternet interviews. I suspect it was into the many thousands.He was not alone in calling for a unified conscious effort ofthe average person to focus their minds on creating a futureof unimagined potential. The fact we have survived anycataclysmic event of worldwide range and have yet to enterinto a region wide Middle East war, is a good indication Bill’sand others efforts may have worked.

From 2011 thru 2012 there were nonstop Internet stories ofimpending doom, orchestrated by a world dominating secretsociety bent upon complete control with the additional goalof a cataclysmic decrease in the population. Maybe all thiswas just so much BS. Nothing seems to have changed. Justmore of the same old 1% controlling 99%. But are we

297

missing something? Let us review what we know.

The John Kennedy Connection

In Book 1 reasons were given for believing Lee Oswald wasan operative of the United States Intelligence Community. Ialso postulated both Jack Ruby and Pope John XXIII wereassassinated by having a fast acting cancer introduced intotheir systems.

In 2012 a Face Book posting sent me to Judyth Vary Baker’sbook ME & LEE, How I came to know, love and lose LeeHarvey Oswald. This is a must read book. Baker came toknow Oswald because he was part of an intelligence unitresponsible for the development of a fast acting cancer. Thetarget was said to be Cuban Premier Castro.

Baker was still a teenager when she started researchingcancer, in response to her beloved grandmother’s death tothe disease. Every step of Baker’s rise into a position ofbeing critical to Oswald’s unit is detailed with stunning recall.Baker spent a lifetime fearing for her life. But she also spentthe time to write out memories as they came to her. She wasin her 70's before she finally got the truth out in her stunningbook copyright 2010.

Baker also provides a poignant narrative of how Oswaldbecame involved in the plot to kill the President and howOswald tried to stop it. Lee Harvey Oswald was not anassassin. He was an American Hero.

Everything my research led me to believe involving theassassination has only been further substantiated thru theyears and Baker’s book confirms some critical details frommy research.

Someone killed the President to stop him from making thechanges that would have already given us unbelievablepotential for good. But he was assassinated. And some veryevil men were at its heart. Judyth Baker’s book details thelower level operatives and makes the case that LyndonJohnson might have been giving orders. But I do not thinkJohnson was the head of the snake.

One thing is clear, the people controlling the world haveprotected themselves with layer upon layer of secret

298

societies and echelons of organization. The President’sAssassination opened that can of worms. You cannotresearch the Assassination without realizing there is a tightlywove organization of Oil, Banks, Industry and Governmentthat is really in control. What I have related is only a fractionof what has been uncovered regarding the “Military,Industrial, Financial Organization” running things.

The Jesus Connection

There is little more to say about this subject. I believe Jesuswas an example of human potential. When one realizes theyare a multilayered energy body and become empowered bythat realization, so called miracles can be accomplished.

The resurrection simply confirms the concept of energybodies being the source of and blueprint for physical humanbodies. Jesus died but instantaneously reincarnated causinga loss of molecular cohesion of the body that scorched theShroud of Turin.

The Jesus energy body adjusted to fit the profile of theGardener who was also being projected by Jesus’ soul. Itwas not much different than Kennedy and I sharing the samesoul. When he died something drastic changed in me. I hadthat weird feeling of walking through some foggy doorway ashis death was announced when I was fifteen.

I rather think the memories of Kennedy’s existence werestored in my own subconscious, which I think of as theconsciousness of the soul. My emotional attachment to theman in physical reality carried over and created a link to myown subconscious and the Kennedy memory bank thatexists there. It was the same relationship I have with Pattonand Luke Short and a variety of others that remain unnamed.I can tap into their memory banks being stored in mysubconscious, the consciousness of my soul.

The Soul Connection

There are certainly uncountable ways of postulating the souland its relationship to ourselves. The following is mine. It isbased upon my experiences and not my acceptance of anyother theory. There is, of course, much more to my expe-riences than I have related here. But the core source hascome from my relationship with Short, Patton and Kennedy.

299

The graphic displays a soul with six manifestation within the3-D universe. Each “PC” (personal computer or person forour purposes) operates in energy frequencies below thespeed of light. The Server copies everything in the PC andfiles it for eternity. The only connection between the PC unitsis through the Server Computer.

The signal connecting an individual PC with the Server iscalled the Silver Cord in metaphisical teaching. Theattachment point is believed to be the Pineal Gland (thesame gland most negatively affected by fluoride in thewater).

The only way the Server can initially “communicate” with thePC is through emotions or dreams. When you meetsomeone and have an immediate emotional response, thatis the Soul trying to guide you.

A PC is always getting much more information from theServer. But without having a “program” to access thatinformation, the PC cannot utilize the data. If someone has aprogram able to access the signals, they might be calledpsychic or mediums or maybe schizophrenic.

In my case, the program I have, accesses other PC’s beingprojected by my Server. I am not psychic nor do I normallysee dead people. I just believe I can go into the Servercomputer and download information from files stored thereon Patton, Short, Kennedy and others.

Your subconscious mind can be considered the consciousmind of the soul. When you enter the deepest levels of sleep(Rapid Eye Movement or REM) you are operating a program

300

running at the soul level. You essentially enter the files ofyour own PC being maintained at the Subconscious level.This also happens when taking a hallucinogenic ordemonstrating psychic powers, as discussed in Book 1.

Anyone can access the programing required to become anenhanced individual, as in the case of the Super Soldier.The first requirement is that you accept the fact that you canaccess these powers. #1 Reality is what you think it is.

#2 Majority Rules can be only one individual. Myself anduncounted others thought the reality being presented by theBlack Nobles was a delusion. Our numbers have explodedand continue to expand. At some point the HundredthMonkey Syndrome will kick in and everyone else will simplyawake to the fact they have been hoodwinked, by the BlackNobles.

Black Nobles

Oh I still do not know who they are. I know who they are atthe lower levels of the organization as those within theleadership roles of big government, industry, finance,etcetera.

It is obvious they have stretched their power in all directionsand have used fear to promote greed which then poisons thehuman spirit. Much of the Internet buzz focused on theIlluminate as being the pinnacle of the power structure. Thedata was persuasive. Then the Vatican shared the top levelwith the amount of research pointing its way. Evil ET’s bentupon keeping their secrets and control. Personally I justkeep thinking of them as Nazis.

As I was writing this section, my dear friend and colleagueDr. Robin Falkov asked me to look at a document. This isanother example of how every time I need some piece ofinformation, it shows up even if I did not know I needed it.The document provides a detailed view of what the BlackNobles actually think. Prepare yourself. It is really crazy.

Report From Iron Mountain: The Possibility andDesirability of Peace

Just look at the title. “Desirability of Peace”! Someone wantsto analyze how desirable peace is? And they took over 2½

301

years to answer that question. And then according to theForword, the report was suppressed. The only way it waspublished in 1967 was one of those on the Special StudyGroup released it to Leonard C. Lewin who went on topublish it.

My first reaction after just reading the Forward was itsounded like a hoax. In fact it is alleged Lewin himself wouldclaim it was a hoax in 1972. But I trust Dr. Falkov and kepton reading.

The more I ready the nuttier it got. I decided to go back tothe Foreword and review the basics. That was when I sawthe date and mumbled some bad words. The Special StudyGroup had been formed in August 1963! The whistle blowingmember believed the original order for the report had comefrom at least the Kennedy Cabinet level. “No,” I thought, “itcame from the President himself.”

Remember what had been happening during this time. InOctober 1962 the Cuban Missile Crisis erupted. Sovietnuclear weapon facilities were photographed in Cuba.Kennedy said take them out and Khrushchev sent his navalforces towards Cuba. As the crisis was coming to a head,both U.S. and Soviet navies were in a showdown. Suddenlythe Soviet ships stopped and then turned around. Crisisaverted. Nuclear war put on hold.

I uncovered a report that Robert Kennedy, the President’sbrother and Attorney General, had called the SovietAmbassador to the U.S. Bobby is said to have broken downin tears while relating the President realized he was not incontrol and the military was bent on taking nuclear action.Bobby was begging the Soviets to turn their ships around.

The Pope was brought in to make his radio plea thatprovided a cover for the Soviet retreat. Maybe it was a wayof saving face for the Soviets or maybe both leaders realizedsomething was very, very wrong with the world.

Soon after Norman Cousins became the link between thetwo leaders. A second back channel communication wasmaintained by Robert Kennedy and a Soviet Consulateofficial. Khrushchev and the Pope had communication byway of Khrushchev’s son-in-law. A public meeting between

302

Kennedy and the Pope was scheduled for the summer of1963. Kennedy and Khrushchev had already met in person.

Kennedy was making overtures to Khrushchev for a jointventure into space. He had established the Peace Corps byexecutive order. He gave a June 10, 1963 speech aboutpeace that moved Khrushchev to have it broadcastthroughout the Soviet Union. The following day his televisedaddress to the nation called for civil rights and the end ofdiscrimination. On August 5th the Nuclear Test Ban TreatyKennedy was signed after 8 years of negotiation. He wasmaking moves to get out of Viet Nam.

Sounds to me like he was thinking about a world a peace. Itmakes complete sense that Kennedy would have ordered astudy be made on how to accomplish this and what it wouldmean. This is a coincidence of timing that makes me favorthe authenticity of the report.

But what also points to authenticity is recommendationssuggested by the report we now see implemented.

The report concludes that war itself is the basic socialsystem holding up modern civilization. Without wellestablished war systems modern civilization would fall apart.To understand what they reported, we will look at thedifferent sections of society they claimed would have toundergo drastic changes in a peace environment.

One critical thing to keep in mind is who was suppose toread this report. It was never for public consumption. It wasto be presented to the leadership only. Thus, they could bevery honest.

Economic Stability

Well this is obvious. How did we get out of the GreatDepression? World War II. War makes the economy grow.But this study adds that war is inherently controlled arbitrarilyby politicians and that aids in control of the economy. TheFED’s manipulation of the amount of money in circulation isnot sufficient enough to adjust the economy when needed;but war can. Need a huge impetus to the economy? Have awar.

So for the economy, whatever replaces war needs to be

303

independent from the normal supply-demand economy. Youhave to be able to turn it on and off at the whim of theleaders. War creates an artificial demand on the economy inpeacetime and in war.

Weapon technological advancements are critical to theoverall economic structure. Without war what would happento all the war industries and the technological advancementsmotivated by war?

A possible substitution for war would be to take the fundingfor war and turn it toward social welfare programs in thefields of health, education, housing, transportation, povertyand many other helpful changes beneficial for the averageperson. However this would only work for as long as thingswere getting fixed. Sooner or later the people would have allthese social programs and expect to keep them. Controlover the economy could not be maintained.

What they favored was a Space exploration program thatwould never slow down.

Political

Starting war was not a necessity, as compromises are madedaily all over the world. War should never be required tonegotiate peaceful settlements between nations. However,nations cannot exist without the unifying nature of having anoutside enemy and a leadership in control of the militaryforces that will keep the nation safe. This in turn creates asituation where nations have to counter the military might ofother nations. Thus war capability becomes a critical factorin diplomatic negotiations. If you have it you might as wellflaunt it or even use it.

The report stresses the ability of military forces to alsoinfluence as a policing force against its own citizens. Thispower base influences the relationship of the government toits citizens. Without the ability to have a show of forcemaintaining control of the citizens is limited.

But the only way the citizens allow a substantial military toexist is because of a substantial outside threat. A centralgovernment exists to withstand an outside threat. Withoutthe threat the citizens would not tolerate a powerful centralgovernment.

304

The offered solution to this problem of a threat makes thingsscary. A threat from extraterrestrial sources would be idealbut the report writers did not think this would really happen.They did, however, suggest,

Experiments have been proposed to test thecredibility of an out-of-world invasion threat; itis possible that a few of the more difficult-to-explain “flying saucer” incidents of recentyears were in fact early experiments of thiskind.

Why would they already be testing the waters to see whatthe reaction would be? Interesting supposition.

Then the report proposes a massive environmental threatcould also pose a sufficient threat. They called it a “grosspollution of the environment”. They acknowledge thatpoisoning of the water, food and air were already ongoingand would take generations before it could pose a crediblethreat. So they suggest maybe this process could be hurriedalong.

This is where it looks like the recommendation was taken.Now we have the Global Warming concept along withnuclear pollution of staggering proportions with theJapanese Fukushima continuing crisis. But all the nuclearpower systems pose horrendous problems. Fracking isdoing a hell of a job on the water. Genetic engineering byMonsanto is devastating the food crops.

If the Black Nobles intend to take over the world, they mayrun out of a substantial enemy once all nations are undertheir control. War may not be an option. Environmentaldestruction could have been started to have a viableexternal threat and way to control the world’s citizens.

Sociological Control

This subject brings in some more unnerving thoughts. War inthe report constituted a way of controlling the undesirables inthe society. Unemployable - join the military. Juveniledelinquent - choose military over prison. The thirst for bloodor just afraid of boredom - have a war. The military draftworks at controlling the undesirables of society.

305

The report believes people have a thirst for blood. Otherwisewhy did civilizations, essentially at peace because they hadconquered all their neighbors, have grandiose bloodsacrifices? Think of the Aztecs and the Roman Colosseum.

Along with having blood games (does football cross yourmind?) the report suggests, “a sophisticated form of slaverymay be an absolute prerequisite for social control in a worldat peace.” Do you suppose the Birth Certificate scam couldbe called a sophisticated form of slavery?

Basic conclusion was humans need an allegiance to asociety for the society to survive. The only way to gainallegiance requires a cause and a cause requires a threat.

Ecological

The category is confusing. What the report is talking about ishow humans respond to changes in the environment thatthreaten their existence. Animals finding their food sourcesdiminished by environmental changes migrate in search forfood and/or water. Humans have a war to decrease thepopulation.

One thing they say makes me question the authenticity oftheir thinking. They claim military forces take in the sociallyunfit but also claim that war culls the best and brightest fromthe society. This seems to be a contradiction.

They do note that the modern war machine’s massdestruction is a more “democratic” way to decrease thepopulation. Ah, okay.

So war controls the population in an inefficient way. Animalmigration causes the weak to perish. War takes thestrongest and smartest first. So the report suggests thatcontrol of the population would be better served bycontrolling the birthrate. They mention infanticide, sexualmutilation, monasticism, forced emigration, extensive capitalpunishment as not being sufficiently efficient.

They seem to be lamenting the fact that deadly epidemicsdo not happen anymore. Well pandemics are possible withthe increasing strains of pestilence being geneticallyengineered and we are not going to discuss that terror here.The Report did not anticipate this lovely turn to their problem

306

of being able to decrease the world population.

What they decided is a great solution is to lace the watersupply with birth prevention drugs, forcing the population touse artificial insemination.

There is no question but that a universalrequirement that procreation be limited to theproducts of artificial insemination wouldprovide a fully adequate substitute control forpopulation levels. Such a reproductive systemwould, of course, have the added advantageof being susceptible of direct eugenicmanagement. Its predictable furtherdevelopment - conception and embryonicgrowth taking place wholly under laboratorycondition - would extend these controls totheir logical conclusion. The ecologicalfunction of war under these circumstanceswould not only be superseded but surpassedin effectiveness.

Right now the amount of birth control drugs getting from theurine of users into the water supply thru treatment andrecycling of waste water has become a concern and mayeventually turn into a crisis.

So what?

I cannot verify the validity of the reports authenticity. Thevery reason it has such interest is that it does seem to reflectthe mindset of the Black Nobles. To do what we see them dothey have to have the attitude and belief system towardhumanity reflected in the report. A customs agent has to bea bully to be effective. The Black Nobles have to besociopathic personalities to knowingly do what they do.Simple as that from my perspective.

Whether Extraterrestrial shape shifting Reptiles or justgreedy, evil human beings it does not matter whether or notwe can identify the Black Nobles. We can win against them.

Nothing I have discovered in my 25 year continued researchmakes me question any detail of The John Kennedy - JesusChrist Connection. In fact there has just been a continualsubstantiation of the details. Nothing has made me doubt the

307

validity of the Rules of Cosmic Reality nor this statement:

Ultimate power rests in every individualthought. If we wish to control our reality wemust begin by controlling each and everythought. Evil does not rest in some darkcorner of the world. Evil rests in the mindsthat can produce evil thoughts - evil energy.

DNA and Language

While appreciating the power of thought, I underestimatedthe power of sound. The Keys of Enoch had talked about afuture where sound was the way healing was accomplished.But it was the Russians who again presented some mindstretching data.

Protein is the basic building block of life. But the “How ToBuild Protein Instructions” are contained in a three volumeblueprint/instruction manual.

The first volume is DNAwith a sugar backbonetwisted in the doubleh e l i x a n d h o l d i n gnucleotides. Dependingupon the sequences ofthe three types of

nucleotides, a multitude of possible blueprints or instructionscan be made. Different types of protein can be produced.

Genes are another type of instruction manual where a seriesof DNA snippets are incorporated into a more complex set ofinstructions. 20,000 different genes can make over a milliondifferent types of protein.

Chromosomes are even more complex manuals where bothgenes and DNA are found. Most humans have 46chromosomes that come in pairs of 23 residing in each cell.

But while the building blocks of life are protein, only 10% ofthe DNA is protein building instructions. While this 10% hasbeen the focus of Western study, the 90% has fallen to theRussians to investigate. The West termed the 90% “JunkDNA”. The Russians term it language.

What do we tell people?

DNA stretched out of the double helix shape

308

Brother Mark received a call from his best friend’s wife. Shewas a nurse and had been given an Internet link by anothernurse. As best as we can recall (he had told me about thisbefore I realized its importance) the link was to a privateblog. The bloggers were university students who hadconducted a rather unorthodox experiment.

S p e c i f i c t y p e s o fnucleotides on the DNAare given letters. Thestudents had begun takingcertain DNA strands with

the nucleotide letters and translated the series into differentlanguages. Each time it was just garble, until they usedancient Hebrew. We remember it said something like, “Youhave found the messiah”.

The reason we are vague is because the link disappearedalmost immediately. With no proof it ever happened, I wasnot as diligent as I should have been in recording the exactinformation. But a few weeks later I found the Russian DNAresearch on language.

The students blogging were asking each other whether ornot they should make this information known. As itdisappeared it was not a prank, otherwise it would still be outthere. And I have not seen any reference to it since hearingabout it from Mark. But the Russians understood sincebefore 2007 the language connection and it was alreadypublic.

The Russians have found the 90% to be a source of datastorage and communication facilitation. DNA sequencingin the 90% followed set rules of basic grammar, identical tothe way in which phrases and sentences are put together bywords. There were semantics in the sequences providingmeaning in the same way words, phrases and sentencescome together to convey communication.

The Russian scientist concluded that the very languages wespeak have been formulated in patterns of our DNA! Butmore importantly they have realized the DNA is a biologicalInternet!

The DNA Internet

309

Your individual computer connects to a Server computeralong with other people’s computers. That Server thenconnects with other sever computers and that is what theInternet is. The connections are based upon energy that isprimarily carried over wires, although wireless commu-nications are becoming standard. The important thing is torealize these connections are all based upon energy.

Within the cells, the DNA and genes make up the chromo-some which appears to act like a server computer.

At the level of DNA, internal connections and communicationare also accomplished by energy. Russian biophysicist andmolecular biologist Pjotr Garjajev and his team determinedthat vibrations in the DNA results in a “laser radiation”.

LASER is the acronym for Light Amplification by StimulatedEmission of Radiation. What it means is that light is madeinto a constant wave versus the pulsing of normal light. Withthis stable light beam information can be swiftly carried. Ithappens every time your groceries are scanned for price.

Lasers can also be used to create those amazing holo-graphics we see, where empty space is painted in 3-Dimages.

Best as I can figure, this biologically sourced laser beam is aresult of internal vibrations of the DNA. The vibration of thebeam carries information with it that is detected by any otherDNA the beam connects with. Within a chromosome holdingboth genes and DNA strands the result is the chromosomebecomes a holographic computer.

Identification of the biological laser beam allowed for the

310

scientists to determine what energy frequencies could beused to affect the vibration at the DNA level. They realizedchanging the vibration could result in actual genetic changesin the DNA itself as the nucleotides became rearranged.

This makes complete sense. In our 3-D computer systemsall of the communication is accomplished by a code of 0 and1. That is it. Just two elements are in play in the binary codesystem we use at the 3-D level. “Binary” means two. At theDNA level 3 types of nucleotides provide the code. Imaginehow much information can be carried compared to the binarycode!

To give you one example. The Russians copied thefrequency pattern of a frog embryos within unhatched eggs.The then subjected salamander embryos to that frequency.The frog frequency acted like a virus in the DNA network ofthe salamander embryos. The result was the salamanderembryos now had the DNA vibrational pattern of a frog.What came out of the salamander egg was a frog! Cool,hey?

With the same principal, the scientists have begun to takethe vibrational pattern of a healthy cell and subject unhealthycells to that pattern. What happens? The sick cells havechanges in the DNA to match a healthy cell. This is calledVibrational Medicine and it is the future.

What is really astounding is that the scientists also detectedvibrational DNA changes from minute vibrations at certainfrequencies. Those frequencies are created by simple soundand of great impact that of sound carrying language! Everyword you hear or utter impacts your DNA!

Metaphysical teachings and the KEYS OF ENOCH stressthe power of language to program and reprogram ourselves.So beyond reality being what we THINK it is, maybe reality iswhat we FEEL it is, as our vibrational frequencies at theDNA level can be reprogrammed by sound.

My dear Mom, the one with 10 kids, knew about this soundaffect. She said a kid would do something that struck herfunny, but it was also something that should not be done. Soshe would yell at them. And what she was relating to me wasthat just by pretending to be mad, she would feel herself goto a state of anger. Now I know it was the sound of anger

311

causing the change!

DNA and Wormholes

Recall David Wilcock’s concept of the Source Field whichsurrounds us and is the source of everything. Well the waywe interact with the Source Field may also be at the DNAlevel.

Another Russian scientist Dr. Vladimir Poponin had a strandof DNA in a tube and beamed a laser light at it. The lightfollowed the spiraling pattern of the DNA, which is notparticularly surprising. What is surprising was when the DNAwas removed, the laser light continued the spiraling pattern.It is called the “Phantom DNA Effect”.

What the DNA under influence of the laser created was aminiature wormhole within the Source Field. And thatminiature wormhole breaks open the Space-Time fabric tolink with dimensions outside of the 3-D. This miniaturewormhole creates inexplicable electromagnetic fields thatcan actually cause electronic devices to fail as long as thewormhole is in operation. After the electromagnetic fieldsdiminish, electronic devices that had failed would operatecorrectly.

Is this wormhole responsible for psychic healing and theability to connect with the dead? Is this the fundamentalstructure operating in remote viewing or out of bodyexperiences? Is there a program some people have thatallow them to generate and focus innumerable wormholes atthe DNA level allowing them to breach the limitations ofSpace and Place? Is the ability to access enhanced physicaland conscious level powers really just the ability toreprogram DNA to tap into powers available from otherdimensions?

The Russians undoubtedly can answer these questions rightnow. I do not know when that information will be madepublic. Oh, wait, let us just do it now! Yes Super Soldiersexist because they have been trained and manipulated intocontrol over the vast power afforded them in their own DNA!

Bill was right that no implant is needed. All you need is abelief system and the discipline to reprogram every singlestrand of DNA to access higher powers physically and

312

consciously. It is all up to YOU. And it all starts with sound.

Turn off the damn TV!!!!! If they will send subliminalmessaging over the screen, what the hell do you think theyare doing to your DNA with the sound coming from the TV?

Refuse to use language that is detrimental to well being.Disease is just that dis-ease. If your DNA is vibrating at afrequency counter to perfect the cells cannot be perfect. Thechromosomes and cells are effected by changes in DNAvibrational rates. Those changes can be caused by almostany type of energy in varying degrees.

While we cannot control most of those energybombardments, we can control the energy that has the mostpowerful influence on DNA and that is language. The mostpowerful word, in my opinion, to bring on positive change is“love”. You simply cannot invoke the word without animmediate smile from each and ever segment of your ownDNA.

Start telling everyone you know that you love them and youwill immediately find a life of love opening in front of you. Isay this without hesitation because I tried it and wasprofoundly moved by the immediacy of the effect. “I smiled ata stranger and two people felt better,” was something afriend of mine often said. Now I have added sound. I smileand say, “Have a joyful day!” “Joy” is another one of thosemagically powerful words.

An Angel

I used to be a grump when out in public with strangers. I didnot like people, for the most part. I found them either boringor amusing depending upon my mood. This is not comingfrom an egotistical point of view. It is an introverted point ofview. I simply liked being alone versus human interaction.Unless that human found me interesting and we could sharethe experiences that openness and honest bring. Mostpeople could not go to the depths of thinking that we have inthis book.

So this dislike would move to actual panic attacks in stores.Of particular concern was the grocery store. After thinkingabout the concept of sound and DNA, I devised anexperiment. While on my way to the grocery store I made

313

myself focus on what a great experience it was going to beand how many people would be nice to me. And I repeatedthe words love and joy out loud.

That day I met a new friend at the bread counter, anothernew friend in produce, a third at the meat counter and thecashier. The man bagging is still not a friend, but at least heis not such a grump. The relationships continued and gotstronger every time I went to the store. But on the way to thestore I always make sure to program those little DNA powerhouses in my own body to be radiating the energy of joy andlove.

One day I pushed the cart up beside the manager of themeat department. He turned and saw me and said with astrange look, “Are you an angel?”

Well that took me by surprise. I replied, “Well maybe yourGuardian Angel sent me. What’s up?”

His face softened and he said, “I was having a really badday and asked God for a bit of help. Then I look up and seeyou. And every time I see you this feeling of happiness fillsme.”

By then he had tears in his eyes and so did I, “Well thenguess you are going to have a good day after all.”

I gave him his normal hug and said, “Love you.”

He just shook his head confirming he loved me too. Butsaying it does not come easy to people. We have to make iteasy for people to make the sounds that will change theworld, one DNA strand at a time.

Timelines Revisited

Remember the carved wood with the talons holding a spherethat I threw in the fire Christmas of 2000? It had been foundbetween the wood beam and outside wall of the house. It feltevil. It is a symbol that carries great meaning to someone.

Symbols have attached to them significance. While the logofor a product has a limited message, certain sacred symbolssend intricate messages to the brain that starts a vibrationdetected within the DNA biological internet.

What I think that wooden symbol was saying is that

314

somewhere on another timeline is a very bad situation wherethe Earth is being oppressed by evil. While not truly aware ofthe full story unfolding in my own DNA circuitry, there was adecision to be made. Stay on the current timeline and go toa sweet future. Or jump timelines and go to war.

I think it was not much of a decision. The warriors Pattonand Kennedy and others unnamed seem to have beenfighting perceived evil long before I came along. At the soullevel, on the Earth Plane, for as long as humans haveexisted on this planet, manifested personalities from my soulhave been warriors.

I have never played a video game. But I hear that once youmaster a certain level, the game jumps to a higher level thatis more difficult. Maybe timelines are really just levels of thegame of Reality. Win an awakening on one timeline, jump toanother timeline with other obstacles in the way ofenlightenment. Destroy yourselves in October 1962 overmissiles in Cuba, jump to another timeline where RobertKennedy begged for help and the Soviets retreated. On atimeline where 9/11 would not have happened, jump to onewhere it did happen and figure out what really transpired thathorrific day.

I sometimes wonder if the perfect future is not boring. Maybeeverything just started to manifest when “God” becamebored and began daydreaming. Being all powerful thosethoughts would become reality.

Regardless, I am willing to gamble being bored to just stopthe sociopathic Black Nobles and see what an Earth filledwith enlightened humans looks like. I really want to break outof the prison they have captured us in.

When we entered the new Age of Aquarius at the end of2012 and beginning of 2013, there was a return to thedefault timeline configuration. While not having any proof ofthis except my own observations, with the new age came thepotential for every conceivable timeline to the Future.

At the end of the old age of Pisces, there were only twotimelines existing. I believe there was some kind of point Icall a “singularity” between the Ages. In the old age all thepossible timelines had either ended in destruction or ended

315

in enlightenment. But on the other side of the singularity allpossible timelines were again available.

There was an initial flurry of opportunities being spoken of byseemingly everyone. But very quickly potential futuresseemed to evaporate. The dominate timeline of good thathad outlasted the timeline of awful was now dominating thenew age. But it was subtle. You had to pay attention to thedetails.

The Occupy Wall Street and the Arab Spring are indicatorsthe good timeline of the Age of Pisces won. The averageperson had awakened to the strength of the group. It wasagain Bill Brockbrader who was responsible for teaching menot only the power of the group, but the power of one mindfilled with remorse and emotion.

Face Book

My original motivation to join Face Book at the beginning of2011, was to promote the novel THE 9/11 CRUSADE. It didnot take long to realize the social media offered a massivesource of research. Anything you are interested in probablyhas a group on Face Book. Suddenly I was finding otherswho were in search of the same answers.

Richard Hoagland’s group was fun. Richard was often therejoining in and starting up many fascinating posting threads.But as happened to other groups, there were some verynegative people who joined. Some were just ignorant. Somewere there for the purpose of disruption.

Then I ended up in Bill Brockbrader’s group. It felt likecoming home. The others in the group, including Bill andEva, were so down to earth, caring, informative people. Onthe occasions when some negativity started raising its head,the group came together to cordially explain why negativitywas not acceptable. The ones who continued with thedisruption were simply banned, after being told why.

The day of Bill’s trial, Eva was in communication with Patwho was posting what was happening to the rest of thegroup. This went on all day. But what happened is that agood dozen of us from all over the United States and evenRichard in England, merged into a group. It was like a groupmeditation.

316

And as we spent hours posting back and forth, we realizedwe were synchronized in what we were envisioning. To usthere was a massive amount energy within the court roomthat was resulting in the awakening of not only the judge butalso the jury. It was a very powerful experience ofunification.

But while the jury was out deciding Bill’s fate, I becametelepathically linked with him. He was in a state of crisis. Hewas filled with guilt. It was not over the so called rape. Billwas feeling profound guilt over the deaths of all those in Iraqthat he had been part of killing.

I tried to get into his mind and lead him to a realization that itwas not his guilt to carry. Without having partaken in theterror he would not have been able to tell the rest of us whathappened. Bill felt he was guilty of killing those people andshould be punished.

When we finally got a posting from Pat that the jury hadcome back with a verdict of guilty, most were stunned. Buthaving seen how powerful Bill’s crisis was over guilt, I wasnot surprised. His need to be punished changed the timeline.Or so I thought.

In the many months after the trial I began to compile theinformation presented in this book Down the Rabbit Hole.Somewhere along the line I realized something about thefailure of Kennedy to pull off a coup with Khrushchev andPope John XXIII, against the Black Nobles. On the timelinewhere they succeeded something would have been lacking.

We would have been lacking. Without leadership to takecontrol and eliminate the evil it is we who have had to figureit all out. It has been left to us to take up the fight. In thescheme of a universe dedicated to evolving consciousness,this is the best timeline to be on.

Evolving Consciousness

It started with a swirling mass of dust and gas. The particlesbegan to come together and the gas fueled a sun and thesolar system evolved. And one of the planets that had beencreated we call Earth.

This is what we have been told. What we have not been told

317

is the bigger picture. The Source Field cannot create unlessthere is some consciousness providing a blueprint ofmanifestation.

I was just out of high school and standing in the over filledchurch attending Mass. All of a sudden I found myself incomplete darkness. The church had disappeared.Everything had disappeared. I thought, “Where am I?”

“Nowhere,” came into my mind.

I realized this place was a real place where nothing what soever existed. This Nowhere place felt like what things shouldbe. Unless there was some Prime Creator, someconsciousness to think, all we would have is Nowhere.

When the church again came into focus, I had changedforever. I could never imagine a universe withoutconsciousness. So what I see in the swirling dust that cameto be Earth is a consciousness called Gaia, which was thegoddess of Earth in ancient Greek primordial deities.

Gaia as a swirling mass of molten rock would reflect themost simple level of consciousness. After cooling anddeveloping a crust, Gaia took another leap in consciousnesswith the creation of microbic life and a step up inconsciousness. Another leap in consciousness came withplants, but plants had a very limited ability to explore. SoGaia brought reptiles into creation and the ability to go outinto the lands and experience new levels of life within a newconsciousness level. Gaia did the same with aquatic life.

Another leap in consciousness brought in the dinosaurs. Butthat did not work out very well. The huge animals wereessentially too big and nonstop eating was required tosurvive with no time to just experience life. Maybe Gaiaherself called for the asteroid that created an empty planet tostart again.

The replacement animals allowed for a vast diversification ofexperiences and consciousness had taken a major leap. Bythis time Gaia must have evolved telepathy, allowing forindividual animal beings to communicate and shareexperiences with others of their species.

The next jump of consciousness was that of man and the

318

development of language. Well we know this is not workingout very well. But along the way Gaia created humans calledshamans. These humans could take consciousness to alevel where they could expand their minds, allowing them toexperience what it is to be someone or something else.

They call it shape shifting. But it really is just a merging ofthe shaman’s consciousness with that of, let us say a hawk.The shaman is not just imagining what it is like to be a hawk.The shaman is experiencing what it is to be a hawk.

Shamans can tap the powers of telepathy, healing,mediumship, and knowing the future. Russian scientist areexplaining how they do it. They have also found devices toenhance access to these powers.

I believe the next jump in consciousness is that humanityevolves into the shaman consciousness. To do this we haveto rip open the cocoon keeping us contained and becomebutterflies free to soar. But to do this also requires Gaiaherself to take a tremendous leap in consciousness. Forhumans to evolve to the level of shaman requires Gaia toevolve to a totally sentient being.

we are the ocean in one drop

319